0€ HON f ~*S V $ 1. INTRODUCTION TO ENGLISH, FRENCH AND GERMAN PHONETICS WITH 1Rea£>tna Wessons ant) Bserctses BY LAUKA SOAMES NEW EDITION, REVISED AND EDITED BY WILHELM VIETOR, Ph.D., M.A. f PROFESSOR OF ENGLISH PHILOLOGY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF MARBURG SWAN SONNENSCHEIN & CO., Lim. NEW YORK : THE MACMILLAN CO. 1899 BOSTON COLLEGE LIBRARY CHESTNUT HILL, MASS. First Edition, 1891 ; Second Edition (reset), 1S99. 336 ABERDEEN UNIVERSITY PRESS. PKEFACE TO THE FIKST EDITION. Miss Soames's book will, I believe, supply a want much felt by teachers of English and foreign languages. There are learned works on comparative phonology, but I know of none which are sufficiently clear and simple to put into the hands of the average learner. The main purpose of the book is to give shortly and clearly an idea of the mode of formation of the articulate sounds of the three modern languages most studied in our schools. When the teaching is systematised, we may hope both that English will be pronounced with a purer accent, and that a good pronunciation of foreign tongues will be acquired in a comparatively short time. The task has almost necessarily involved an expose of the extraordinary anomalies of English spelling. As an educator, I am earnestly desirous for reform, and I trust that this book may shorten the time of waiting. Our spelling is one of the greatest hindrances to the intelligent study of phonology, without which that of philology is almost impossible to the young, since the same sounds are ever masquerading in a new dress. The phonetic alphabet made use of is so simple that any one can read it after half an hour's study, and the author has judiciously chosen well-known pieces to help the inexperienced in acquiring facility. DOKOTHEA BEALE, Principal of the Cheltenham Ladies' College. Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2013 http://archive.org/details/introductiontoenOOsoam EDITOE'S PEEFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. Complying with the desire of the late Miss Soames's literary trustees I have revised the present edition of her Introduction to the Study of Phonetics and seen it through the press. Miss Soames has left an annotated copy which has been at my disposal. As, however, most of this new matter had meanwhile been utilised, in accord- ance with the late author's directions, for her newer work, The Teacher s Manual, edited by me in 1897, I have confined my task to introducing Miss Soames's revised phonetic alphabet (whence the rather different aspect of the reading book, especially the specimens of German), breaking the text into numbered sections, and adding a few editorial notes. WILHELM VIETOE. Marburg, Germany, July, 1899. TABLE OF CONTENTS. PART I. INTBODUCTION TO PHONETICS. Preface by Miss Beale Editor's Preface Alphabets . Tables Diagrams . Introduction, §§ 1-11 I. The Vocal Organ9 Described, §§ 12-17 II. English Sounds Illustrated, §§ 18-59 Consonants, §§ 19-24 Long Vowels, §§ 25-32 Short Vowels, §§ 33-40 Diphthongs, §§ 41-44 The Letter r, §§ 45-59 III. English Analysis, §§ 60-105. Consonants. Introductory, §§ 60-62 Stops, §§ 63, 64 Liquids, §§ 65-69 Continuants, §§ 70-77 Composite Consonants, § 78 Syllabic Consonants, § 79 Vowels. Introductory, §§ 80-82 Five Principal Vowels, a, ey, i, ow, u, §§ 83 Remaining Long Vowels, e, 6, oe, §§ 88, 89 Short Vowels. Introductory, §§ 90, 91 Short Front Vowels, ae, e, i, § 92 . Short Back-round Vowels, o, u, ce, §§ 93, 94 Long and Short Vowels Compared, § 95 . Narrow and Wide Vowels, § 96 87 PAGE iii v xiv xviii xxvi 10 14 14 19 23 26 27 34 34 35 37 39 43 43 44 45 48 50 51 52 52 53 vin Contents. Unaccented Vowels. Introductory, §§ 97, 98 The Obscure Vowel a, §§ 99, 100 . Unaccented i and i', § 101 Short o', § 102 e' and u', § 103 .... Diphthongs, ai, au, oi, yu, §§ 104, 105 . IV. English Synthesis, §§ 106-159 . r Combined with Vowels, §§ 106-114 Doubled Sounds, § 115 . Consonants Combined, § 116 Inflections, §§ 117-121 . Accent, §§ 122-129 . Quantity, §§ 130, 131 Syllable Division, §§ 132-140 Intonation, §§ 141-143 . PAGE 54 56 57 57 58 58 61 62 68 69 70 73 78 79 82 Variable Woeds. Usages of different speakers, §§ 144-149 84 Weak Words, § 150 86 Unaccented SyUables, §§ 151-155 .... 88 A Syllable More or Less, §§ 156, 157 . . 90 Spelling of Variable Words, §§ 158, 159 . . . 92 V. Loan Words used in English, §§ 160-163 ... 95 Special Symbols Required, § 161 .... 95 The Most Necessary Foreign Sounds, § 162 . . 97 List of Loan Words, § 163 98 VI. Hints for Teachers, §§ 164-181 Ill Method Recommended, §§ 164-176 . . . .111 Common Mistakes, §§ 177-179 122 Key to the Spelling Lessons, § 180 . . . . 126 Key to the Exercises, § 181 128 VII. French Analysis, §§ 182-217 131 Consonants, §§ 183-201 131 Stops, § 184 132 Liquids, §§ 185-194 132 Continuants, §§ 195-201 136 Contents. IX PAGE 138 138 139 140 141 142 Unaccented Vowels in le, maison, comment, §§ 216, 217 143 Vowels, §§ 202-217 . : Open Vowels in pdte,patte, §§203, 204 . Front Vowels in pris, m, fini, §§ 205-208 Back-round Vowels in homme, drole, tout, §§ 209-212 Front-round Vowels in peur, peu, pu, §§ 213, 214 . Nasal Vowels in pan, pin, pont, tin, § 215 VIII. French Synthesis, §§ 218-234 . 145 Accent, §§ 218-221 . 145 Quantity, §§ 222-225 147 Intonation, § 226 . 149 Syllables, §§ 227-229 150 Liaison, §§ 230, 231 . 151 Elision, § 232 . 152 How Stops are Combined, § 233 153 Variations of Words ending in Voiceless m, 1, or r, § 234 153 IX. German Analysis, §§ 235-261 . 155 Standard German, § 236 . 155 The Consonants. Consonants Illustrated, § 237 . . 156 Six New Consonants, §§ 238-244 . . 158 Familiar Consonants, §§ 245-2 47 . 160 The Vowels. Vowels Illustrated, § 248 . . . 162 German Vowels Described, § 249 .... 163 Long and Short Vowels, § 250 163 Open Vowels in lahm, Lamm, § 251 . . . 164 Front Vowels in mahen, Manner, geh, ihn, Sinn, §§252,253 165 Back-round Vowels in Sohn, Sonne, Kuh, dumm, §§254,255 165 Front-round Vowels in Sohne, konnen, kilhn, diinn, §§256,257 166 Unaccented Vowels in " Gabe," etc., §§ 258, 259 . 167 Diphthongs in Ei, Haus, Heu, § 260 . . . 168 Nasal Vowels, § 261 168 Contents. PAGE X. German Synthesis, §§ 262-269 169 Vowels followed by r, §§ 262, 263 . . . . 169 Quantity, §§ 264-266 170 Accent, § 267 172 Intonation, § 268 173 Syllables, § 269 173 XL Symbolization of German Sounds, §§ 270-274 . . 174 The Consonants, §§ 270-273 174 The Vowels, § 274 177 PAET II. BEADING LESSONS AND EXERCISES. Peose Reading Book. . JEsop's Fables Introductory. Spelling Lessons I. The Fox and the Goat .... II. The Miser III. The Cock and the Jewel .... IV. The Crab and her Mother V. The Miller, his Son, and their Ass . VI. The Country Maid and her Milk-Can . VII. The Frogs Asking for a King . VIII. The Country Mouse and the Town Mouse IX. The Ass's Shadow X. The Monkey and the Dolphin XL The Wind and the Sun .... XII. The Fox without a Tail .... XLTI. Raleigh's Two Plants 16 XIV. A Boy's Adventures among the Sea-Caves . Hugh Miller 17 XV. The Discontented Pendulum .... Jane Taylor 23 XVI. The Little Drummer-Boy 26 XVII. The Jowf in Arabia Palgrave 29 XVIII. The Society of Books Buskin 30 5 8 8 9 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 14 15 Contents. xi Poetey Beading Book. page The Street of By-and-By Abdy 31 The Jackdaw of Eheims Barham 32 The Child with the Bird at the Bush . . . Bunyan 36 The Destruction of Sennacherib .... Byron 37 The Mariners of England Campbell 38 Answer to a Child's Question .... Coleridge 40 The Pine-Apple and the Bee Cowper 40 The Ketired Cat „ 41 The Contest between the Nose and the Eyes „ 44 John Gilpin „ 45 At Sea Cunningham 53 William Tell ....*... Gurney 54 Monkey's Manners Hood 58 Song of the Street Monkey ,, 59 The Dormouse Howitt 59 The Grasshopper and the Cricket .... Keats 60 Ode to the Cuckoo Logan 61 The Miller of Dee Mackay 62 One by One Proctor 63 Lochinvar Scott 64 After Blenheim Southey 66 Some Murmur Trench 68 Exercises. Exercises in Writing English Phonetically 69 Appendices. Specimens of French. L'Anthropophage 79 Les Deux Palmiers 80 La Maison qui Marche 80 Specimens of German. Lines from "Wilhelm Tell" 83 Song by Uhland 84 Extract from Gothe's " Leiden des jungen Werthers" . . 84 Specimen of English, showing variable words. The Iceberg 86 ALPHABETS, TABLES AND DIAGRAMS ALPHABETS. THE ENGLISH ALPHABET. Stops The Con SONANTS. f p ' wh b w t f d Y k -t-= th — as ir l thistle, Arthur k g— as r m in get, egg d3 a • I— 1 -4= dh ,, s this, father seal, hiss n o a z zeal, his ng ,, 1 singer, sink sh zh ,, glazier, pleasure , r y { h - Composite Liquids ch = t + sh, as in chest, batch j = d + zh, „ jest, badge m', n', 1', are used for syllabic m, n, 1, as in sizm', ritn', botr (schism, written, bottle). n-g, w-h, t-h, d-h, s-h, z-h are used for the sounds in en- gage, blow-hole, out-house, blood-hound, mishap and hogshead. Names of the Consonants. They are called pa, ba, ta, da, ka, ga, ma, na, nga, la, ra, and so on, as in pa-rental, ba-zaar, ta-boo, Da-rius, calam- ity, ga-zette, ma-ture, na-tivity, si-nge(r), la-ment, ra-vine. C, Q and X. These symbols are not used in this scheme, except c in the combination ch. In ordinary spelling c is used for k or s, as in cat, cell ; q is used for k, as in quick ; and x is used for ks or gz, and xi for ksh, as in box, exist, noxious. a o S-l The Vowels. The Vowels. Long, a — as in ba oe e ey 1 o ow .A u boen (bum) feri (fairy) feyt (/ate) fit (/fee*) Pol (PawZ) powl (pole) pul (pooZ) XV Short. a — as in atend (attend) „ po3ti (putty) „ past (pa£) » pet „ pit „ pot ,, pilo' (pillow) „ put ai — as in taim (time) au ,, laud (loud) oi ,, noiz (noise) yu ,, tyun (tune) yu ,, regyular (regular) Diphthongs. ea — as in bear ia ,, biar (bier) oa ua boar buar (boor) Names of the Short Vowels. They are called a, 03 1, set, et, it, ot, short o, ut, as in the key- words attend, putty, pat, pet, pit, pot, pillow, put. Script Forms. The script forms of 28 and 03 can be written without lifting the pen, thus : — se oe Stress. Stressed or accented syllables may generally be known by rule ; but when it is necessary to indicate them they are marked thus : intend, invest, info'mal, impo'tant. XVI Alphabets. THE FRENCH ALPHABET. The Consonants. Stops ■{ Liquids -as in regne (ren) 05 a c3 • i—i O O m- -as in prisme *1 >» peuple r >> autre u >> buis w )j moi (mwa) f Y S Z ch M cto = Eng. sh J »J j'e = Eng. zh y >J fo'm (byew) The Vowels. Oral. Nasal. as in pate aw patte pres en ete fini 2un — as in pan en ,, pin, bien a- -as a e -+3 O H e e i Oral. Nasal. — as in homme on drole tout peur eun peu pu on — as in pont eun „ un, jeun All the vowels may be long or short, except e and e, which are always short. Long vowels are written thus : a:, The German Alphabet. xvii THE GEEMAN ALPHABET. The Consonants. P w — lip-h p, as otten m zwei b f t Y Stops - d S k Z 1 , ' — the glottal stop m n w c8 • O O sh zh 5 J ich Eng. yet Liquids ■ ng 1 r x 9 ach N. Ger. Wag en r 2 — guttural r The 1 OWELS. Long. Short. a : — as in lahm a — as in Lamm r a : , , mdhen e „ G» EH h M O Ph Ph W •q^aia 43 N 43 00 © -peoiOA a 13 pi p— < H CO eh W -peoiOA K EH M H O S P4 g -qi^a 43 43 +3 , W 'P 93 I°A P-l EH 1-1 ^ •q^8Ja X CM 03 Hi M hi 43 O B > EH H O ■peoioA. OhPQ •q^aia 2 s N •F-3 2" CO 6 -paoioA a co "q^ag l-H 5h 09 EH H O H to 8 Pn Eh > 1 Lips. Mg * -q^aaa ^ -p 9: >! A S3 •peopA •q^aa CO O -+= CQ co 5ZJ EH CD • l-H CQ spmbuj CO -»■=» 2 A P-i O o O XX w EH o w. 5zj O O o O H S H Pd o &9 EH «4 xa O -13 0) « -c H PQ a ■P 90 I°A 'OO •00 - Cr> «u pq ■q^aig ^J X EH 'P 9D I°A ^ Q *^^ S •"—9 ft •q^aig o> J> a5 ■p8DI0_\ A C3 fcJI ■5 <3 Eh c-4 •q^Baag .4 CO g O Oh ft 2 •paoio^V ts c i-H 91 N 33 •q^aig; -+j CO H W ft EH a H PhH , w •paoioA > PM EH w H 1-3 H &H -q^-Bsig «M « 5 •paoiOA od 3 CQ z>2 •q^'Baig ■H"^ ■paopA P4 9 s M 2 s k1 r*" 1 O ■q^ajg; d •paoio^v -o a § ft, S X •q^ajg A 00 O ■4= QQ c3 CQ QQ - spmbirj CO •w CI fl c5 cu fl P4 o o c o O XXI CO «l 55 O CQ 52! O O 525 b Q W o H B ft W CQ l— I 5zi & o a w o CQ Q H 525 i— t ffl o O EH < O .a B A H EH n M ■paoioA '00 £rs o •« pq •q^QJta ^ U S* X EH •paoioA «4 >> O ft ^. •q^sia «3 o> ^ ■4J 0) •paaiOA. N 0-73 "S.S EH PhM •qcfeajg ,4 CQ O &H a5 ft g •paoiOA ^d d i-h &H N CO •q^aag +J « ij-»i *< 09 . ,JCJ Eh W fc EH •paoio^v ^ M S O a PMEH •q^Bajg ,4 , W Cm EH 'P 83 J°A > w S i EH •q^ajg & o ft s ft H o GQ CD CD 4= CD CD 'c3 3 >5 v — ** S * 8 c^ B t>M mH CD CD <© O « ft P. P O 9 s o3 5-i P r— ( • r- 1 -Q > « — / Q ' a cS •i— i DS c5 3j £ "3 -CD 02 3 H •p-i »o -CO !zi O P3 9 s 1 ft Q !?5 "3 m ft -3- (9 P O 9" 9" CD eu (peur) ^ ■+3 -4=> c3 3 ti M ^ Q P O "aT Ph 1 CO — 9" ci c3 3 fc 3 M > « rtJJ ft Gullet. Diagrams. xxvii Laryngoscopic view of the Female Glottis in the delivery of a Headnote (ordinary appearance). III. Laryngoscopic view of the Male Glottis in the delivery of a Low Note. c£Sb, IV. F. Co.) F.(u)t F.(eu).ey Tongue V. Diagram illustrating the formation of the Ten Principal Vowels. Rounded Vowels are enclosed in brackets. INTEODUCTION. § 1. The object and plan of this book are indicated in its title and table of contents, but they need to be explained somewhat more fully. It is not written for the purpose of bringing about a reform in the spelling of the English language, although, in the opinion of all philologists, and of many of the most thoughtful teachers, this is greatly to be desired. A study of the sounds of English will, it is to be hoped, prepare the way for that reform, which still seems to be in the far distance ; but in the meantime English people need to know the sounds of their mother tongue for three reasons : (1) that they may speak it correctly ; (2) that they may learn successfully the pronunciation of other languages, to which a knowledge of their own is the best introduction ; and (3) that those who wish to study philology may have a key to that science. And the sounds of our language cannot be studied or explained without some system of phonetic spelling. § 2. Importance of the Subject. In the present day the importance of good English elocution is beginning to be duly recognised, and it is felt that modern languages ought to be more widely and efficiently taught than they have been hitherto. Philologists also tell us very plainly that an acquaintance with the written symbols of a language is not an adequate knowledge of the language itself, of which these symbols are but a more or less imperfect representation. § 3. A Better System needed. But we are not making much progress in this direction. Even amongst well-educated people, a clear and beautiful pronunciation of the English 1 2 Introduction. [§§ 4, 5. language, without slovenliness or affectation, is exceedingly rare, and it is still more unusual to hear Englishmen speak French or German clearly and intelligibly, whilst lecturers on etymology find the students' ignorance of the sounds of language a serious barrier to their progress. Nor is this to be wondered at. For whilst we aim at teaching all other subjects on some well-planned method, the sounds of language are left to be picked up anyhow, by mere imitation and sheer force of memory, so that, setting aside students of shorthand, it is probable that not one person in a thousand could enumerate the principal sounds of our language, or of any other, or has any clear conception of the principles on which they should be classified. And any teacher wishing to prepare himself to instruct a class in the first elements of phonetics is met by this serious difficulty, that there is no easy manual of phonetics to be had in which the sounds of English, French and German are simply explained. So this work is an attempt to supply the deficiency. § 4. Prominence giyen to English Phonetics. The greater part of the book is devoted to English sounds : (1) because we ought to proceed from the known to the unknown, and any confusion in our minds concerning English sounds will lead us to mix them up unawares with the sounds of other languages ; (2) because when the principles of phonetics have once been taught and illustrated in our own language, this need not be repeated; and (3) because the sounds of English are more difficult than those of French and German. § 5. A New Alphabet necessary. The alphabets used in this book need a few words of explanation, as the need for a new alphabet is not obvious at first sight. The prevailing notion seems to be that nothing is easier than to spell phoneti- cally with our present alphabet. But in point of fact the Eoman alphabet, originally planned for a language with a simpler sound system, has not nearly symbols enough for the §§6, 7.] Introduction. 3 very numerous sounds of our language. For instance, we have no symbols by which we can distinguish u in but and in put, th in this and in thistle, or s in lesser and leisure. So the deficiency must be remedied and the alphabet supplemented, either (1) by new letters, or (2) by using diacritic signs, or (3) by combining the old letters to form digraphs, as we are accustomed to do, for example, when we use th, sh, ng, ee, oo, to represent simple sounds. § 6. Characteristics of Alphabets used here. The objects aimed at in planning the alphabets used in this book are, to make the phonetic writing easy to read, to write and to print, by keeping as close to the received usage as possible. So no new or turned letters are used, and very few diacritic signs. The alphabet is supplemented chiefly by means of digraphs. There would have been some obvious advantages in using the international alphabet of the Maitre Phonetique, which can be adapted to any language, and where there is a single symbol for each sound. But this would necessitate the introduction of a good many new characters, as well as many departures from the usage of each particular nation, making the system much more difficult to read, to write and to print. The question is so often asked, by persons to whom the subject is new, " Could I read your phonetic writing at first sight?" that it is well to reduce this initial difficulty as much as possible ; and the labour of teaching children to write new characters, and the trouble of getting them printed, are con- siderations of some importance. The English alphabet used here is based upon Mr. Sweet's Broad Eomic and the late Mr. W. E. Evan's Union. The French and German alphabets are original. § 7. The Subject carefully graduated. Great pains have been taken to graduate the subject, so as to make it intelligible to beginners. For instance, the consonants are treated before the vowels, as being easier to distinguish from one another, and to classify, according to the manner in which they are 4 Introduction. [§§ 8, 9. formed. Some experience in teaching young children has been very valuable as showing in what order it is expedient to deal with the various parts of the subject, and special instructions for teachers will be found in Chap. VI. § 8. Selection of Passages for Reading. The passages for reading have been selected with a view to the requirements of children of ten years of age and upwards. It would be by far the best plan to teach children the sounds of the English language systematically from the very beginning, and to let them learn phonetic spelling before they attempt to spell in any other way. They would then articulate much better, and the irregularities of our ordinary spelling would be more accurately observed and more easily remembered, when the pupils had some fixed standard with which they could compare them. But teachers in elementary schools are not free to begin with phonetic spelling, and in secondary schools, where the need for phonetics will be more easily recognised, on account of the necessity for teaching French and German, and where there is more liberty of action, most of the children have learnt to read and begun to spell before admission. It will therefore be necessary, as a rule, to postpone the teaching of phonetics until they are at least ten years of age, so that they may have a fair knowledge of the ordinary spelling before they attempt any fresh system. And meantime the teacher, who has himself acquired a knowledge of phonetics, will have his perceptions of sound so sharpened that he will be able to do much, without any systematic lessons in phonetics, to correct defects of pro- nunciation and to train his pupils to pronounce English clearly and well. § 9. Oral Teaching necessary. It is not pretended that the use of this, or of any other book on phonetics, can supersede oral teaching, but it is hoped that this popular exposition of the sounds of English, French and German may enable teachers to acquire for themselves the first principles of phonetics, and make their oral teaching systematic and effectual. § 10.] Introduction. 5 § 10. In conclusion, I may say that this work has not been undertaken without careful preparation. It is now more than thirty years since I first began to study the sounds of English, French and German, so that the book is the result of personal observation as well as of reading, and I hope it will prove re- liable. The soundness of the French and German sections is, I think, sufficiently guaranteed by M. Paul Passy and Prof. W. Vietor, for this part of the book is based upon their writings, and has been thoroughly revised by them. They assure me also that I have succeeded in acquiring a good pronunciation of French and German. As regards the sounds of English, I have not found myself able to follow any one phonetician in particular, nor to use the vowel system of Mr. Bell, which is adopted, with some modifi- cations, by Messrs. Ellis and Sweet. But in this I am not singular, for the Bell system is not generally accepted by foreign phoneticians. I have however learnt much from the writings of Dr. Sweet, and especially from his Elementarbuch. The writers from whom I have derived most assistance in preparing this volume are Sweet, Yietor, Passy, Murray (in the New English Dictionary), Ellis, and the late Mr. W. R. Evans. I have also profited from the works of Beyer, Trautmann, Tech- mer, Jespersen, and others, and have learnt something from the dictionaries of Walker and Stormonth, though the phonetic systems of these dictionaries are very imperfect, especially as regards unaccented vowels. I am also indebted to the kindness of many fellow-workers for help and criticisms of various kinds ; to the late Frau Flohr, for first giving me an interest in phonetics, by her excellent lessons in German pronunciation ; to the late Mr. W. R. Evans, Dr. Sweet, and Prof. Skeat for various useful criticisms ; and most of all to Prof. Vietor, M. Passy, Dr. Ellis, and Prof. A. Schroer, for oral instruction and for reading and revising my book. I have also to thank Prof. Vietor, Dr. Techmer and Sir 6 Introdtiction. [§11. Morell Mackenzie, for permission to use diagrams ; and Mr. Murray for allowing me to borrow twelve of James's M sop's Fables. It may be useful to append here a list of some of the most necessary books on phonetics, originally prepared for the Con- ference of the Teachers' Guild in April, 1890. § 11. LIST OF BOOKS EECOMMENDED TO STUDENTS. English, Feench and Geeman. (1) Le Maitre Phonetique. Organe de l'Association Phone- tique Internationale. (11 route de Fontenay, Bourg- la-Eeine, Seine.) Monthly : price per ami., 4 fr. ; per single number, 35 centimes. For members of the Association, 3 fr. per ann. (2) Primer of Phonetics. Henry Sweet. (Clarendon Press, 1890.) 3s. 6d. (3) Elemente der Phonetik und Orthoepie des Deutschen, Englischen und Franzosischen, von Wilhelm Vietor. 4. durchgesehene Aunage. (0. E. Eeisland, Leipzig, 1898.) 7 marks ; half -bound, 8 m. (4) Kleine Phonetik des Deutschen, Englischen und Franzo- sischen. (0. E. Eeisland, Leipzig, 1897.) Marks 240. (5) Elements of Phonetics : English, French and German. Wilhelm Vietor. Translated and adapted by Walter Bippmann. (J. M. Dent & Co., London, 1898.) 2s. 6d. net. (6) Phonetische Studien. Zeitschrift fur wissenschaftliche und praktische Phonetik. Herausgegeben von Wilhelm Vietor. Six vols. (N. G. Elwert, Marburg in Hessen, 1888—1893.) Marks 36 net. (7) Die Neueren Sprachen. Zeitschrift fur den neusprach- lichen Unterricht. Zugleich Fortsetzung der Phone- § 11.] Boohs Becommended to Students. 7 tischen Studien. Herausgegeben von Wilhelm Vietor. (N. G. Elwert, Marburg in Hessen.) Ten numbers appear in the year. Marks 12 per ann. English. (1) Elementarbuch des Gesprochenen Englisch. Henry Sweet. 3rd ed. (Clarendon Press, 1891.) 2s. Qd. (2) Primer of Spoken English. Henry Sweet. 2nd ed. (Clarendon Press, 1898.) 3s. 6d. (3) The Teacher's Manual. (Soames's Phonetic Method for Learning to Eead.) Two parts. (Swan Sonnen- schein & Co., London, 1897.) Each 2s. 6d. (4) Albany Phonetic Headers. (Soames's Method.) Three numbers. (Swan Sonnenschein & Co., London, 1893.) 4d., ±d. and 8d. (5) Northern English. B. J. Lloyd. (Vietor's Skizzen Lebender Sprachen. I.) (B. G. Teubner, Leipzig, 1899.) Marks 3. Fkench. (1) Les Sons du Frangais. Leur Formation, leur Combi- naison, leur Eepresentation. Paul Passy. 4 e ed. (Firmin-Didot, Paris, 1895.) 1 fr. 50 c. (2) Le Frangais Parle. Morceaux choisis a l'usage des etrangers, avec la Prononciation Figuree. Paul Passy. 4 e ed. (0. E. Eeisland, Leipzig, 1897.) Marks 1-80. (3) Premier (Deuzieme) Livre de Lecture. Paul Passy. 3 e ed. (Librairie Populaire, Paris, 1896-1890.) 30 c. and 50 c. (4) 25 Cantiques Populaires : also, L'Evangile de Luc; Actes des Apotres ; Lettre aux Philippines ; L'Evangile de Jean; La Legende du 4 e Mage; Lectures Variees, en transcription phonetique. Paul Passy. (Librairie Populaire, Paris, 1893 ff.) 25 c. to 2 fr. 50 c. 8 Introduction. [§ 11. (5) Abrige de Pronunciation Frangaise (Phonetique et Orthoepie). Paul Passy. (0. E. Eeisland, Leipzig, 1897.) Marks 1. (6) Phrases de tous les jours. Felix Franke. T ed. (0. E. Eeisland, Leipzig, 1896.) Marks 0*80. (7) Ergdnzungsheft (to 6). Felix Franke. 4 e ed. (0. E. Eeisland, Leipzig, 1894.) (8) Fransk Begynderbog. Otto Jespersen. 2. udg. (Carl Larsen, Copenhagen, 1897.) 3 kr. (9) Franzosische Phonetik, fur Lehrer und Studierende. Franz Beyer. 2. Aufl. (Otto Schulze, Cothen, 1897.) Marks 4-80. (10) Elementarbuch des Gesprochenen Franzosisch. F. Beyer und P. Passy. (Otto Schulze, Cothen, 1893.) Marks 2.50. (11) Ergdnzungsheft (to 10). F. Beyer. (Otto Schulze, Cothen, 1893.) (12) Franzosische Aussprache und Sprachfertigkeit. Phone- tik sowie mundliche und schriftliche tlbungen im Klassenunterrichte. 3rd ed. Karl Quiehl. (N. G. Elwert, Marburg in Hessen, 1898.) . Marks 3-20, half -bound, m. 3-80. German. (1) German Pronunciation : Practice and Theory. By Wilhelm Victor, Ph.D., M.A. (Marburg). 2nd ed. (Henninger Brothers, Heilbronn, 1890.) Marks 1-50; cloth, m. 2. (2) Lesebuch in Lautschrift. Wilhelm Victor. 1st part. (B. G. Teubner, Leipzig, 1899.) Marks 3. (3) Deutsche Biihnenaussprache. Ergebnisse der Bera- tungen zur ausgleichenden Eegelung der deutschen Buhnenaussprache . . . Irn Auftrage der Kommis- sion herausgegeben von Theodor Siebs. (Albert Ahn, Berlin, Koln und Leipzig, 1898.) Marks 2. § 11.] Books Recommended to Students. 9 The most necessary for beginners of the books above mentioned are Sweet's Primer of Spoken English, Passy's Sons du Franpais, Vietor's German Pronunciation, and the Maitre Phone tique. Professor Vietor's Elemente der Phonetik -will also be found extremely useful as giving a comparative view of English, French and German sounds, and Neuere Sprachen is essential to those who wish to keep abreast of the rapidly advancing science of Phonetics. I. THE VOCAL OEGANS DESCKIBED. § 12. It is impossible to explain and classify the sounds of any language without first describing the apparatus by which human speech is formed. The organs of speech are the lungs, with the bronchial tubes, the windpipe, the upper portion of which is called the larynx, the pharynx, or passage immediately above the windpipe and gullet, the mouth and the nose. A general view of the organs of speech, excepting the lungs and the bronchial tubes, is given in diagram I., whilst II. and III. give views of the larnyx as seen in the laryngoscope, and IV. shows the glottis, or slit in the larynx through which the breath passes, opened more or less widely according to the manner in which it is used. § 13. The Lungs. The function of the lungs in speech is simply to act as bellows, and to propel the air through the windpipe to the larynx, where the voice is formed. The notion that some voice sounds are formed in the chest, whilst others proceed from the head, and so on, is very widely prevalent, but it is a delusion to suppose that the voice can be formed anywhere except in the larynx. § 14. The Larynx is the upper part of the windpipe. It may be seen in men to form the projection in the throat familiarly called Adam's apple. In the larynx are two horizontal membranes called the vocal chords, which appear in diagrams II. and III. as two parallel white bands in the centre of the larynx. They are connected by membranes called ventricular (10) §§ 15, 16.] The Vocal Organs Described. 11 bands with the walls of the larynx, so that the air from the lungs is obliged to pass between them. The opening between the vocal chords is called the glottis. § 15. The Glottis. The vocal chords are attached at the back to two movable cartilages, called the arytenoid cartilages, fig. IV. cc, and the diagram shows how the glottis may be opened to leave a passage for the breath, or entirely closed so as to stop it, or how the cartilages at the back may be open and the vocal chords closed, or the reverse. When the stream of breath, passing through the larynx, causes the vocal chords, or lips of the glottis, to vibrate, it produces the sound we call voice. Fig. IV. 1 represents the glottis opened as wide as possible, both back and front, as it would be for blowing out a candle. IV. 2 shows it in the position for sounding the letter h, when the opening is reduced, but the vocal chords are not made to vibrate. They are only brought sufficiently near to one another to cause a slight friction of the breath against their edges. In IV. 3 we see an opening in the cartilaginous glottis alone, used for whispering. IV. 4 and 5, which should be compared with II. and III., show the glottis as it is during the emission of the voice, when the vocal chords are vibrating. It will be observed that, for the upper register (IV. 4), only a small portion of the vocal chords can vibrate, as they are partially closed, whilst the cartilaginous glottis is completely shut ; and in this register the glottis is alternately open and shut, so that the air passes between the chords in a series of puffs. But for the lower register (IV. 5) the chords vibrate in their whole length, and the cartilaginous glottis is slightly opened. IV. 6 represents the glottis completely shut, so that the breath is quite stopped. In coughing, or clearing the throat, it is closed in this manner, and then suddenly opened with an explosion ; and the same action, used in speaking, is called the glottal stop. § 16. The Superglottal Passages, through which the breath passes when it has left the larynx, form a resonance 12 The Vocal Organs Described. [§ 17. chamber, modifying the quality of the voice. Sounds can be formed by the breath in these passages, without any vibration of the vocal chords, as for instance, s and sh, used in hissing and hushing, but not the sound we call voice. The breath passes first into the pharynx, which is separated from the larynx by a movable lid called the epiglottis. This lid is closed in the act of swallowing, to prevent the food from passing into the windpipe and choking us. And from the pharynx it passes out through the mouth or the nose. The passage through the nose can be opened or closed by the movements of the soft palate (I. c). For although the front half of the palate is hard, the back part, to which is attached the little tongue called the uvula, is soft and movable. By lowering the soft palate we allow the air to pass behind it and escape by the nose, as it commonly does when we are at rest ; but in speaking and singing the soft palate is raised, and the nose passage shut, so that the breath all passes through the mouth, except when we pronounce those vowels and consonants which are called nasal. It is by the movements of the lips, tongue and soft palate that the various vowels and consonants are formed, as we shall see when considering them in detail. § 17. The vocal organs have been compared to various kinds of instruments, but Dr. Morell Mackenzie says, " The larynx is a musical instrument unique in construction, which cannot, strictly speaking, be classed with any other sound-producing apparatus. It bears a close resemblance, however, to the so- called reed instruments, though differing from them in several important points. Eeeds are of different kinds, but the essential feature in all is that they break up a continuous current of air into a series of jets or puffs. The vocal reeds are elastic membranes which must be stretched between the fixed points of attachment before they can be made to vibrate. This is effected by the action of the various muscles acting on the chords, and the degree of tension can be altered and the § 17.] The Vocal Organs Described. 13 vibrating element lengthened or shortened at will, so that one chord serves the purpose of many reeds of different sizes, a triumph of economy of material combined with perfection of mechanism to which there is nothing comparable in any musical instrument made with hands." II. ENGLISH SOUNDS ILLUSTKATED. § 18. The very first step in the study of phonetics should be to learn to distinguish the sounds of the mother tongue ; and as many of these are obscured by our ordinary spelling, it seems necessary to illustrate them very fully, as is done in the following examples. It will be found that some sounds have been more fully illustrated than others. This is done to meet the requirements of teachers, who may be glad to find a large number of examples of the rarer and more difficult sounds, to serve as examples in class teaching. Amongst the examples are some rare and very irregular words, which may perhaps seem superfluous. These are not meant for children ; but just because they are so seldom heard, it may be convenient to show how they ought to be pronounced. Some of these rare words are taken from a list drawn up by Dr. Ellis, and now out of print. The Consonants Illusteated. § 19. The symbols used to represent the consonants in ordinary spelling are as follows : — p. Symbols : — p, pp, ph, pe, ppe, gh ; as in pen ClaPB.am steppB happy GrimthorPB Hiccough. b. Symbols : — b, bb, pb, be ; as in Bed eBB cuPBoard MorecamBE (U) §§ 19, 20.] The Consonants Illustrated. 15 t. Symbols : — t, tt, ed, th, tw, bt, ct, pt, cht, phth, z, te, tte ; as in Ten Tnyme indicT PHTHmc (tizik) beTTer two receive mezzotint (metso'tint) stopp'ED deBT 2/acHT casTB gazeTTE d. Symbols : — d, dd, ed } de, Id, dh, ddh, bd ; as in i>en beggEB wowlt> BwDT>mst add ftorDE WynDnam Bdellium k. Symbols : — k, c, q, ck, ch, cc, cq, qu, que, Ik, gh, sc, x, tch, ke, Ike, quh, cch ; as in -Kill quell acquaint houGB. Butke call bacK liquor viscount FoijK&stone havoc acB.e barqvB except Urqunart sceptic account waisK haTcuel Bacchanal g. Symbols :— g, gg, gh, gue, ckg, gge; as in go ecG GRost leaGUE blacKQcuard Bainbric-GB § 20. m. Symbols : — m, mm, gm, Im, mb, mn, mp, me, mme, chm, n, nte, Imonde ; as in Man laMB holwE Ba^ff hawser hymn prograuMB PonTEfract (Pcemfrit) phlecM. HaMvden dracnm. Choi,Non-D&ley (Choemli) psaiiM n. Symbols : — n, nn, en, on, gn, hn, kn, mn, pn, sn, In, dn, nd, nh, nw, mp, ne, nne, gne, dding ; as in set Gnaw -pneumatics ribanD bornv dinner John puisne ipecacuanha Anns opening Know Lincoln gunwale co^gne pardoning Mnemonics Wednesday coweter stuBDinG-sail ng. Symbols : — ng, n, nd, ngue, ngh, nz ; as in thinG handkerchief BirminGnam think Tongue Menzies J 16 English Sounds Illustrated. [§§ 21, 22. Additional examples of ng written n before g, k, c, q, ch and x ; i.e., before the sounds g and k : — finger hungry monkey banquet anger sink ancle anchor angry thank uncle anxious Monger donkey conquer lynx § 21. 1. Symbols: — I, 11, si, gl, Id, Iw, le, lie, sle, In, al, uall ; as in -Let seraGLio earns kii>n weisL GuiLvford gazeiASF* MagdKLen island WooLwich aisLE victxsA.'ULer r. Symbols : — r, rr, rh, wr, rw, rwh, re, rre, rrh, rps ; as in ■Red nnetoric Norwich Steeps myp.BE. menny w&ite Tynvmitt partep,p,E corps § 22. wh. Symbol : — wh ; as in wHere wsistle way w. Symbols : — w, u, o, nothing at all ; as in wear square choir one f. Symbols :— f, ff, ph, gh, If, ft, pph, u, fe, ffe ; as in Fill PEysic haiiF sappEire SkaiFB sUff rouQB. oFTen lieutenant ShorncliFFF, Y. Symbols : — v, ve, Ive, f, ph, Iv, sv, zv ; as in vest haiiVE nepEew Grosvenor twelvB of Beisvoir rendezvous th. Symbols : — th, t, h, tth, gh, phth ; as in thwj Southampton eighth MaTTEeiu KeiGEley PE.TH.isis dh. Symbols : — th, the ; as in THW SOOTHE §22.] The Consonants Illustrated. 17 th and dh compared : — Initial. th imef Tiling TBatch TH-m Tnick TBom TBree TBrough TBWW Medial. dh eiTHer faTBer moTuer norTuern WOrTBy luiTBer furTHer wea.TH.er feaTBer Final. dh th dh th tbc piTB. wiTB. eTBer Tnis paTB. paTBS Attbut TBat truTB truTBs noTBing TBey oaTB oaTBs auTBor TBen mouTB mouTBs earTBy TBan breaTB breaTBe piTBy tbus sheaTB sheaTBe earTBen TBere sootb soothe eTBics TBough loaTB loaTBe meTBod s. Symbols : — s, ss, se, c, ce, sc, see, sch, sw, st, sth, ps, z, str, tsw, sse } tzs, ces, renc, rces, sh ; as in seal scene UsTen niisTness (Mrs.) Gloucester hiss coalesce isTBmus boaTSwain Cmescester pulse scBism vsalm crevasse Worcester cell sword quartz briTzska MasBam dance z. Symbols : — z, zz, ze, s, ss, se, es, c, sc, cz, sh, si, is, x, ds, sw ; as in zeal scissors discern venison puzzle cleanse czar beaux furze Wednesday disBonour Winnsor his sacrificing business Keswick sh. Symbols : — sh, s, ch, ss, c, t, shi, si, ssi, ci, ce, sci, ti, sch, che, chsi, psh, sshe ; as in SHe assure fasBion social moTion fucBsia sugar officiate Asia ocean scBedule PSBaw CBaise viTiate mission conscious moustacBe AssBeton zh. Symbols : — z, s, zi, si, ssi, ti, g, ge ; as in azure glazier abscission routing pleasure division transiTion rouGe 18 English Sounds Illustrated. Additional examples : — [§§ 23, 24. seizure treasure brasier derision confusion leisure osier vision occasion delusion measure hosier decision intrusion usual y. Symbols : — y, i, e, j, I ; as in Yet onion hideous halleluiah cotillon Also g in the combination gn, pronounced ny ; as in viotsette (vinyet) h. Symbols : — h, wh, gh, Iquh ; as in He who GallaotH.an CoLO.UB.OUn § 23. ch. Symbols : — ch, tch, che, t, ti, te, c, jori ; as in CBest diTCB. luncBEon question violoncello ricB m'cHE nature righTEOus Marjonibanks j. Symbols :— j, g, ge, gi, dj, dg, dge, di, ch, gh ; as in Jest hinGE dunGEon amount Julge GreenwicB Gentle barGE colleoian juD&inent solnier BellinGBam Syllabic Consonants. § 24. m\ Symbols: — m ; as in baptism criticism. rhythm chasm. n\ Symbols : — en, on, in, ain, enn ; as in sevEN strengthening button prisoner writtEn lengthening bacon reasoning open heathenish person seasonable V, Symbols : — le, el, al, ul, ael, luale, ual, ell, tie ; as in bottLE troubled vessEL sepvLchre victvALs appLE settled music al Mich ael levELLing riddLE flannEL difficvLt gtmw ale brisTLE spasm cousin BritAin halfpEnny 25.] The Long Voivels Illustrated. 19 The Long Vowels Illusteated. § 25. a. Symbols for a : — a, au, ah, aa, ai, a-e, ar, ear, uar, er, aar, arre. SJ?£ Aft rAther tAsk repAst brAnch papA lOAft ASS CAsk chAnt blAnch mammA shAft PASS flAsk grAnt commAnd pAlm rAft brAss rAscal plAnt demAnd bAlm (drift \drAvght grAss pAst slAnt lAvgh CAlm cIass mAst dAnce Avnt psAlm crAft glAss JCASt \cAste lAnce dAvnt Alms grAft gAsp chAnce JAvnt Almond After rAsp fASt prAnce lAunch s Ample rAfter hAsp VASt trAnce AH ex Ample sAlve grAsp lASt Answer hurrAB. CAlf hAlve clAsp blASt advAnce bAA hAlf pAth Ash mAster askAnce krAAl chAff OAth bAsk pAstor (stAnch \stA\jnch plAister StAff lAth mAsk aghAst ate quAff fAther Observe that in the following examples r is silent. The symbol most commonly used to represent a is ar. hAnd pABse bARb mABsh gvABd CAT&d fATLm pAnk mAnl Ct-ERn/ cABt dmn lABge stAuve bazAAns pAB,t hAnp mAnch hEARt mAnned a in unaccented s yllables • trAnsgress trAnsform / sARcastic trAnscend Antizan nABcotic trAnscribe Artillery contrAst trAnslate pABtake placARd 20 English Sounds Illustrated. § 26. oe. [§§ 26-28. Symbols for oe : — ur, er, ir, or, our, ear, yr, urre, erre, irre, eur, olo, rid. Observe that in all these examples r is silent. txjRn hunt JiBud sERve /ram dmt wond woRk journey EARth lEARn mYRtle pVRREd concuRREd prefERREd ERREtt StlRREd amatEURs colonel BRinlington oe in unaccented syllables. pERverse pERturb advERse pERvert fERtility pervERt § 27. e. Symbols for e : — a, ai, ea, aa, ae, ao, e-e. MAry WAry vAry chAry pArent rArest pAring bAring dAring cAring spAring stAring scAnng barbArian vegetArian grammArian gregArious Airy dAiry fAiry Airing pAiring f Air est bEArer wEArer WEAring tEAring kAron AErie Aorist e unaccented. whErEon tlfiErEin § 28. ey. Symbols for ey : — a-e, a, ai, ay, ah, ei, ey, ea, eh, ao, au, ag-e aig, aigh, eig, eigh, aye, eye, eighe, ait, alf. fAtE pAin thEY champAGnE plAYEd gAtE rAin obEY campAiGn obEYEd gAlE pAY grEAt StrAIGUt survEYEd dAlE rAY brEAk fEiGn WEIGHEd bAker dAB.Ua EH WEIGH nEiGHEd lAdy VEin gAol EIGHt trAiT bASS VEll gAuge aye (ever) hAiuFpenny 29, 30.] The Long Vowels Illustrated. 21 ey unaccented. chkotic namesAke cognAte railwAY survEY (sbst.) earthquake wholesale detAil essAY billETdoux § 29. i. Symbols for i ; — ee, ea, e-e, e, ei, ie, i, i-e, ce, ce, eo, ey, eye, ui, uay, e'e, eh, eig, eigh, egh, aiu, eau, e-y, is. /eeI cEdar chagrin Jcey sEianory /ee£ faver machine kEYEd Leigh hBAt cmling fatiguE mosquito Legb. hEAve niEce Cmsar qVAY Caius College SCEnE reliEf diarrhea E'En BEAuchamp thErriE invalid pEOple VERicle Wemyss i unaccented. eternal create rEality concrEtE Equality rEact lEgality sortiE precede rEunion siesta debris § 30. 6. Symbols for 6 : — aw, au, a, o, ou, augh, awe, ough, oa, oo, ah, at, ag, augha, or, ore, oar, our, ar, arre, oor, aor, oare, oure, oore, eor. hAwk WAlk toss trough broAd fAwn StAlk frost augh£ flooring SAuce lA cost CAUGHtf mAnlstick pAuse broth off AWE bATman /All cloth soft fkwEd MAGdalen Coll. bAll loss cough ough£ Faughaw Observe that in the following examples r is silent. The commonest symbol for 6 is or. loud font boABd counse floons pouBEd cOBd gowEd hoABd wABn extrAondinary floonEd pOBt StOBEd COUnt WABBEd SOAEE<2 GEOBge 22 Authority Already portentoits English Sounds Illustrated. [§§ 31, 32. 6 unaccented. downJAll landAu import exhortation export importation 'portray foretell forEsee § 31. ow. Symbols for ow: — o-e, o, oa, ow, ou, owe, oe, oo, ew, ewe, ough, oh, eau, eo, au, os, aut, ock. bo?iB roAd owe sew yEoman votE bowl rowEd sEWEd hAuteur most growth woe thouGU. apropos folk soul foE oh hAUTboy goAt mould brooch 6eau CocKburn ow unaccented. coincidence poetic impost inmost § 32. u. Symbols for u : — oo, u, u-e, ou, ue, ew, ewe, o, o-e, ui, eu, ough, root cool truth prudent rulE plumE oe, ooe, out, oux, eugh, ougha. wound strEWEd fruit group truE Mue brEW crEW brEWEd do tomb movE approvE bruise rhEumatism throuGB. shoE ivoOEd surtout billetdoux BuccIeugb. BrouGB.A?n u unaccented. brutality prudential judicial Gertrude For the combination yu, see § 44. §§ 33, 34.] The Short Vowels Illustrated. The Shoet Vowels Illusteated. 23 § 33. a. a is always unaccented. Symbols for a : — a, ah, e, eh, o, o-e, u, ou, ough, gh, ia, aa, oi, ro, i au, oa, ar, er, re, or, ur, our, yr, uor, uer, ure, are, ere, oure, yre, uere, oar, , oir, uhar. Aloud portAble tendency Europe Aside mirAcle expediency Asylum mAture mentAlly NineveB vellum bAlloon verbAlly waggon syrup morAl legAcy cannon stirrup merit aI lit Any wisdom enormous orgAn AscendAncy phantom glorious grAmmariAn villA idol jealousy canvAs BellA carrot thorouGB. carAt AmericA bullock EdinburQH servAnt SarAB develop parliAment distAnt verandAB. testimony Isaac guidAnce barren harmony tortoise balAnce moment geology iBon ballAst payment argosy August a breakJAst violence welcome meerschAum omAment experience Gladstone waistcoAt Observe that in the followin g examples r is . silent. slug g And understand martYBS enteBed standAftd interview UquOBs rumouBed bulwABk centred conqueBS martYBed proveBb comfort measured conqueBed modeBn stubborn ventured cupboABd exeBcise Saturday beggABed avomdupois entmitain honouBS collABed UrquKABt § 34. ob. 03 almost always has an accent, primary or secondary. 24 English Sounds Illustrated. [§§ 35-37. nut duck dust unjust son money come Symbols for ce : — u, o, o-e, ou, oo, oe, ow. dovE flood touch doEs rough rowlock (B with secondary accent. uproot teacup humbug 03 unaccented. hubbub punctility pugnacious ductility ulterior § 35. se. Symbols for se : — a, a-e, ua, ai, e, ae. mkn bAdE plAid thresh hkVE guArantee plkit GaeUc se unaccented. Alpaca Ambassador compAct (sb.) abstrAct (sb.) § 36. e. Symbols for e : — e, ea, a, a-e, u, ai, ei, ie, eo, ue, ay, ey, ce, ave. gEt Any SAid leopard says md mAny lEisure Geoffrey hEAd AtE liEifer guEss brEAd bury friEnd guEst e unaccented. prec&pt stipend sensation insect indEx vexation § 37. i. Symbols for i ; — i, i-e, y, e, o, u, ie, ee, ui, ai, hi, oa, ive, eo, e-e, a-e, ia, ia-e, u-e, ei, ey, ea, eig, ('), ehea, ewi-e, ois, uy, oi, igh, ay, ieu. hxmn womwz build groAts nYmph busY guilt fiYEpence prEttY siEve SAint John Theobald England brEEchEs Exmbit Tmonmouth BEYnard f(Etid AbergAYEnny mEndacity pEstiferous fit bid giVE Iive i§ 38-40.] The Short Vowels Illustrated. 25 i unaccented. disturb mischmf SAint Paul lettucE forEKEAd plentiful BessiE collEgE forfeit housEwifE restivB cherriEs courAgE pullEY chamois plentY coffEE villAgE donki&Y plagvY remain circuit landscApE guinEA Denbmu dEceive biscuit miniAture forEion Jervois mindEd captAin marriAgE soverEion BothsAY churchEs fountAin carriAgE James's BeauliEU § 38. o. Symbols for o : — o, a, au, ou, ow, ho, o-e, o-ue. hot wAnt fAult hough nonour rod saU vauU Gloucester shonE WAtch hAlter lAurel knowledge pedagoguE unaccented. prosperity hostility ostensible prostration § 39. o\ o' is always unaccented. Symbols for o' : — o, ow, oe, owe, ough, 6t, aoh, olqu. omit protect elocution following furlouau obey motto invocation follower depoT molest hero widow herOEs PharAOB. provide heroine follow followEd CoijQuhoun § 40. u. Symbols for u : — u, oo, ou, o, or, o-e. put puss push bush pull bull full pulpit bulfinch foot soot good wood wool hood stood book nook cook shook rook look hook brook crook could would should wolf woman worsted BolingbrokE 26 English Sounds Illustrated. u unaccented. [§§ 41-43. /WjH manhood influential wilful childhood instrument painful into prejudice The Diphthongs Illustrated. § 41. ai. Symbols for ai : — i, i-e, y, y-e, w, ye , ig, igh, ighe, eigh, ui, ui-e, uy } ai, ey, eye, kind trY tlE SIGH guilft mind jIy dm SIGHE^ bUY fibre CYcle dYB hEIGHt Aisle JiZe £y£>e SIQ1I slmGnt BYing d\rm stYlB tlQRt guiding EYE ai unaccented. idea migration vivacious itinerate organization irate minute quiescent identical outline § 42. au. Symbols for au : — ou, ow, owe, ough, oughe, hou, aou, o, eo. house cowl vowBd plouGB. caoutchouc doubt now bowsd plouonad compter howl how &OUGH Hour Maclnod au unaccented. however § 43. oi. Symbols for oi : — oi, oy, oye, uoi, uoy, uoye, eoi, boil boY annoY^d quoit buoY^d com toY destroYEd buoY bourgeois oi unaccented. turmoil envOY §§ 44-46] r Illustrated. 27 § 44. yu. Symbols for yu : — u-e, u, tie, ui, eu, oiu, ew, yu, you, ieu, iew, yew, eau, ewe, iewe, hu, uh, ug, ugh, ughe, eo, ueue, ua, eve. tVUB duE /ew YEW impuan dukE CUE pEW bEAuty Hugh musE Tuesday Yule EWE Hughes USE suit YOU bedwNEd JEOd unit fEud Youth viEWEd gUEUE puny Eulogy llEU numour mantukmaher dual man(EUvre ^iew buul LEYEson-Gower yu unaccented. unite gradual absolute statuE usurp tortuous resolute mildEW regular valuable virtuE cuHew educate tribute valuE curfEW r Illusteated. § 45. r after the Long Vowels and the Diphthongs ea, ia, 6a, ua. Examples of words in which r is silent, though written in our ordinary spelling, have been given above in the illustrations of the vowels a, oe, 6 and a, but the sound of r may be heard in all the examples which follow. For illustrations showing how different forms of the same word may have r silent or sounded, see § 68. §46. ar. ar final, pronounced a when not followed by a vowel in the next word, but written full length. are (ar) mar far spar par (par) tar czar star bar (bar) car jar scar 28 English Sounds Illustrated. [§§ 47, 48. ar final and unaccented. memoir (memwar) reservoir (rezaywar) ar followed by a vowel. starry (stari) marring (maring) jarring (jaring) debarring (dibaring) § 47. oer. oer final, pronounced oe when not followed by a vowel in the next word, but written full length. fur (foer) spur her sir purr bur (boer) slur prefer fir err cur (koer) blur deter stir were oer followed by a vowel. furry (foeri) stirring (stoering) spurring (spoering) erring (oering) § 48. er, ear and ea. er. Always followed by a vowel. Mary (Meri) fairy (feri) wearing (wering) For other examples, see § 27. ear final, pronounced ea when not followed by a vowel in the next word, but written full length. Symbols for ear : — are, air, ear, ere, eir, ayer, ayor, eyre, e'er. {pare pair pear (bare \bear (mare [mayor (tare \tear dare care {ware luear share welfare fair (stare ure \stair rare scare yare snare (hare (sware \hair \swear spare square ear final unaccented. horsehair somewhere blare glare flare 'air ere heir eyre lair chair where (there {their prayer ne'er nowhere 49, 50.] r Illustrated. 29 ea medial, the sound of r following it having disappeared. Symbols for ea : — are, air, ear, ere, eir, ayer, ayor, ar, aire. cares (keaz) stairs (steaz) pears (peaz) wherefore (wheafor) theirs (dheaz) prayers (preaz) § 49. eyar and eya. mayors (meaz) scarce (skeas) aired (ead) Very rare. Exx. : — layer (leyar) player (pleyar) layers (leyaz) players (pleyaz) § 50. iar. The combination ir does not exist in our language, the long vowel i being always changed into the diphthong ia by r following. iar final, pronounced ia when not followed by a vowel in the next word, but written full length. (peer [pier {beer bier {deer dear veer {sear seer sere (sheer \shear compeer rear blear drear clear (hear mere [here sphere spear (we're smear \weir leer queer cheer (tear jeer [tier freer near steer gear sneer fear iar final unaccented. reindeer headgear iar followed by a vowel. cheery cheering hearing hearer dearest weary steering clearing clearer merest ia medial — no sound of r following. Note that in a few cases r is not written in our ordinary spelling. Symbols for ia : — eer, ear, ere, ier, eir, eere, eare, ea, eu. peers beard tiers veered real theatre cheers spheres weird feared ideal museum 30 English Sounds Illustrated [§§ 51, 52. ia unaccented. compeers greybeard ia final. idea panacea § 51. or, oar and 6a. or final. Rare. Pronounced 6 when not followed by a vowel in the next word, but written full length. Exx. : — or nor for your or final unaccented. therefore lessor vendor guarantor or followed by a vowel. story chorus boring soaring pouring glory porous storing roaring flooring 6ar final, pronounced 6a when not followed by a vowel in the next word, but written full length. Symbols for oar : — ore, oar, our, oor, uor, or, oer, awer. ore core shore store roar floor pore gore lore swore hoar fluor bore wore yore oar pour corps more fore score boar four o'er tore sore snore soar door drawer 6a final occurs in Noah boa 6ar medial does not occur in my pronunciation. § 52. owar and owa. Very rare. Exx. : — lower (lowar) loivering (lowaring) rower (rowar) lowers (lowaz) mower (mowar) lowered (lowad) §§ 53, 54] r Illustrated. 31 § 53. uar and ua. The combination ur never occurs in English, the long vowel u being always changed into the diphthong ua by r following. uar final, pronounced ua when not followed by a vowel in the next word, but written full length. poor sure truer doer moor tour brewer wooer uar followed by a vowel. poorest tourist boorish assuring surest touring mooring pleurisy ua medial — no sound of r following. Notice that in a few cases r is not written in our ordinary spelling. Symbols for ua : — oor, we, our, ewer, oer, over, oore, ue, ua. boors assured brewers wooers fluent moors gourd doers moored truant r after the Short Vowels. § 54. ar. ar is always unaccented. ar final, pronounced a when not followed by a vowel in the next word, but written full length. beggAB, Coll&R grammKR cell&R ABound Anight ARRest bABonial pARental sell'EB, bakBB runnEB readi&B centBB metBE sailoB tailoB leisvBB measvBE honovB labovB ar followed by a vowel. mABine nABBate UbrABy contrABy solitABy mystBBy gall^By gem&Bous intEBBupt histOBy martYB conqvEB UqvOB CheshiBB inventOBy suBBound sxjBBender injuBy armouBy 32 English Sounds Illustrated. [§§ 55, 56. 55. cer. ser. er. it. Merry marry merry miracle curry tarry error irritate currant carry peril myriad worry carroi l > unaccented. unaccented. nourish perennial irascible irrational miraculous Erection or. o'r. ur. sorry unaccented. courier horrid voracious unaccented. forehead adoration adjuration majority aborigines hurrah quarry r final never occurs after any short vowel except a. r after the Triphthongs aia, aua, oia, yua, and the Diphthongs ai, yu. § 56. aiar, aia and air. In all the following examples r final is silent unless followed by a vowel in the next word, but it is written in every case. aiar final. fire tire pyre buyer mire wire higher liar hire lyre crier friar aiar followed by a vowel. miry fiery tiring hiring aia followed by a consonant. No sound of r. tired hired fires buyers trial denial briar prior choir §§ 57-59.] -r Illustrated. 33 air only in unaccented syllables. Eare. mate monical § 57. auar and aua. auar final. our f flour tower shower sour \ flower power plougher auar followed by a vowel. sourest flowering towering floury showery overpowering aua followed by a consonant. No sound of r. hours towers soured flowered allowance § 58. oyar and oya. These are very rare. oyar final. destroyer employer _ oya before a consonant. No sound of r. destroyers employers loyal § 59. yuar, yua and yur. yuar final. pure lure cure ewer sewer fewer yiiar followed by a vowel. purest luring curing enduring yua followed by a consonant. No sound of r. lured cured cures sewers dual yur only in unaccented syllables. Eare. dvnation penwRy Ill ENGLISH ANALYSIS. The Consonants. § 60. It is convenient to begin with the study of the con- sonants, because they are more easily described and classified than the vowels. Consonants are formed by stopping or squeezing the breath after it has left the larynx, except in the case of the sound h, and the glottal stop, used in German. These are formed by squeezing or stopping the breath in the larynx itself. There is no sharp line of demarcation between consonants and vowels. The English consonants are twenty-three in number, besides the two composite consonants ch and j. So as our alphabet does not furnish a symbol for each of them, we employ the six digraphs ng, wh, th, dh, sh and zh, each of which combina- tions represents a single sound, unless the letters are separated by a hyphen. The hyphen is used in such words as engage, out-house, mishap (in-geyj, aut-haus, mis-haep), and the like, to indicate that each letter is to be sounded separately. § 61. Names of the Consonants. It is necessary in study- ing the consonants, to practise sounding them alone, without any vowel ; but in class teaching, and whenever we speak of the consonants, we want some names that are distinctly audible. So they should be called pa, ba, and so on, as in the words parental, balloon, the following vowel being sounded as gently as possible, (34) §§ 62-64.] The Stops. 35 One of the names will be found difficult, and will require a little practice, namely nga, for in English ng is never met with at the beginning of a word or syllable, though it occurs at the beginning of words in other languages, as for instance in the names of certain places in New Zealand. Imitate -nger, the conclusion of the word singer, taking care not to pronounce the double sound ngg, as in finger, which is written phonetically Ungear. § 62. The Consonants classified. Stops and Continuants. (Eefer to the table on p. xiv.) It has been stated above that in forming consonants the breath is stopped or squeezed, and the difference between stopping and squeezing the breath is very obvious when we compare the six stops, p, b, t, d, k, g, with any of the continuants, for instance with s and sh. We can prolong s and sh as long as we please, for the passage through the mouth is not completely closed, and the breath issues from it all the while ; but in forming the six stops it is entirely closed, and opened again with an explosion. So they are sometimes called shut or explosive consonants, whilst such consonants as s and sh are called continuants. The Stops. § 63. Lip, Point and Back Consonants. The six stops may be classified according to the place where the breath is stopped. In the lip stops p and b it is stopped by closing the lips, in the point stops t and d, by the point of the tongue touch- ing the upper gums, and in the back stops k and g, by the back of the tongue touching the soft palate. These three classes of consonants are sometimes called labial, dental and guttural. § 64. Breath and Voiced Consonants. The consonants p, t and k are called hard, whilst b, d and g are called soft, because in p, t and k there is a more forcible explosion of the breath. But this is not the most important point of difference between these two classes of consonants. The essential differ- 36 English Analysis. [§ 64. ence can be more easily appreciated if we study some of the open consonants or continuants. Take for instance s or z and prolong them. The sound of s, or hissing, is evidently formed by the breath in the mouth. But in the prolonged z, or buzzing, a faint sound of voice, formed in the larynx, is distinctly heard at the same time. And the same thing may be very well ob- served in prolonging f and y. Also if f be suddenly stopped there is silence, but on stopping y we clearly hear a vowel sound like the er in heaver or a in variety. Again, if we try to prolong b, a faint sound is heard ; but if we attempt to pro- long p, there is no sound whatever till the lips part with a sudden explosion. But perhaps the most convincing experiment of all is to pro- long z or y, or any one of the soft continuants, whilst the ears are stopped. The buzzing sound formed in the larynx will then be heard very clearly indeed, as a loud noise, whilst it is alto- gether absent in the corresponding hard consonants, s and f. The essential difference between the hard and soft con- sonants is, therefore, that the hard consonants are simply formed by the breath, whilst in the soft consonants there is a faint sound of voice. They are midway between the con- sonants and the vowels. And although the names hard and soft sound best, and are most convenient for general use, the two classes are more accurately described as breathed or voice- less and voiced consonants. It is of great importance to realise very distinctly the difference between voiced and voiceless consonants, for it at once furnishes a key to several sounds which do not exist in English, e.g., to the German ch in ich, which is a voiceless y, to the French voiceless I and r, and even to the terrible Welsh II, which is only a voiceless I, and presents no difficulty to those who have learnt this secret. To sum up, we may distinguish the six stops as follows : — 1. The hard lip stop, p. 2. The soft „ „ b. §§ 65, 66.] The. Liquids. 37 3. The hard point stop, t. 4. The soft „ „ d. 5. The hard back ,, k. 6. The soft „ „ g. The Liquids. § 65. The Nasal Consonants. We have in English three nasal consonants, the lip nasal m, the point nasal n, and the back nasal ng. They resemble the stops in having the mouth aperture completely closed, and correspond exactly with the lip, point, and back stops respectively as to the place of closure. Like the soft stops b, d and g, they are voiced. There is only this difference between them and the soft stops, that the passage through the nose is left open, the soft palate being lowered so as to allow the breath to pass up behind it and escape through the nostrils. It is therefore possible to prolong them. A cold in the head, by stopping up the nose passage, makes it difficult to pronounce the nasals, so that we are apt to substitute for them the corresponding soft stops b, d and g. § 66. The Back Nasal ng and the Symbol ng in Ordinary Spelling. To prevent confusion between the back nasal ng in sing, singer, and the symbol ng, which in ordinary spelling has various uses, it will be well to refer to the exx. of n used for ng in § 20, and to observe that in ordinary spelling nh always has the value ngk, whilst ng has four different values, namely ng, ngg, n-g and nj. Examples : — \k = ngk ng = ng ng = ngg ng = n-g ng = nj ink sing finger engage strange sink singer anger engrave hinge think singing hunger ungraceful lounging thank hang longest penguin danger tinker hanging angry plunging monkey long anguish congestion donkey longing langihage ungenerous 38 English Analysis. [§§ 67, 68. § 67. The Side Consonant 1 is generally formed by closing the breath passage in the centre with the point of the tongue against the upper gums, and letting the breath escape at the two sides, so that the stream of breath is divided, and it is often called a divided consonant. But some persons, myself among the number, let the breath escape on one side only, so it seems better to call it a lateral or side consonant. The English 1 is voiced, but voiceless 1 occurs in French and in Welsh. § 68. The Trilled Consonant r. The letter r will be dis- cussed in connection with the vowels (see §§ 106-114), but two important points concerning it must be noticed here by antici- pation. (1) In many words, which in our ordinary spelling are written with r, we hear a vowel sound, like the a in attend, villa, which must not be mistaken for the consonant r. This is clearly heard in boor, near, fire, our, which may be compared with boot, neat, fight, out. (2) The consonant r is never heard unless a vowel follows in the same or in the next word. So r is sounded in rat, tree, merry, sorry, poor old man, dear Annie, never ending, far off, but silent in poor child, dear me, never mind, far distant. English r, like the point continuants, is formed with the point of the tongue against the roots of the teeth. The action of the tongue in forming it may be understood by observing how it is possible, by blowing on the lips, as babies sometimes do, to make them vibrate, so that the breath passage is alter- nately open and shut. This is a trill on the lips. The point of the tongue can be made to vibrate in like manner, which produces a prolonged r, and the uvula also can be trilled, this being the way in which r is pronounced by the Parisians, and in many parts of France and Germany. It has been asserted that English r is not a trill, but a simple continuant. Certainly in pronouncing it we do not repeatedly open and close the breath passage, but I think it §§ 69-71] The Continuants. 39 may safely be affirmed that it is blown open just once, there being the same sort of flapping movement as in a prolonged trill, but not repeated. For English children who find it diffi- cult to pronounce r can learn to do so by practising first a prolonged trill with the point of the tongue ; so the name trill does not seem unsuitable. English r is voiced, but voiceless r occurs in French. § 69. The Liquids. The nasals m, n and ng, with 1 and r, are commonly called liquids, and it is convenient to retain this name and to regard them as one group, intermediate between the stops on the one hand, and the continuants on the other, for they have two characteristics in common. (1) They partially obstruct the breath passage, not closing it entirely like the stops, nor leaving a free channel for it through the mouth, like the continuants. And (2) they combine very readily with other consonants. The Continuants. § 70. We have observed that, in the English stops and liquids, the place of closure in the mouth is either the lips, the point of the tongue against the upper gums or the back of the tongue against the soft palate. But the English con- tinuants are formed in six different places. Beginning, as before, with those which are formed by the lips, and arranging them in order according to the place of formation, we have six classes of continuants, namely, lip, lip-teeth, point-teeth, point, front and throat continuants. We have no back continuants in English, but they exist in German, the hard back continuant being heard in acH and the corresponding soft sound in Waaen. § 71. The Lip Continuants wh and w. These sounds differ from one another simply in that wh is hard or breathed, whilst w is soft or voiced. The sound wh occurs only at the beginning of words, and many persons — most Southerners indeed — never use this sound, but substitute for it the voiced 40 English Analysis. [§§ 72, 73. consonant w. They pronounce when like wen, whale like wail, and so on. But those who generally omit this sound may sometimes be heard to utter it in an emphatic "where?" wh and w are not simple lip continuants. We meet with these in German Quelle and south German Wesew. In the English wh and w the lips and tongue take the same position as in the back-round vowel u (oo in pool), that is to say, the lips are rounded, not opened as a slit, but with the corners drawn together, and the back of the tongue is raised towards the soft palate. So they may be called back-round continuants. See §§ 86, 87. In ordinary spelling it is the rule to use u for the sound w after q and g. Exx. of u pronounced as w : — quench, quick, queen, anguish, language, persuade. The reason why qu stands for kw is that it is borrowed from Latin, and u is the Latin symbol for w. So Lat. uinum became Eng. wins. § 72. The Lip-Teeth Continuants f and y. These form a pair of hard and soft consonants. Both are produced by press- ing the lower lip against the upper teeth, so that the stream of breath passes between the teeth. § 73. The Point-Teeth Continuants th and dh. Eefer to the examples given in § 22. These sounds are formed by placing the point of the tongue against the edges of the upper teeth, so that the breath passes between the teeth, as it does in X and Y. The difficulty which foreigners and young children often find in producing these sounds may be overcome by observing their mechanism, which is really very simple. It is, however, generally very difficult for the ear to distinguish sounds which have not been acquired in infancy or childhood, so that these sounds are liable to be mistaken for f and y, or s and z, by foreigners who have not been carefully taught, even after a long residence in England ; and the same mistakes are often made by young English children. The distinction between the hard or breathed th in Tnistle, eTB.er, sheaTH, and the soft or voiced dh in this, eiTB.er, s/zeaTHE, §§ 74, 75.] The Continuants. 41 is just the same as the difference between f and y or any other pair of hard and soft consonants, though the fact may be over- looked, as we use the same symbol th for them both. There are many instances in which we end a noun with th, and the corresponding verb with dh, whilst the plural noun ends in dhz, just as f is changed into y in similar cases. Examples : — f Y YZ thief thieve thieves shelf shelve shelves th dh dhz wreath wreathe wreaths bath bathe baths § 74. The Point Continuants s and z. These are formed by placing the point of the tongue close to the upper gums ; but they differ from t and d, in that the tongue does not quite touch the gums. A little channel is left for the breath, s is the most clearly audible of all the consonants, and can be distinctly heard without any vowel, as in hissing, or in the French and German pst. The only difference between s and z is that z is voiced and S is not. Our frequent use of the symbol s for the sound z is confusing, and obscures the fact that we have two different plural terminations where to the eye there is but one, e.g., in cats, s, and in dogs, z. See further in § 118. § 75. The Point-Blade Continuants sh and zh. The formation of sh, and of the corresponding voiced consonant zh, is very differently explained by different writers. If I had regard to English only, I should venture to call them Blade Continuants, as being formed not only with the point of the tongue, but with the blade as well, but they seem to be differently formed in different languages. 1 The blade is the 1 They are called Point-Blade Continuants in the present edition. Miss Soames called them Point Continuants, just as s and z. — Ed. 42 English Analysis. [§76. part of the tongue immediately behind the point. In forming them I myself, and I believe English people generally, raise the blade as well as the point, and draw the tongue a little further back than for s and z. S, z, sh and zh are commonly called sibilants, on account of their hissing sound. Observe that zh is the same as French j in je. It seems pretty clear that English people in general form sh and zh as I do, with the blade of the tongue, so that they are further back than s or z, because when the point-sounds s or z are followed by the sounds i or y, formed with the middle of the tongue, the s or z is transformed into sh or zh, and the i or y frequently disappears. In such cases there is evidently a compromise, and the tongue has unconsciously taken an intermediate position, between that for s or z on the one hand and i and y on the other. We have examples of this change in common endings -sion and -cial, for the endings of such words as mission, vision, social are pronounced -shan, -zhan and -shal. The sound zh was noticed in English as far back as the year 1688 (Sweet, Hist, of English Sounds, p. 267), and Prof. Skeat says that in pleasure and leisure it is still older. § 76. The Yoiced Front Continuant y. We form y by raising the middle, technically called the front, of the tongue, and bringing it near the hard palate. The tongue is in fact for a moment in the same position as for the vowel i. In some words the distinction between y and the short vowel i is not very clearly marked. There are many common endings, such as -ion, -ious, in which i is sometimes silent, or it may be pronounced as y or as i. After r, it is generally pronounced as i. Exx. : — Silent i i = y i = i gracious bilious victorious motion onion criterion judicial labial material The corresponding hard or breathed consonant, which is similar to the German "ich" sound, is said to be heard occasionally in such English words as hue, human and pure (hyit, hyuman, pytiar). §§ 77-79.] The Continuants. 43 § 77. The Throat Continuant h. 1 Some persons do not reckon h, or the glottal stop ('), as consonants, because they are not formed in the superglottal passages, but in the glottis itself, that is, in the opening between the vocal chords. But they do not seem to differ essentially from the other con- sonants, h being formed by squeezing the breath in the glottis, and (') by stopping it there, just as the other consonants are formed by squeezing or stopping it after it has left the larynx. The opening of the glottis for the formation of h is shown in diagram IV. 2 on p. xxvii. § 78. The Composite Consonants ch and j. It is not difficult to hear that each of these is composed of two sounds — that ch = t + sh and j = d + zh. Dr. Murray calls them consonantal diphthongs. In the phonograph the succession of sounds can be reversed, so that ch is heard as sh + t. In ordinary spelling we sometimes symbolise the first part of these composite consonants correctly, using tch for ch and dg or dge for j, as in /ctch, juDQment, eDGE, and we never use j at the end of a word, either ge or dge being put for it, as in chanGE, hinGB, Wdge, Iobgb. It sometimes happens that t and sh come together in places where each sound belongs to a separate syllable, as in nutshell. In such cases we write tsh — not ncechel but ncatshel. It is interesting to observe that the period when words spelt with ch were derived from the French may be determined by their pronunciation. Those borrowed at an early period are pronounced ch, as chine (spine), rich, but the later ones retain the French pronunciation sh, like machine. § 79. Syllabic Consonants. The consonants m, n and 1 are often so prolonged as to form a distinct syllable, as in schism, open, bottle (sizm', owpn', botl'), and they may then be called vocal or syllabic, m, n and 1 are always syllabic when they occur at the end of a word, preceded by a consonant, as in the exx. given above, or between two consonants, as in 1 Called Glottal Continuant in the former edition. — Ed. 44 English Analysis. [§ 80. owpn'd, botl'd. They are seldom syllabic in any other case, but in a few instances syllabic n is followed by a vowel, as in strengthening, prisoner (strengthn'ing, prizn'ar). The Vowels. § 80. Vowels are voice-sounds modified by giving some definite shape to the passages above the glottis, but without audible friction. The breath is not stopped or squeezed as in forming a consonant, but the line of demarcation between vowels and consonants is not very clearly marked. The vowels will be found to present much more serious difficulties than the consonants, for several reasons. First, because the English vowels are not always easy to distinguish, but shade off imperceptibly into one another in many cases. Secondly, because our alphabet, originally intended for a lan- guage with a much simpler vowel system, is quite inadequate to represent the numerous vowel-sounds of the English lan- guage. And lastly, because the five characters we have, and the digraphs formed by combining them, are used in such a haphazard manner that hardly any of them can be recognised as certainly intended to represent any particular sound. We may observe, for instance, that a is used for nine different sounds, as in father, fat, fate, fare, fall, want, any, villa, village, and that there are no less than twenty-one different symbols for the sound ey in fate, namely, a-e, a, ai, ay, aye, ah, ag-e, aig, aigh, ait, alf, ao, au, ei, ey, ea, eh, eye, eig, eigh, eighe, as in fate, lady, fail, may, played, dahlia, champagne, campaign, straight, trait, halfpenny, gaol, gauge, vein, they, break, eh, obeyed, reign, weigh, weighed, and nearly as many for u in pool ; see § 32. The number of vowels and diphthongs for which Dr. Murray has provided symbols in the Oxford Dictionary, exclusive of those borrowed from French and German and not yet natural- ised, is fifty-two ; but for an elementary course of lessons on phonetics it seems sufficient to use twenty-four. The English §§ 81-83.] The Five Principal Vowels. 45 vowels are peculiarly difficult to master, the French and German vowel systems being much more simple ; but students who proceed at once to these without first learning to distinguish accurately the sounds of their mother tongue, will in all pro- bability introduce the English vowels unawares into their French and German, and are not likely to acquire a correct pronunciation of these or of any other foreign languages. § 81. New Symbols for the Yowels, It is obvious, from what has been already stated, that to represent twenty-four vowels and diphthongs a number of new symbols must be employed, and that students must be careful to observe the value of these symbols, and to remember that the same symbol always stands for the same sound. Before attempting to classify the vowels, or to study them in detail, the keywords on p. xv. should be learnt by heart, and then the names of the vowels themselves, as this is the easiest way of committing them to memory. The vowels are copiously illustrated in §§ 25-44. § 82. Pronunciation of §. One name, that of e in fairy (feri), will be found difficult to pronounce, for we are always accustomed to follow it with the sound r, as in fairy, or a as in fair, air, where the last sound is like a in villa. Try to pro- nounce air without this final a, and to keep the e pure and unchanged. This is a useful exercise, because the sound required is practically the same as the French e or e in meme, zele, etc. The Five Peincipal Vowels. § 83. The best key to the classification of the vowels is the mastery of the five principal ones, namely, a, ey, i, ow, ii, as in father, fate, feet, pole, pool (fadhar, feyt, fit, powl, pul). These are approximately the sounds given to a, e, i, o, u in German, Italian, and most continental languages, so that it seems appropriate to use digraphs beginning with a, e, i, o, u, to represent them. 46 English Analysis. [§§ 84, 85. We may observe also that these five sounds are represented in the continental fashion in some English words, e.g., in father, obey, machine, pole, rule, and that we meet with ey in they, grey, obey, and ow in a great many words, such as bowl, flow, grow. It may be useful to remember that the symbols used for a, ey, i, OW, ii, by the Indian Government and the Church Missionary Society, in geographical names and native names in general, are a, e, i, 6, 4. This diagram shows the position of the tongue in forming the five principal vowels. ,^e- So^!^--- Tongue § 84. a in father. When we sound a in father the tongue is lowered, and the mouth passage is wide open, so it is called an open vowel; and it is reckoned one of the bach vowels, although the back of the tongue is not raised in forming it. Dr. Jespersen, in his Articulations of Speech Sounds, observes that it is rightly called a back vowel, because, although the back of the tongue is not absolutely as high as the middle, it is at the back that the tongue is nearest to the palate, so that this is the place of greatest friction, and the vowel should be named accordingly. It is sometimes called the Italian a, and it is a favourite sound with singers. The symbol most commonly used for it in English is ar, as in hard, cart, etc. See § 25. § 85. ey in fate and i in feet. It is very obvious that § 86.] The Five Principal Vowels. 47 when we pass from a to i we raise the lower jaw considerably. But the sound can be produced without thus closing the jaws ; and if by an effort we keep down the lower jaw, we can see that the tongue rises and approaches very near to the hard palate. It is the so-called front of the tongue which rises most, that is, the part just in front of the centre, so i is called a front vowel. And in forming ey the jaw and the same part of the tongue are raised, but not quite to the same extent; so ey likewise is called a front vowel, and distinguished from i as being half- closed, whilst i is said to be closed. ey and i are sometimes called palatal vowels, and this name may serve to remind us of their relation to the palatal con- sonant y, which is formed by placing the tongue in the same position as for the vowel i. § 86. ow in pole and u in pool. The most obvious fact when we pass from a to u is that the lips are contracted and the corners of the mouth drawn towards one another, so that it approaches the form of a circle, and that at the same time the lower jaw is raised. This movement of the lips is called rounding, and u is said to be a round vowel, ow is formed in the same way, but the lips are not so much contracted, and the jaw not so much raised. It is intermediate between a and u, and is called half-closed, whilst u is said to be closed. But another movement takes place in forming ow and u, which is not so obvious as the process of rounding. Ventrilo- quists can produce ow and ii tolerably well without moving their lips at all, and there are some few lazy people who always pronounce them in this fashion ; but whether the lips are rounded or not, the back part of the tongue is always raised in forming these vowels and brought near the soft palate for u, and not quite so near for ow, as shown in the diagram. They are therefore called back-round vowels. The consonants wh and w are related to u, as y is to i, being formed by placing the lips and tongue in the same position as for u. 48 English Analysis. [§§ 87, 88. Observe how the five principal vowels, a, ey, i, ow and u, are placed and named in the scheme on p. xxii. That scheme does not pretend to scientific accuracy, but it seems to be the most convenient way of exhibiting the vowels in a tabular form. § 87. ey and ow are not Pure Vowels, ey and ow are so far from being pure vowels that they might be classed with the diphthongs. But they are the best representatives we have of the close e and o of French, German and Italian, and it is con- venient to find a place for them amongst the vowels. The best way to convince oneself that ey in fate becomes gradually closer, and ends in a sound approaching to i, whilst ow closes up and ends in a sound which is almost u, is to observe how they are pronounced in singing by untrained singers. Such persons will be heard to pass rapidly to the close i or u sound, and to prolong it, producing a very dis- agreeable effect. But a well-taught singer will hold the first and more open sound as long as possible, changing it just at the end of the note, and will be careful, in singing French, German or Italian, to keep the vowel quite pure and unaltered throughout. It is important for all students of French and German to recognise the diphthongal character of ey and ow, for if they fail to do so, they will not succeed in pronouncing the close e and o of those languages, which must be kept pure to the end. It is said that %, i and u are diphthongal also, and that the only long vowel in English which is kept unaltered to the end is oe in bum. But it seems to me that in the best southern English a is not a diphthong, and that the change at the end of i and u is not obvious unless they are followed by a vowel, as in seeing, doing (siying, duwing), when they certainly become closer at the end, and conclude with the sounds y and W respectively. § 88. e in fairy and 6 in Paul. In our ordinary spelling e is always represented by some vowel or vowels followed by r, most frequently by a or ai, as in Mary, fairy, and the com- monest symbol for 6 is or, as in port, com, horse, lord. See § 89.] The Five Principal Vowels. 49 exx. of e and 6 in §§ 27, 30. As already observed, we must, in studying e, learn to pronounce it without adding that sound of a in villa which is heard after it in care, pair, wear, and, indeed, wherever the r is not followed by a vowel and trilled, as it is in Mary. e and 6 differ from ey and ow respectively in being more open. In both cases the jaw and tongue are lowered, and in the case of 6 the lips are less contracted, e may be called a half-open vowel. It is practically the same as the French open e in pres, zele, etc. 6, on the other hand, is an abnormal vowel, having nothing corresponding to it in French or German, though it is often supposed to be the same as French o in homme. It is, in fact, not only more open than o in homme, but has the tongue even lower than for a in father, so it must undoubtedly be reckoned as an open vowel. We may regard the front vowels e, ey, i, and the back- round vowels 6, ow, ii, as forming two corresponding series of sounds, but with this irregularity, that 6 is much more open than e. Observe the position of e, ey, i, and 6, ow, ii, in the scheme on p. xxii., and compare with the French vowels on p. xxiii. It would appear that one reason why the Bell-Ellis- Sweet vowel scheme differs so much from those adopted by foreign phoneticians, is that in English the abnormally open vowel 6 in Paul is more open than & in father. For in the Bell scheme a is placed half-way between the open and the shut vowels, instead of being reckoned an open vowel, as it is by phoneticians in general. And it is not surprising that no one starting from a French or German basis has placed & so high, seeing that in those languages there is no back-round vowel which has the tongue lower than &, § 89. oe in burn. This vowel, like e, is always represented by some vowel followed by r. It has no particular symbol belonging to it, but is written er, ir, or, ur, as in herd, bird, word, turn, and in various other ways. See the exx. in § 26. As the tongue is in a position intermediate between that for a front or a back vowel, it is called a mixed vowel, and it is 4 50 English Analysis. [§§ 90, 91. accordingly placed between the front and back vowels in the scheme on p. xxii. Like e it is half open. We do not meet with it in French or German. The Short Vowels. § 90. Six Short Accented Yowels. It will be convenient to begin with the consideration of the short vowels in accented syllables, because there is great uncertainty about unaccented vowels, whilst the accented ones are clear and well defined. We meet with six short vowels in unaccented syllables, namely oe, se, e, i, o, u, as in putty, pat, pet, pit, pot, put. These six accented vowels are always close or stopped, i.e., followed by a consonant in the same syllable, and as it is not easy to pronounce them alone, it is convenient to give them the names cet, set, et, it, ot, ut. It is noticeable that we do not meet with any one of these short vowels in the French language, and that three of them, namely oe, se, 0, do not occur in German either. Observe also that each of the vowels se and o is more open than any sound of its own class, either in French or German. § 91. Long and Short Yowels Compared. It is instructive to compare each of these short vowels with the long vowel most nearly corresponding to it, as in the following exx. : — oe and ce in boen and been. A. , ee , , Meri , , mseri. ey , , e , , geyt , , get. i , , i , , fit , fit. 6 , , o , . Pol , , Poli. u , , u , , pul , pul. If each of these six short vowels is prolonged, care being taken not to alter its character in any way, it will be found that every one of them differs more or less in formation and sound from the corresponding long vowel. This is not the case in French, where precisely the same sound may be long § 92.] The Short Voivels. 51 or short, and nearly all the vowels may be lengthened or shortened without altering their quality, as is shown in the table of French vowels on p. xxiii. In German there is usually a difference between long and short vowels, as in English, but it is not necessary to make any difference except that of length between the long vowels in Ikhm and mlhen and the short ones in LAmm and Winner respectively. The nature of the difference between the long and short vowels can be more conveniently discussed after we have examined each short vowel separately. § 92. The Short Front Yowels — 83 in pat. Note that the symbol for this vowel can easily be written without lifting the pen, and made quite distinct from 03, if the first part is made like a reversed e. It is a common mistake to suppose that 88 is the short vowel corresponding to a in father. In point of fact it is a front vowel, like e in fairy, but more open. It is not found in French or German. The German a in Mann and French a in patte differ from it and from one another. The short vowel which corresponds with a in father is German a in Mann. e in net may be called a half-open vowel, being decidedly more open than ey. It is intermediate between ey in fate and § in fairy. i in pit is the short vowel corresponding to i, but it is by no means identical with it, as may easily be perceived if we prolong it, taking care not to alter the sound at all. Fill and feel, fit and feet, differ in the quality of the vowel, as well as in its length ; and it is sufficiently obvious that in the short vowel i the tongue is lowered, making it more open than i. The importance of distinguishing between the sounds i and i is seen in the study of French, where the long and short i differ only in length. The short i in fini, for instance, is just as close as long i in lime, and fini must not be pronounced with the open i of English finny, nor with the long vowel heard in fee and knee. 52 English Analysis. [§§ 93-95. § 93. The Short Back-round Vowels— o in pot. The vowel o in pot is unknown in French and German. It is the short vowel corresponding with the long 6 in Paul, and is pro- nounced with the tongue in the lowest position possible. u in put is not a very common sound in English. It bears the same relation to u as i does to i, being decidedly more open than its corresponding long vowel u. The u of pull or full when prolonged is quite distinct from the long u in pool, fool. § 94. The Short Yowel — ce in but. The symbol most frequently used for 03 is u, but it is often represented by o, as in son, dove, among, mother. It is not found in French or German, and may be regarded as an abnormal vowel. Though a back vowel, it is not rounded. On the distinction between 03 and a, which sound much alike, e.g., in another (ancedhar), see § 100. The use of o in those words where it is pronounced as C3 was intro- duced by the French, who substituted it for u from a desire for clearness in writing, v was then written u, and ou or on was clearer than uu or un ; and we find accordingly that o is rarely used for oe except where it was introduced for the sake of clearness, e.g., before v or n or m, or after m. Sovereign was written for suvereign, but the visible o has affected the pronunciation. For these remarks I am indebted to Prof. Skeat. In some of the northern counties the vowels ce and u in but and put are very frequently interchanged ; and as we have no distinctive symbols for these two sounds, but use u for them both, it is difficult to correct this provincialism. § 95. Relations of Long and Short Yoweis. Eefer to the tables of vowels on pp. xxii.-xxv. In the coupling of long and short vowels there are some pairs which call for remark. It is sufficiently obvious that the vowels i and i, 6 and o, u and u, as in feet, fit, Paul, Polly, pool, pull, must be reckoned as pairs ; but the relationships of e, 38 and cs are not so clear. The position of e is between ey and e, but somewhat nearer to e. Compare the sounds ey and e in gate and get, and e and e in fairy and ferry. But as in all the cases where we un- questionably have a pair of long and short vowels, the short § 96.] The Short Vowels. 53 vowel is more open than the long one, it seems right to pair e with the closer ey, and to regard 88 in marry as the short vowel corresponding to e in Mary. Again, oe in burn is not formed in the same place as 03 in bun. It is, however, so difficult, for English people at least, to pronounce a short accented vowel in a mixed position, that the attempt to shorten oe apparently results in the short back vowel cs, a little more open than oe, and decidedly further back. § 96. Narrow and Wide Yowels. There seems also to be another difference between the long and short vowels in English and German. In the Bell-Ellis- Sweet system, i, o, u are called wide vowels, because in them the tongue is said to be relaxed and widened, whilst in the corresponding long vowels, Dr. Sweet says it is " bunched up," and these vowels are called narrow. In the Bell system great importance is attached to this distinction, and all the vowels are classified as narrow or wide, and arranged in separate tables accordingly. But Dr. Sweet acknowledges that in some cases it is difficult to distin- guish between narrow and wide vowels, and we find not only the three great advocates of this system differing among them- selves as to which vowels are narrow or wide, but Dr. Sweet himself has changed his mind as to the classification of a good many vowels since he wrote his Handbook, and the vowels in French pere and peur, with many others, have been transferred from the narrow table of vowels to the wide, in his more recent Primer of Phonetics. Moreover, many phoneticians altogether refuse to recognise this distinction, and I have not thought it necessary, in my scheme of vowels, to separate the narrow and the wide. For my own part, I agree with Dr. Sweet that the distinction is a real one, and I think he observes truly in the Primer of Phonetics that if we take a low- wide (i.e., an open-wide) vowel such as 88 in man, we can raise it through e in men to the high (close) position of i in it, without its ever running into the narrow vowel e in Fr. etc, But in classifying narrow and wide 54 English Analysis. [§ 97. vowels I should, like Prof. Jespersen, reckon all the English short accented vowels as wide, together with the German short accented vowels in Sonne, konnen, dvnn, and all the long vowels in English and German as narrow, though Dr. Sweet considers (B to be narrow and a to be wide. This at least seems quite clear, that there is a difference of some sort between the long and short vowels in English and in German ; for it cannot be accidental (1) that the short accented vowels are slightly more open than the corresponding long ones ; (2) that it is very difficult to lengthen the short ones without altering their quality ; and (3) that it is also difficult to pronounce them in open syllables. We always find them stopped, that is, followed by a consonant in the same syllable. In an elementary work of this kind, not much can be done towards the settlement of a question which has so long caused perplexity and divisions among phoneticians ; but the subject is interesting in itself, and has so much importance attached to it in the works of our three great English phoneticians, that it seems impossible to pass it over in silence. It is a question which still awaits solution. Unaccented Vowels. § 97. The unaccented vowels must be discussed separately. They constitute a great difficulty in our language, for they are not easy to distinguish from one another, and persons whose ear is not trained by the study of phonetics imagine that in most cases they pronounce, or ought to pronounce, unaccented vowels according to the spelling, when in reality, whatever the spelling may be, we very seldom hear any vowel in unaccented syllables except these two : (1) a as heard in attend, portable, villa, and (2) i as in immense, plentiful, horrid. In this matter nothing can be learnt from the generality of pronouncing dictionaries, which are all quite misleading, except the large unfinished New English Dictionary, where they are § 98.] Unaccented Vowels. 55 very carefully distinguished. Prof. Trautmann has made a very careful study of English unaccented vowels in his Sprachlaute, pp. 169-182. A comparison of the frequency with which the different unaccented vowels occur shows that a is extremely frequent, i frequent, o' somewhat rare, and all the rest extremely rare. § 98. Examples of the very rare unaccented vowels will be found in §§ 25-59, and the student will do well to read them through before proceeding to consider a, i and o\ It will then be seen that — (1) A large proportion of these examples are compound words, where there is a slight stress on the weaker syllable, as, for instance, in dherin fdtel impowst cenjoest oethkweyk daunfdl inmowst tiktep (2) Long vowels, and also diphthongs, appear occasionally in initial syllables without any accent whatever, as in s^kaestik ^kwoliti pdtentas powetik p^teyk krfeyshan j^dishal aidia foetiliti dthoriti kowinsidans yunslt (3) The retention of a rare vowel in an unaccented syllable is sometimes due to assimilation, the vowel being the same as that of the accented syllable adjoining, as in poevoes hcebceb aelpseka There are also some extremely rare cases which do not fall under any of the above rules, e.g. : — plaek^d kon-kr^t komp^kt insekt sedYoes impdteyshan priysept staipend We may now turn to the commoner unaccented vowels, a, i and o\ 56 English Analysis. 99, 100. § 99. The Obscure Yowel a in attend, portable, villa, sometimes called the natural or the neutral vowel, is fully- illustrated in §§ 33, 51. It would seem that English people in general fail to notice the existence of this vowel and confuse it with ae in cat, man, etc., for most dictionary makers use the same symbol for ge and a, and yet the two vowels are quite different in formation and sound. It would be less surprising if it were mistaken for ce in jiutty, which in sound, though not in formation, resembles it very closely. a is called the natural vowel because it is formed when the vocal organs are in the position most easy and natural to them, and no effort is made to pronounce any vowel in particular. Speakers who hesitate use it to fill up gaps in their sentences. The tongue is in that intermediate position, with neither back nor front especially raised, which produces a mixed vowel, and about as high as for e in pet, so that it may be called half-open. It is a curious fact that the natural vowels used in different languages to fill up gaps in speaking are not identical. The French use the vowel in le, and the Germans that in SonnE, which differ somewhat from the English a and from one another, whilst Scotchmen use a prolonged close e, as in German (/eh. The French natural vowel is slightly rounded. § 100. The Distinction between ce and a. Although ce, the so-called " but " vowel, and the obscure vowel a, sound very much alike, they can almost invariably be distinguished by following the rule that a has no accent whatever, whilst ce has some sort of accent, primary or secondary. Some excep- tions to this rule are given in § 34. Hcebceb is a case of assimiliation. Compound words which are felt to be com- pounds, such as teacup, unfit, unkind, and all words beginning with un-, have a slight stress on the weaker syllable, and should be written with ce — tikcep, cenfit, cenkaind, and so on ; but compounds like welcome, which are not felt to be such, and where the weaker syllable consequently has no stress whatever, should be spelt with a — welkam. §§ 101, 102.] Unaccented Vowels. 57 Exx. of 03 and a : — amcsng cendoe'n kcerant ancedhar abo3Y moedhar hcendrad abcendans ajo3st scemar moestar ajcestmant cenjcest kcelar ncembar cenkce'mfatabr § 101. Unaccented i and i\ There are two varieties of unaccented i. The i in rabbit, frolic, is practically the same as accented i in bit, lick ; but a more open sound, intermediate between i and e, is often used, e.g., in the terminations -iz, -id, -nis, -lis, and the prefixes in-, igz-, iks-, and wherever i is final, or followed by a vowel. For purposes of discussion, this open i may be written i\ Exx. of i', intermediate between i and e. fishiz fulnis inteyl foli wishiz gudm's ingeyj meri weytid restlis igzist meriar wontid fruwth's iksiyd glorias All the cases where i* is used instead of i seem to be accounted for either by position or by spelling. By position when the vowel is final, as in foli, or followed by a vowel, as in meriar, and by spelling in all other cases, such as fishiz, fulnis, where e is written, and in aiming at e we produce a sound intermediate between e and i, but nearer to i. Care must be taken in weak syllables to distinguish between i and a. It is a bad fault, but a very common one, to pronounce a instead of i, and one may often hear yunati, abilati, and the like. Irish people also introduce a into the terminations -iz, -id, -nis and -lis, pronouncing them -az, -ad, -nas, -las. § 102. Short o' in pillow. This vowel differs slightly from the long ow in pole, low, being more open and mixed than the first part of ow, whilst the second part of ow is hardly heard. It is most usually found at the end of words, or in the last syllable followed by a consonant, as in follow y hero, followed, heroes (folo', hiaro', folo'd, hiaro'z). When it occurs in initial 58 English Analysis. [§§ 103, 104. or medial syllables, as in pro'sid, elo'kyushan, the syllables are always open, that is, they do not end in a consonant. Unaccented ow may be distinguished from o' by observing that this rare sound occurs only in compounds such as inmowst, impowst, where there is a slight stress upon it, or in initial syllables, with a vowel following, as in kowoes, kowopareyt. 0' in final syllables should never be allowed to degenerate into a. Careless speakers often pronounce fela, winda, and so on, and even add on a r, saying " dha windar iz owpnV Walker says that in his time belas and gaelas for bellows and gallows were universal, but we have now returned to the forms belo'z, gselo'z. § 103. e' and u' in survey and value. Besides i', which has already been discussed, there are two other vowels in unaccented syllables for which no distinctive symbols need be used. For purposes of discussion they may be represented as e' and u\ They are generally represented by ey and u. e' is extremely rare. It is found in survey (sb.) and essay (soeve', ese'), and bears the same relation to long ey in. fate as o' does to ow. u* is more frequent, and occurs, like o', in final syllables, open or close, and in initial and medial syllables which are open. It most frequently appears as part of the diphthong yu. It differs from u in put, and from unaccented u in fulfil, wilful, manhood (maenhud), etc., in being somewhat mixed. Exx. of u' : — mtu Yselywd prejwdis inflwenshal Yeelyw Yoety^z dywreyshan inflwans Yoetyw instiwmant my^nifisant inkonggrwas Diphthongs. § 104. Diphthongs are not formed by simply pronouncing two vowels in succession. They begin with one vowel and end with another, but the change from one to the other is gradual. § 105.] Diphthongs. 59 The vocal organs pass through all the intermediate positions, so that the sound is changing all the time, and it is therefore difficult, in some cases, to analyse them accurately. The diphthongs ea, ia, 6a, ua, occurring in bear, bier, boar, boor, are seldom met with except where r follows, so they will be discussed in connexion with that consonant, and ey and OW, which may be reckoned as diphthongs, have been explained already ; so we have to consider here — § 105. The Diphthongs ai, an, oi, yu, as in time, loud, noise, tune. There is some diversity of opinion as to the elements of which these diphthongs are composed. The fact is that it is difficult to dwell upon the separate elements without altering their character. I should say that the result of a rough analysis, the only analysis of which children would be capable, is as follows : — ai in taim = a + i. oi in noiz = 6 + i. au ,, laud = a + u. yu ,, tyun = y + u. But on analysing ai more carefully, we find that it lies between a and i, without quite reaching either extremity. The first sound in ai is the French a in patte, midway between a and 88, for which we may use the symbol a, and the last is i', the vowel between e and i. There are, however, three English words containing a diphthong which resembles ai, and yet is not quite identical with it, having the full sound of a for its first element. It may be represented by ai, and is heard in Isaiah, aye and ayah (Aizaia, ai, aia). au is composed of a and the mixed vowel u', as in pre- judice, influence, and oi of 6 and i'. yu in accented syllables is composed of y and u, but yu in unaccented syllables, e.g., in regular (regyular), consists of y and u\ The sound of u, as in put, fulfil, is never heard in this diphthong, nor do we ever meet with the short form of yu in monosyllables or accented syllables. 60 English Analysis. [§ 105. So this is the more accurate analysis of these four diph- thongs : — ai = a + i\ Accented yu = y + u. au = a + U\ Unaccented yu = y + ll\ • a. • ■ 01 = + 1 . In words where unaccented yu is followed by a, as in annual, conspicuous (senyual, kanspikyuas), yu is often reduced to yw and ceases to form a separate syllable. When such words have another syllable added to them, as in annually, conspicuously (aenywali, kanspikywasli), yu is, I think, always reduced to yw. Many phoneticians omit yfi, yu, yw from among the diphthongs, and regard it simply as a combination of a consonant with a vowel, but it seems convenient to follow the example of Dr. Murray, who reckons it as a diphthong. IV. ENGLISH SYNTHESIS. § 106. Combinations of r with Yowels, Diphthongs and Triphthongs. a far star ja(r) sta(r) jaring stari jad staz 06 fur stir foe(r) stoe(r) foeri stoering foez stoed a beggar render bega(r) renda(r) begari rendaring begaz rendad ia fear steer fia(r) stia(r) fiaring stiaring fiaz stiad ua moor assure mua(r) ashua(r) miiaring ashuaring muaz ashuad aia fire prior faia(r) praia(r) faiaring praiari faiad praiaz aua sour tower saua(r) taua(r) sauarist tauaring sauad tauaz ytia cure lure kyua(r) lyua(r) kyuaring lyuaring kyuaz lyuad A. A. e, ea bear stare bea(r) stea(r) bfering stering beaz stead o, oa roar store roa(r) stoa(r) (61) roring storing roz stod eya flayer pleya(r) owa lower lowa(r) oia employer emploia(r) 62 English Synthesis. [§§ 107, 108. The following combinations are very rare : — pleyaz lowaring lowad emploiaz r in Combination with the Vowels. § 107. The consonant r is the most perplexing element in our language. Dr. Ellis wrote in 1875 that after more than thirty years' study he was not certain whether he had yet mastered its protean intricacies ; so it will need special atten- tion on the part of the student. The manner in which r is formed has been explained in § 68, and a large number of examples showing it in combination with the vowels will be found in §§ 45-59. The chief facts concerning it will, however, be more easily grasped by re- ferring to the table at the head of this chapter, which shows the changes that take place in the inflections of words ending in r. There is so much diversity of practice in the pronunciation of words written with r, that it may be well to repeat that the pronunciation given here is my own, i.e., that of an educated Southerner. The same alphabet can, however, be used to represent other pronunciations, as is shown in § 145. § 108. The chief points to be noticed are these : — 1. r is never heard unless a vowel follows it. Accordingly, it will be seen on inspecting the table that r is written before a vowel in jarring, starry (jaring, stari), etc., but omitted when, in other forms of the same words, a consonant is added, as in jarred, stars (jad, staz). There is an apparent exception to this rule in such words as barrel, barren, quarrel, sorrel, which are often pronounced (baerl', b38rn', kworl', sorl'), but in these cases the 1' and n', being syllabic, are equivalent to vowels. 2. All icords ending in r have at least two forms, r final is § 108.] r in Combination with the Vowels. 63 never heard unless a vowel follows in the next word. So r final is sounded in stin up, render an account, fean of punish- ment, but silent in stm the fire, render thanks, fean nothing. In this book the longer forms, stoer, rendar, fiar, and so on, are always employed, but in the table at the head of this chapter r final is enclosed in brackets, to indicate that it is sometimes silent. We have an analogous case in the article a or an, where the n disappears before a consonant in the next word. And the same thing occurs frequently in French, where many final consonants are silent unless there is a liaison with a vowel in the word which follows. 3. r sometimes lengthens the vowels which precede it. Compare for instance : — ■ bad and bar (bsed, bar) bed ,, her (bed, hoer) bid ,, stir (bid, stoer) nod „ nor (nod, nor) bud ,, fur (bced, foer) It is only in unaccented syllables that we meet with a short vowel before final r, and that vowel is always the same, namely a, whatever may be written in our ordinary spelling, e.g., in pillar, centre, silver, sailor, honour, pleasure, martyr. 4. r produces diphthongs and triphthongs. On referring to the table in § 106, it will be seen that r produces the four diphthongs ea, ia, 6a, ua, besides eya and owa, which are very rare, and three triphthongs, aia, aua, yua, besides the rare triphthong oia, all ending with the vowel a, as in villa. 5. These diphthongs and triphthongs remain when r dis- appears, as may be seen by the exx. in the table. The a which preceded the r is even more distinctly heard in fears, moors, fires (f iaz, muaz, faiaz), where the r is silent, than in fearing, mooring, firing. 6. The a is often a separate syllable, though not commonly 64 English Synthesis. [§ 109. reckoned as such. Sere is as truly a dissyllable as seer. Com- pare also the following exx. : — rear and freer hour and shower poor ,, doer flour ,, flower hire ,, higher pure ,, ewer lyre ,, liar cure ,, skewer 7. § and 6 are not ahvays changed into ea, 6a by r following them, so they are put last in the table as requiring more ex- planation. But the four vowels ey, i, ow, u, and the four diphthongs ai ? au, oi, yu, never have r immediately after them. The sound a, as in villA, is always inserted before r. This rule is never broken in accented syllables, but in un- accented syllables there are some rare exceptions. See air and yur in §§ 56, 59. In these cases the r belongs to the syllable which follows, and so is disconnected from the preceding ai or yu. 8. English people often think they hear r when it is silent. Many fancy that they hear it in such words as fierce, fears, moors (fias, fiaz, muaz), when what they really hear is the sound a as in villa. And, as Prof. Skeat has remarked, some even think that they hear it in barn, pronounced like the German Bahn (ban), and in arms and lord, when they sound exactly like alms and laud (amz, lod). But in such cases the r only serves to indicate that we pronounce the long vowels a and 5 instead of the short vowels as and o, as in am and odd (sem, od). 9. This occasions many mistakes in French and German. For (1) Englishmen often fancy that they pronounce r when they really neglect to do so, and (2) they have a bad habit of inserting a, either before it or as a substitute for it, pronouncing French dire and pour just like English dear and poor, and so on. These are the principal points to be observed, but it may be useful to note some further details. § 109. ia, ua. The diphthongs ia and ua, as in peer, poor, §§ 110,111.] r in Combination with the Vowels. 65 are not longer than the vowels i and u, from which they are derived, the first element being shorter than i or u. But in sound these first elements resemble the long vowels i and u in peel and pool rather than the short i and u in pit and put, being much closer than these. The length of the last element is variable, being shorter when followed by the sound of r, as in peerage, poorest, than when the r is silent. When the r is heard, this a can hardly be reckoned as a separate syllable. In some words ia has a tendency to change into yoe, that is, the stress is transferred to the second element, which is lengthened, whilst the first is so shortened as to become a consonant. Ear is often, and year almost always, pronounced exactly like year in yearn (yoen), except that the final r is liable to be trilled when a vowel follows, and it is only by a special effort that any one can pronounce year as yiar. And in like manner here, near, dear are often pronounced hyoer, nyoer, dyoer. There is also in ua a tendency to become 6, as in your, generally pronounced yor, and rhyming with for. Compare also Bournemouth and Eastbourne, pronounced by some Buan- mauth and Istbuan, and by others Bonmath and Istbon. And it is not unusual to hear shor and sholi for sure and surely, though this pronunciation is not to be recommended. § 110. aia, aua, yua. In these also the final a is decidedly shortened when r follows, as in fiery, flowering, purest (faiari, flanaring, pyuarisi). § 111. ea, 6a. In these the first sounds are e and 6 as in fairy and Paul, but shortened. In ea and 6a the second element, a, is short and less distinct than at the close of ia, ua, aia, aua, yuar, so that it cannot be reckoned as a separate syllable. The use of these diphthongs varies very much in the speech of different people ; and also in the mouth of the same person the diphthongs ea, 6a are liable to be reduced to e and 6 re- spectively when the word in which they occur is inflected, or 5 66 English Synthesis. [§ 111. even when its position in the sentence is changed, so that they are very perplexing. The following rules apply to my pro- nunciation, but are not of universal application. ea is distinctly heard when no r is sounded after it, but it is reduced to e when the r is sounded on account of a vowel following in the same or in the next word, or at least the second part of the diphthong so nearly disappears as to be practically unnoticeable. So if we did not aim at a fixed spell- ing for each word we ought for bear, stare, etc., to write bea, stea, and so on, when such words are at the end of a sentence, or followed by a consonant in the next word, e.g., in a black bear, to stare wildly, and ber, ster when the next word begins with a vowel, as in bear it, do not stare at him. But it seems most convenient to write bear, stear, etc., in every case. When these words ending in -ear, or, to speak more exactly, in -ea or -er, are inflected, they follow the same rule, and we have er before a vowel and ea before a consonant ; so we pronounce and write er in bearing, staring (bering, stering), and ea in bears, stares (beaz, steaz). It is a curious fact that in the word girl a sound is often heard inter- mediate between ea and oe. The dictionaries give oe, making it rhyme with pearl, and that is the pronunciation I myself aim at, but my friends tell me I really pronounce it differently, something like ea in pear. And certainly this intermediate sound is the prevailing one amongst cultivated people, whilst some of them definitely pronounce it §a, as if it were spelt gairl. 6a is not so often heard as ea, being noticeable only when such a word as roar, store is at the end of a sentence, in which case the r of course disappears. So in I heard the lion roar, Give me some more, Shut the door, we hear roa, moa, doa. But if such words are followed by another word, or inflected, the a disappears ; and if it is a vowel that follows, we hear or, as in Give me some more ink (mdr), roaring, storing (roring, storing), or if a consonant, simply 6, as in Give me some more pens (mo), roared, stored (rod, stod). 112, 113.] r in Combination with the Vowels. 67 All such words as roar, store, door, pour have therefore in reality three different forms, according to position, ending in 6a when final, in or when followed by a vowel, and in 5 when followed by a consonant, though it is convenient to use for them the fixed spellings roar, stoar, doar, poar. As the different forms of the words we write with the endings ear and oar are difficult to remember, it may be convenient to arrange some of them in a tabular form, to show more clearly how the pronunciation is affected by their position in the sentence. Before a Before a vowel. consonant. Final. bear ber bea bea pear per pea pea wear wer wea wea boar bor bo boa hoar nor ho hoa soar sor so soa Examples : — Bear up (ber). Bear no malice (bea). More than I can bear (bea). The wild boar is fierce (bor). The boar was hilled (bo). He caught a loild boar (boa). § 112. or in Weak Words and Syllables. In the weak words or, nor, for, your, and in the unaccented final syllables of therefore, tuherefore, lessor, vendor, guarantor, we have the ending or before a vowel and 6 in other cases, but 6a is seldom or never heard, and we spell them all with or, thus : or, nor, for, yor, dhearfor, and so on. § 113. eya, owa, oia. Although ey and ow are among the commonest vowels in our language, all these combinations are extremely rare. For before r it is much easier to pronounce the corresponding open vowels e and 6. And the combinations eyr, owr are unknown in English, it being still more difficult to pass from ey or ow to r without inserting a. Great care must therefore be taken in pronouncing such German words as schwer, Ohr, (1) to avoid the open vowels heard in bear and 68 English Synthesis. [§§ 114, 115. boar, and (2) not to insert a after e(y) and o(w). It used to distress my excellent German mistress, Frau Flohr, very much, that her pupils would persist in pronouncing her name just like the English word floor. 1 § 114. Varieties of Pronunciation in words spelt with r. It may be well to show how the alphabet used here can be employed to repre- sent some varieties of pronunciation in words spelt with r. To represent correctly some pronunciations which are frequently heard, it would be necessary to use : — 1. aa instead of & in such words as jarred, stars, barn, far (jaad, Stciaz, baan, faar), to indicate that the sound heard is a diphthong ending with the a in villa. To write r before a consonant would be misleading, as the consonant r is not heard, but only a vowel glide. 2. §ar instead of §r wherever I write er, i.e., in such words as fairy, bearing, staring (feari, bearing, stearing), where a vowel follows the r, to indicate that a diphthong is heard and not a simple vowel. 3. 6a instead of 6 in words spelt with or followed by a consonant, such as cord, north (koad, n6ath), etc., to show that the simple vowel is changed into a diphthong. 4. owar instead of 6ar in more, door (mowar, dowar), etc., to indi- cate that in such words there is the half-closed vowel of pole, and not the open vowel of Paul. Doubled Sounds. § 115. These are not very frequent, though doubled letters are very common in our ordinary spelling, but several con- sonants and the short vowel i are sometimes doubled. Examples of : — tt, dd, kk. mm, nn. 11, ss, ii. kowtteyl immyu'ar sowlli heddres unnesisari howlli bukkeys unnown missteytmant bukkiping inneyt pitiing kaeriing 1 §a and 6a (6 and 6 less open than in English), in German words such as schwer, Ohr, are common, especially in large towns, but are still considered slovenly. — Ed. § 116.] Consonants Combined. 69 In the case of doubled i, what is done is to give a sudden increase of force to the vowel, which marks the beginning of a new syllable. But when explosive consonants are doubled it should be noticed that the first consonant differs from the second. The organs of speech take the right position for the formation of the consonant, whatever it may be, and the re- opening of the passage through the mouth is delayed a little, but the opening or explosion is not made twice over. The first consonant is heard in the act of closing and the second in the act of opening. When a liquid or a continuant is doubled, the sound is prolonged, and an increase of force is given to indicate the beginning of a new syllable. In the case of continuants it is not easy to make the increase of force heard, and this proves somewhat inconvenient for ladies whose names happen to begin with S, unless they have a well-known name like Smith. Servants attempting to announce such a name as Miss Soames or Miss Sprigg generally call it Mis Owmz or Mis Prig, and the only safeguard against this is to make a pause after Miss when giving them the name. Consonants Combined. § 116. Combinations of Consonants. ImplosiYe and ExplosiYe Consonants. It is not only doubled consonants which are liable to be modified in the manner just described, for whenever two consonants which are ordinarily explosive come together, there is only one explosion, the first consonant being heard only in the act of shutting the breath passage, whilst the second is heard in the act of opening. In such cases, though both consonants may be called stops, or shut consonants, it is only the second that is explosive. The first is said to be implosive. Observe how the consonants are formed in such words as &kt, lopt, ro&bd, hegd, for instance. There is no explosion for the k, p, b and g in these cases. Shut consonants followed by a liquid are modified in a 70 English Synthesis. [§§ 117, 118. similar way, the vocal organs being placed in the right position for the liquid before the explosion takes place. Examples : — Brai£«\ beykn', boil', &pl', onpn\ fikV . Inflections. § 117. The real character of English inflections is often disguised by our spelling. For instance, the termination t in looked is written ed, though it is really the same as the t in slept. And there are also vowel changes which do not appear in written English. We find, for example, that the present and past tenses of the verb to read are written alike, although pronounced respectively rid and red. It may therefore be convenient, without giving a complete view of the inflections of English, to show those which are not clear in our ordinary spelling. § 118. The Terminations t, d, id, s, z, iz. These endings to verbs and nouns are written in our ordinary spelling as t, d, ed, s, ce, es, as in the following examples : — felt t = t hopes s = s hoped d = t pence ce = s moved d = d pens s = z added ed = id dresses es — iz The rules governing the use of these terminations are that : — (1) After a hard consonant we use a hard consonant, either t or s, as the case may be. (2) After a soft consonant or a vowel we use a soft consonant, either d or z. And the exceptions are these : — (1) After a liquid we sometimes use t, and in the word pence we use s after the liquid n, although all our liquids are soft. (2) After consonants which cannot conveniently be com- § 119.] Inflections. 71 bined with d or z because of their similarity to them, we retain the vowel i, making the terminations id and iz. The consonants which cannot be combined with d are the point stops t and d, and those which cannot be combined with z are the point (and point blade) continuants or sibilants s, z, sh, zh, and the composite consonants, ending in sibilants, ch = t + sh and j = d + zh. Examples of endings t, d, id, s, z, iz : — After hard After soft After After After t, d, and consonants. consonants. vowels. liquids. silibants. dropt robd pleyd dremt spotid nokt begd frid sind dredid poeft liYd flowd loent dresiz goetht beydhd ¥yiid boent myuziz drest myuzd fasnsid longd pushiz pusht ruzhd folo'd sweld ruzhiz fecht ejd pleyz dwelt fechiz drops robz friz drimz ejiz spots dredz flowz penz noks begz yyuz pens poafs Hyz fsensiz singz goeths beydhz folo'z telz The word haus makes the plural hauziz, changing s into z before the termination iz. Note particularly that after the liquids m, n, 1 in the follow- ing words we should pronounce t, though they are often written with ed : — boent, loent, dremt, dwelt, spilt, spelt, spoilt. But in the Biblical phrase they spoiled the Egyptians, where the meaning is they took spoils from, we pronounce spoild. § 119. Change of th to dh. The plural of substantives and the third person of verbs ending in th are very frequently formed by changing th to dh and adding z, just as f is often changed to y in similar cases, e.g., in loaf, loaves, thief, thieves 72 English Synthesis. [§§ 120, 121. (lowf, Iowyz, thif, thiYz). After a short vowel or a consonant the th is retained, as in breaths, deaths, months, tenths, healths, but after a long vowel the change generally takes place, as in these examples : — bath badhz owth owdhz mauth maudhz shith shidhz path padhz yuth yudhz rith ridhz kloth klodhz truth trudhz § 120. Changes of Yowels, The following changes of vowels are not apparent in ordinary spelling : — child children chaild childran woman women wuman wimin pence sixpence pens sikspans say says, said sey sez, sed do does du dcez read read rid past tense and part. ] eat eat, ate it et dream dreamed drim dremt lean leaned lin lent leap leaped lip lept mean meant min ment hear heard hiar hoed can can't kssn kant shall shan't shesl shant do don't du downt There is no change of vowel in the plural gentlemen, nor in plurals formed from names of nations ending in a sibilant, such as Englishmen, Frenchmen, Welshmen, which are pronounced just like the singular. § 121. The past tense of ash (ask) is pronounced ast, the k being dropped. Note that there is a distinction in sound, though not in spelling, between the following verbs and the corresponding adjectives :— 122.] Accent. 73 Past tense and part, of verb. Adjectiv aged learned eyjd loent eyjid loenid cursed koest koesid blessed blest blesid beloved biloe'Yd biloB'Yi And used, past tense and part, of to use, is pronounced yuzd, whilst used = accustomed is pronounced yust. The form yust is probably due to assimilation, for used = accustomed is always followed by to. But when used, past tense or part, of use, is followed by t, as in I used two brushes, It has been used to-day, the pronunciation yuzd is retained. Accent. § 122. In English the accented syllables are strongly emphasised, whilst the unaccented ones are pronounced indis- tinctly, so that students of French, where every syllable, unless elided, is heard quite clearly, and the accent or stress is nearly equal throughout the sentence, have to pay special attention to the difference between the two languages in this respect. In many words we have principal and secondary accents, e.g., in ventilation, characteristic, where the first syllable has a secondary accent. But in this scheme secondary accents are not marked. Accented syllables are marked thus : — infest. When printers have a difficulty in supplying the type, or the vowel has already a diacritic mark over it, the accent can be put after the vowel, thus : — infe'st, impo'tant. It would be superfluous to mark the accent under ordinary circumstances, except in the case of foreign or unfamiliar words, but in lessons for children it must be inserted, unless its place can be easily determined by rule. In phonetic spelling it would be easy to distinguish nearly all those pairs of words which we 74 English Synthesis. [§§ 123-125. are in the habit of spelling alike and accenting differently, without marking the accent, as may be seen in the following examples : — rebel = rebl' or ribel accent = seksant ,, seksent present = prezant ,, prizent absent = sebsant ,, aebsent record = rekod ., rikod protest = prowtest ,, pro'test refuse = refyus ,, rifyuz § 123. In our language the accent generally falls upon the first syllable, and in a good many words it has been shifted accordingly. The following words, for instance, used to be accented on the second syllable, but now have the accent on the first : — balcony, barrier, effort, essay, record (subst.). And two other facts should be noted : — (1) a and o' are never accented, and — (2) Certain terminations, the commonest of which are -shan, -zhan, -shal, and -iti, always cause the accent to be on the preceding syllable. So in this book words which have no accent marked are accented according to the following — § 124. Accent Rules. 1. Words ending in -shan, -zhan, -shal, or -iti, have the accent on the preceding syllable. Examples : — ditoeminey- shan, diyizhan, benifishal, impyuniti. 2. Other words are accented on the first syllable, unless the vowel of that syllable is a or o', in which cases the accent is on the second syllable. Examples : — amceng, parental, pro'test, o'bey. § 125. Accentuation of Compound Words. In words which are not compounds, we do not accent two consecutive syllables, but one or more unaccented syllables occur between §§ 126-129.] Accent 75 the principal (') and secondary (•) accents, as in kae'raktaristik, ditoe'mineyshan. In fact, the secondary accents are intro- duced merely because it is difficult to pronounce many un- accented syllables in succession. But in compound words, or rather in such words as are felt to be compounds, each part of the word has its own proper accent, so that the accents may happen to fall upon two consecutive syllables, as in meydsoevant. In compound words one of the accents is subordinated to the other, and may be called a secondary accent. In pitfol, aut- breyk, wochwoed, for instance, the chief stress is on the first syllable, and in osnnown, disteystful, it is on the second. The prefix can is always felt to be separable, and has a slight stress upon it. On the other hand, some familiar words, such as brekfast, kcebard, are no longer felt to be compounds, and in these only one syllable is accented. § 126. Level Stress. The word amen and the interjec- tions halloa ! bravo ! are said to have level stress, as in them both syllables are equally accented, but such instances are rare. § 127. Shifting Accent. There are a few dissyllables which have the principal accent on the first or second syllable, according to circumstances. We say, for instance, His age is fifteen. I have fifteen shillings. Some fell by the wayside. A wayside inn. They sat outside. An outside passenger. He went downstairs. A downstairs room. Among the Chinese. A Chinese lantern. I saw the princess. I saw Princess Alice. § 128. Contrasted Words. The accent is also shifted when we want to contrast two words, the principal stress being laid on the syllable which serves to distinguish them. So we say, agreeable and disagreeable, decided and undecided, open and re" -open, ascend and descend, though the principal accents gener- ally fall as follows : — disagreeable, undecided, re-open, ascend, descend. % 129. Sentence Stress or Emphasis. This subject will not be fully treated here, and in the reading-book sentence stress has not been marked in any way. All that has been 76 English Synthesis. [§ 129. done is to indicate the strongest syllable in each word, and it is left to the reader to distinguish how the words must be more or less strongly stressed according to their places in the sentence. But it seems necessary to indicate the principles which govern the use of stress in sentences. These appear to be two : — (1) Logical Stress. In English the most important words in the sentence are stressed, e.g., in Give me some bread, the stress falls upon give and bread, at least under ordinary circum- stances. But just as, in exceptional cases, we have seen that the stress in words may for special purposes be shifted from one syllable to another for the sake of contrast, so under special circumstances we might say, Give me some bread, implying that the speaker is afraid of being overlooked, or Give me sdme bread to intimate that he does not ask to have it all. But as M. Passy has observed, in such cases the stressed words or syllables are those which are the most important under the circumstances, so that they are not real, but only apparent exceptions to the rule. (2) Rhythmical Stress. The stress is also much affected by the rhythm of the sentence. We have noticed how in words of many syllables there is generally a well-marked secondary stress, just because it is not convenient to pronounce many weak syllables in succession. Words which are an exception to this rule, such as temporarily, laboratory, where we have four weak syllables coming together, are difficult to pronounce on that account. And so in sentences there is a tendency to introduce stress at regular intervals, it being convenient to find a series of syllables to lean upon at intervals which are tolerably regular. It is true that the logical accent falling upon the chief words in the sentence is of the first importance, and cannot be altogether set aside ; and yet if a set discourse, or any long sentence, be listened to with a view to noticing the stress, it will be found that the accents seem to occur very regularly. And closer observation will show that, as a general rule, we § 129.] Accent. 77 unconsciously select amongst the accented syllables some which shall bear the chief stress, and contrive to let these occur at regular intervals of time, hurrying over the intermediate syllables if they are many, and taking them slowly if they are but few. This principle of rhythm in prose was first expounded by Mr. Joshua Steele in his Essay towards Establishing the Melody and Measure of Speech, a.d. 1775, and his Prosodia Bationalis, 1779, and succeeding teachers of elocution have approved of this view, e.g., Dr. Eush, Philosophy of the Voice, p. 364; Dr. Barber, and Chapman in his Bhythmical Grammar. The theory was first brought to my notice many years ago in Curwen's Grammar of Vocal Music, p. 108, and since then I have often listened to speaking with a view to testing it, and have never failed to observe that the strongly-accented syllables occur with great regularity. Even when there is a pause in speaking, the interval then found between the two nearest strong syllables is a multiple of the time which usually elapses. I observe however a tendency to shorten the interval between the last two strong syllables before a pause. It is right to mention that neither Dr. Ellis nor Dr. Sweet believe in this law of rhythm ; but the evidence of my own ear so strongly confirms Steele's rule that I cannot refuse to accept it, and I am said to have a good ear for time in music. I think however that a first-rate reader or speaker does not adhere so strictly to the rule as ordinary people, and that if you would find examples where it absolutely governs the accentuation, you must listen to the reading of passages which have been read over and over again till they are nearly known by heart, e.g., the liturgy of the Church of England. If the ear did not expect the strong syllables to occur regularly, the variety produced by the skilful speaker who occasionally departs from the rule would not be appreciated as it now is, and the rule does not cease to be a rule because it is subject to some exceptions. 78 English Synthesis. [§§ 130, 131. Quantity. § 130. Although the English vowels naturally fall into two classes, long and short, their length is not always fixed and invariable. It depends upon two things, (1) whether they are accented or unaccented, and (2) whether they are followed by a hard consonant. It is obvious, for instance, that unaccented 6 in othoriti is shorter than accented 6 in othar, that kad is longer than kat, and maen longer than kset. Dividing the vowels into long, half-long, and short, they may be classified thus : — Long. All so-called long vowels and diphthongs, when they are accented and either final or followed by a soft con- sonant. Examples : — fa(r) feyl blow taim foe(r) fil blu laud Half-long. (1) All so-called long vowels and diphthongs, when followed by a hard consonant. Examples : — kat feyt bowt lait hoet fit but aut (2) All so-called short vowels, when followed by a soft consonant. Examples : — seen hged fed hil rod meed keeb hen pig dol Short. All so-called short vowels, when followed by a hard consonant. Examples : — kcet paet pet pit pot keep maep pek stif dros For further details, see the chapter on quantity in Dr. Sweet's Primer of Spoken English. § 131. It is important to notice the influence of hard and soft consonants on the quantity of the vowels which precede §§ 132, 133.] Syllable Division. 79 them, because English people are apt to introduce this habit of altering the length of the vowels into the German language, where their length is not affected by the consonant which follows. Prof. Vietor frequently calls attention to this mistake in his book on German Pronunciation. The following arrangement may be a help in remembering the rules for quantity : — Long. Half-long. Short. ,g Long {5d ) k&t rt Short keen kset 8 t fpky >> Long i , J , , , ^ b Ipleyd pleyt | Short led let | T /flow o lj0ng (flowd flowt Short rod rot Syllable Division. § 132. Speech is not, as some persons imagine, divided into words by means of pauses, or in any such way as will enable the ear to perceive the division. Common phrases, such as at all events, are often mistaken by children for single words, until they have been seen in writing. Indeed it is now generally recognised that the true unit of speech is the sentence, and not the word, whether we regard speech phonetically, or as the expression of thought, or go back to the history of its origin. This theory was first propounded by Waitz, and there is a very interesting exposition of it in Sayce's Science of Language, vol. i. 85-87, 110-132. § 133. Breath Groups. Regarded phonetically, speech consists of breath groups, and these again are composed of syllables. The breath group, which is usually a whole sentence, and occasionally only a part of one, is easily recognised, as it 80 English Synthesis. [§§ 134-139. consists of all the sounds uttered without pausing to take breath ; but the limits of the syllable are not always very clearly denned. § 134. Intensity of Sound. The grouping of sounds in syllables depends upon the relative intensity of the sounds, that is, on their being more or less easily heard. And their intensity depends partly on the fact that some sounds are naturally more sonorous than others, and partly on the force of expiration used in uttering them. § 135. Intensity due to Particular Sounds. In such a word as solid, the division into syllables is due to the difference in the qualities of the sounds employed. The two vowels are more sonorous than either of the three consonants, and each vowel forms the nucleus of a syllable, the intermediate con- sonant 1 belonging to neither syllable in particular. § 136. Intensity due to Effort of Speaker. But if we study the syllable division of such words and phrases as pitiing, missteytmant, kopi it, Mis Smith, we find that a new syllable may be begun, without any change of sound, by merely giving a fresh impulse of force to the sounds i and s. § 137. Syllable Division. These then are the two facts upon which syllable division depends ; and wherever there is a marked increase of intensity, due either to the character of the sound uttered, or to the force of utterance, we have a new syllable. § 138. Syllables without Yowels. Syllables can be formed without any vowel, for some consonants are much more sonorous than others. We can hear such sounds as sh and the combination pst very distinctly; and in English, as we have already observed, a prolonged m, n or 1 can form a syllable without the aid of any vowel, as in schism, reasons, troubled (sizm', rizn'z, trcebl'd). § 139. Word Division. The division of syllables is gener- ally, but not always, made to correspond with the word division. Dr. Sweet observes that we distinguish a name and a try from an aim and at Bye by the syllable division, that is, by making § 140.] Syllable Division. 81 the stress begin on the first sound of the second word. Other- wise the phrases would sound exactly alike. He shows also how in some cases the word and syllable division do not corre- spond, e.g., in not at 61, where the syllable division is a-tol, a new stress beginning on the t of at. § 140. Rules for Syllable Division. In English these are as follows : — I. When a single consonant occurs between two vowels. (1) If the preceding vowel is accented, as in solid, ripar, weyting, the consonant belongs equally to the syllables before and after, so that we may divide the word as best suits our convenience. And it seems most convenient to join the con- sonant to the preceding vowel for two reasons ; first, because all the short accented vowels are difficult to pronounce without a vowel following them, so that the easiest division is foen-i, rseb-it, med-o', Yil-a, sol-id, wul-in, and so on ; and secondly, because by this means we can often separate a termination from the word to which it has been appended, as in fol-ing, stown-i, pleys-iz. (2) But if the preceding vowel is unaccented, the consonant belongs to the syllable which follows, thus : — ri-lent, pro'-sid, a-tend, laeb-a-ra-ta-ri. Between two weak vowels, however, a feeling of derivation sometimes overrides this rule, and in such a word as punisher the sh may be joined to the preceding syllable, or connected with it and the syllable that follows, but it is impossible to say pceni-shar ; so we divide thus : — poen-ish-ar. II. When tioo or more consonants occur between two vowels. (1) If the preceding vowel is short and accented, one or more consonants must close the syllable, for the short accented vowels never occur in open syllables. So we divide thus : — trosb-ling, maet-ras, ves-paz, sik-li, prog-ris, although the combinations bl, tr, sp, kl, gr, are often met with at the beginning of words. (2) But if the preceding vowel is unaccented, we put as 6 82 English Synthesis. [§ 141. many consonants as possible with the following syllable ; that is, as many as can be combined together at the beginning of a word. So we divide thus : — a-trsskt, a-kros, di-praiY, di-kleym, o'-blik, pro'-gresiy, in-tens, in-herit, in-tru'd, ig-zsekt, kan-sil, kam-praiz. (3) And if the preceding vowel is long and accented, we do the same, dividing thus : — stey-bling, yey-grant, zi-bra, lan-dri, sim-stres. Exceptions to the above rules. When a group of consonants begins with s, the s belongs to the preceding syllable. So we divide dis-koerij, dis-paiz mis-teyk, beys-mant, mas-tar, klas-ping, although sk, sp, st, sm, sp are combinations which occur at the beginning of words. The compounds ch = t + sh and j = d + zh are not divided in syllable division, but must be reckoned as one con- sonant, so we divide fech-ing, lej-ar = fetsh-ing, ledzh-ar. It is only in compound words, such as HOBt-shel, that the two elements of ch are separated, and j is never divided in this manner. tl and dl can be combined at the beginning of a syllable, though not at the beginning of a word. We divide thus : — disan-tli, prezan-tli, di-said-i-dli, faun-dling. The above rules do not apply to compound words, which are divided according to their component parts. Intonation. § 141. The chief distinction between the use of the voice in speaking and in singing is, that whilst in singing it is sustained for a time at the same pitch, in speaking it is continually rising and falling. And not only do single syllables rise and fall, but we frequently hear a rise succeeded by a fall on the same syllable, or the opposite, that is, a syllable falling and then rising again. The intervals through which the voice rises and falls in §§ 142, 143.] Intonation. 83 speaking are however very difficult to ascertain accurately, nor has any sort of notation been invented which can adequately express them, so that the acquisition of good intonation, which is of high importance in reading and speaking, must depend more on the feeling and taste of the speaker, and on his oppor- tunities of observing and imitating good models, than on any systematic instruction. It may suffice now to state two rules which govern English musical intonation, and which demand our attention the more because they do not prevail in French. (1) Syllables which are accented rise in pitch. (2) In interrogative sentences the voice rises at the end, but all other sentences have a fall at the close. § 142. Key. The key in which speakers pitch their utter- ances depends partly on their vocal organs, men naturally using a lower key than women and children, and great differences being observable between individuals of the same age and sex. Something also depends on the speaker's frame of mind. Joy, or any great excitement, naturally leads to the use of a higher key than usual. § 143. Pitch of the Yowels. Each of the vowels has a pitch natural to itself, and the relative pitch of the vowels has been carefully examined by Dr. Trautmann. I regret that I am not able to verify his conclusions, but it seems worth while to quote them. His system is best exemplified by the French vowels, as in tout, drole, homme, pdte, patte, pres, ete, fini, peur, peu (peu), pu, and is as follows : — j — J — p -e>- -&- -&- -P- £: t= ou 6 o a a & 6 i eu eu u It will be seen that the vowels thus form the chord of the dominant seventh. 84 English Synthesis. [§§ 144, 145. Three other vowels in Dr. Trautmann's scheme are not of any practical importance. One of them is often heard in Hanover, but the other two are not known in any language. Variable Words. § 144. In the attempt to spell the English language phon- etically, we are met by a serious difficulty arising from the fact that a large number of words are pronounced in different ways. We have (1) those which are pronounced differently by different well-educated people, and (2) those which are pronounced differently by the same persons under different circumstances. The first class of words need not trouble us much. At present we have, it is true, no standard pronunciation, but when a considerable number of well-educated people have given some attention to phonetics and are able to put down their pronunciation on paper, it may be hoped that we shall arrive at a consensus of opinion in the matter, and find out what pronunciation is most general among cultivated English people, and fix our standard accordingly. The following examples of words of this class are taken from a paper drawn up for the English Spelling Reform Association by the late Mr. Evans. They are given first in ordinary spell- ing, and then according to my own pronunciation. § 145. Accented Vowel Sounds. (1) a or ae. Path, pass, past, cask, grafting, command, advance, stanching, answer, half, laugh, staff, after, laughter. Path, pas, past, and with a in every case. (2) a or 6. Daunt, haunt, haunch, launch, gauntlet, laundress. Dont, hont, hanch, lanch, gantlit, landris. (3) 6 or o. Often, costing, soften, malt, salt, falter, paltry. Ofn' 5 kosting, sofn', molt, solt, foltar, poltri. (4) aa or a. Parse, arms, carves. (Cp. pass, alms, calves, and for the diphthong aa, see § 114.) Paz, amz, kayz. §§ 146-148.] Variable Words. 85 (5) 6a or 6. Lord, sort, stork. (Cp. laud, sought, stalk.) L6d, sot, stok. (6) owa, 6a or 6. Wore, pour, worn, poured, boarder. Woar, poar, won, pod, bodar. See §§ 111-114. (7) yu or u. Lute, lucent, luminous, salute. Lyiit, lyusant, lyuminas, salyut. § 146. Unaccented Yowel Sounds. (8) 6 or o. Austerity, auxiliary, already. Osteriti, ogzilyari, dlredi. (9) i or a. Satirize, heresy. Ssetoraiz, herisi. (10) ai or i. Civilization, authorization, equalization. Siyila^zeyshan, otharaizeyshan, ikwalaizeyshan. § 147. Consonants. (11) ty or ch. Nature, fortune, question, furniture, for- feiture, investiture, fustian, celestial. Neyc/tar, foc/ian, kwesc/ian, foenic/tar, fofic/tar, investi- c/^ar, foes fa/an, silesfo/al. (12) dy or j. Cordial, guardian, educate. Kotfo/al, ga%an, e^ukeyt. (13) sy or sh. Issue, sensual. Isyxi, sens/^wal. (14) zy or zh. Casual, visual. Ksez/w/wal, Yizywal. (15) ch or sh. Bench, milch, venture. Bench, milsh, venc/tar. (16) j or zh. Fringe, bulge. Friny, boelj. § 148. We come next to the second class of variable words, namely, those which vary in the speech of the same person, (1) according to their connexion in the sentence, or (2) on different occasions, i.e., as he may be (a) speaking rapidly and familiarly, or (b) speaking slowly and distinctly in addressing a large num- ber of people, or (c) singing. The pronunciation of singers will 86 English Synthesis. §§ 149, 150. not be discussed here, but the words which vary in speaking are so numerous and occur so frequently that they require to be considered in detail. Nearly all these variable words may be arranged in four groups, thus : — (1) Words ending in r. (2) Weak words, i.e., those which may occupy a subordinate place in the sentence and so have no accent. (3) Words where the weak syllables vary. (4) Words which may have a syllable more or less. A few words such as again (ageyn, agen) do not fall under any of the preceding groups. § 149. Words ending in r. We have already seen that all words ending in r have two forms, the r not being heard unless a vowel follows in the next word, and that in words which have the diphthongs ea and oa the a sometimes disappears, §§ 45-59, 68. § 150. Weak Words. A variation in one of these weak words, namely, an, is recognised in our ordinary spelling, for we write a or an according as a consonant or a vowel follows in the next word; but the variations which we do not thus indicate are very numerous indeed. For where words occupy a subordinate place in a sentence and consequently have no accent, clear vowels generally become obscure, or they disappear altogether, and consonants are very often dropped. And, as a rule, this is not due to slovenly speaking, but is a necessity of the case. To pronounce such words always in their emphatic forms would be very strange and unnatural, and quite contrary to the genius of our language. In fact no Englishman could do it, however carefully he might aim at correctness and precision in his speech. For example, the word and has four forms, used by every- body, and all recognised in the Oxford Dictionary. When we make a pause after it, we pronounce it (1) send, to rhyme with hand (foaend), but the two forms most frequently used are (2) § 150.] Variable Words. 87 and, like and in husband (hoezband), (3) an, like an in organ (ogan) ; as in pen and ink (and), go and see (an), whilst in some familiar phrases, as in bread and butter, it is invariably weakened to (4) n\ The d need not disappear before every consonant, but only before those with which it could not combine at the beginning of a word. We can use the form and in strong and well, cp. dwell, cold and raw, cp. draio, and so on, but in familiar speech no one adheres to this rule, and even in public reading and speaking one may often hear the d dropped before a vowel. And again, the has two forms, recognised by singers, though not distinguished in ordinary spelling. Before a vowel it is dhi, and before a consonant dha. We say dhi sepP, dhi orinj, dha melan, dha pear. The following list, based upon, but not quite identical with, the list in Dr. Sweet's Elementarbuch, contains nearly all those words which have weak forms. The emphatic forms of a, an, the (ey, sen, dhi), are never heard unless we purposely isolate them, as these words always occupy a subordinate place and are closely connected with the noun which follows. Emphatic. Weak. Emphatic. Weak. a or an ey, sen a, an from from fram am 83m am, m had haed had, ad, d and eend and, an, n' has haez naz, az, z are ar, a ar, a have haeY hav, a¥, y as 88Z az, z he hi hi, i, i at set at her hoer har, ar, a be bi bi him him im been bin bin his hiz iz can keen kan, kn' is iz z, s could kud kad madam msedam, mam, m' do du du, da, d meam does d03Z daz me mi mi for for, to for, far, fa must moest mast, mas (rarely f< >a) my mai mai, mi 88 English Synthesis. [§§ 151, 152. Emphatic. Weak. Emphatic. Weak. of OY av them dhem dham, or or, o or, ar, a dhni' (rarely 6a) through thru thru nor nor, no nor, nar, till til tl (rarely noa) na to tu tu, ta not not n't us 03S as, s saint seynt sint, sin, sn zoas woz waz shall sheal shal, shl' we wi wi she shi shi, sh ivere woer, woe war, wa should shud shad, shd (rarely wer, sir soer, soe sar, sa wea) some seem sam who hu hu such seech sach will wil wl, al, 1 than dhsen dhan would wud wad, ad, d that dhset dhat, dht you yu yu, ya the dhi dhi, dha your yor, yd yar, ya, their \ there) dhea, dher dhar, dha (rarely yuar, yua, yoa yor ) § 151. Words where the Weak Syllables vary. The principal variations which take place in weak syllables are these : — (1) The vowels se, 0, 0', oe, 6 are liable to be reduced to a. (2) e is reduced to i, and ey becomes e or i. (3) a before n or 1, and u before 1, disappear, and the n or 1 becomes syllabic, so that the syllable is not lost. 8 152. Yowels reduced to a. Exx. : — se ascend aasend or asend assent aesent „ asent admit sedmit ,, admit abstain sebsteyn ,, absteyn confirm konfoem ,, kanfoem confound konfaund „ kanfaund 153-155.] Variable Words. 89 oe polite provision perform surprise eastern withered forgive forget po'lait pro'Yizhan poefd'm soepraiz istoen widhoed fogiY fdget or § 153. Yowels reduced to i or e. or ey excess except essential kindness countless separate (adj.) violet yesterday holiday candidate advocate always ekses eksept esenshal kaindnes kauntles separet vaialet yestadey holidey ksendideyt aedYo'keyt olweyz § 154. Syllabic n or 1. Exx. an al ul pardon fallen marshal practical useful playful beautiful wonderfully padan folan mashal prsektikal yusful pleyful byutiful woendafuli or palait praYizhan pafom sapraiz istan widhad fagiY faget Exx. : — ikses iksept isenshal kaindnis kauntlis separit Yaialit yestadi holidi kssndidet or ksendidit sedYo'ket ,, sedYo^it olwez „ olwiz padn' fdln' mashP prsektikP yusfl' pleyfl' byutifT woendafl'i § 155. In most of these words, and in others which resemble them, the clear pronunciation of the unaccented vowels is very rare, and is hardly ever heard except in slow public reading or 90 English Synthesis. [§ 156. speaking. The doubtful vowels in initial syllables are scarcely ever pronounced clearly except when the words in which they occur stand at the beginning of a sentence, after a pause. As regards the exx. of e, it should be remembered that unaccented i is often intermediate between e and i, and the attempt to pronounce e in unaccented syllables generally results in this intermediate sound, clear unaccented e, as in insect, being very rare. It is noticeable that when we compare dissyllables whose first syllable is unaccented and variable with corresponding forms having more than two syllables, we generally find that, in these longer forms, the vowel of the first syllable is always obscure. We sometimes, though very rarely, pronounce esdmit, konfoem, poefom, foget, ekses, but we always say admishan, kanfoeming, pafomans, iksesiy, fagetful, and so on. § 156. Y/ords which may have a Syllable more or less. It is surprising how numerous these words are. In estimating the number of syllables in a word, the spelling rather than the sound is generally taken for a guide, but in speaking the real number of syllables is often more or less than the conventional reckoning. It frequently depends on the position of the word or the rhythm of the sentence. In poetry we find a few of these variations indicated by the spelling, e.g., 't and 's for it and is, when they are not to be pronounced as separate syllables, and ev'n, falln', know'st, seest, for even, fallen, hnowest, seest. In writing verse, some confusion arises from the artificial reckoning of syllables according to spelling rather than accord- ing to sound. For instance, hour and fire have as much claim to be called dissyllables as power and higher, and it is quite according to rule to make hour rhyme with power, and fire with higher, and so on. But when such words are not at the end of a line, a distinction is made between them, and hour and fire are invariably treated as monosyllables. So too chasm may not § 157.] Variable Words. 91 be reckoned as two syllables, though it is really pronounced so, just as distinctly as heaven. § 157. Variable words having a syllable more or less may be classed as follows : — (1) Weak words, which may be reduced to consonants and cease to be syllables. See above, §§ 150, 151. (2) Words ending in iar, uar, aiar, auar or yuar, as : — hire sere seer } poor brewer siar puar bruar lhaiar higher) dyer~\ dire ) daiar \a Iflanar flower) pure pyuar newer nyuar The rule for these is that they are pronounced as two syllables, unless they happen to be followed by a vowel in the next word, causing the r to be trilled; in which case the a often ceases to be a syllable, and is reduced to a mere vowel- glide. In the hour of trial, the power of steam, hour and power can be pronounced as monosyllables, but in this very hour, power to resist, or in the plural forms hours, powers, they must be pronounced as dissyllables. (3) Words in which n', 1' or ar is followed by an unaccented vowel, such as : — n 7 ar lessening prisoner traveller memory loandering reverence lesn'ing or lesning prizn'ar ,, priznar trsevl'ar memari wondaring revarans trsevlar memri wondring reyrans It will be seen by these examples that n' may be reduced to n, P to 1 and ar to r. This uncertainty as to the use of ar or r gives rise to the common mistakes laibarari, Henari, cembarela, for laibrari, Henri, cemforela. (4) Words where in like manner i, u, o' or yu is followed 92 English Synthesis. [§ 158. by an unaccented vowel, and may be reduced thus : — i to y, u to w, o' to w, and yu to yw. Exx. : — u 0' yu suppliant glorious period lovelier influence following individual tempestuous casuistry scepliant glorias piariad lcBYliar influans folo'ing individyual tempestyuas ksezyuistri or soaplyant „ gloryas „ piaryad „ loeylyar „ inflwans „ folwing ,, individywal „ tempestywas „ kaezywistri It must, however, be acknowledged, as regards this last class of words, that some readers of poetry would retain the full number of syllables in spite of the metre. It is an open question whether we are to consider that a syllable is elided, or that the poet has chosen to vary his metre by occasionally introducing a superfluous syllable. It is unquestionable that the best poets do at times deliberately introduce extra syllables, so the reader is free to follow his own taste in this matter. We often find in poetry that words, ending in syllabic n' are written thus : — giv'n, ev'n ; and the is written th' as if to indicate that a syllable is to be elided. But in prose we should never drop these syllables, nor does it seem possible to do so in poetry, except in those instances where n' happens to be followed by a vowel in the next word, where we could reduce it to n. Spelling of Variable Words. § 158. The rules followed in this work as to the spelling of variable words are these : — (1) Words variously pronounced by different people are spelt in accordance with my own pronunciation. (2) Words pronounced differently by the same persons under different circumstances have a fixed spelling. (a) Words ending in r have the r always written. (6) Weak words are written in their emphatic forms. (c) Words in which the weak syllables vary, or where there § 159.] Spelling of Variable Words. 93 may be a syllable more or less, are written to represent the colloquial usage of a careful speaker. (3) In the selections of poetry, the rule of having a fixed spelling for variable words has been set aside where it was requisite to do so, in order to indicate the number of syllables required by the rhythm. In these cases, and in a few instances when the pronuncia- tion seems doubtful, alternative forms are given at the foot of the page. § 159. Exceptions to the above rules : — (1) Words beginning with wh and those ending with oar are not spelt as I usually pronounce them. My pronunciation of such words is variable, and I seldom pronounce wh and oar, generally substituting w and or, so that when is = wen and oar is = or, except where the words containing them are specially emphasised. But the forms in wh and oar have been used throughout. (2) The following words are written in their weak forms : — a is wrn bten a an ,, an and „ and the ,, dhi or dha that (rel. or conj.) ,, dhat to (unstressed) ,, tu The demonstrative that is written dhaet. It is convenient to be able to distinguish dhat and dhaet in such sentences as I believe that that (dhat dhaet) is true. And to, when stressed, as in to and fro, is written tu, like the words too and two. These spellings should also be noted : — or is wntte m or oar, ore are wntt< 3n oar nor „ nor the Nore „ Noar for for four, fore „ foar your „ yor yore yoar 94 English Synthesis. [§ 159. The longer forms of or, nor and for (6a, noa, foa) are occasionally heard when speakers pause upon these words, but this is quite exceptional, as for seldom, and or and nor never, are found at the end of a sentence. These long forms never occur in my own pronunciation. V. LOAN WOKDS USED IN ENGLISH. § 160. The right pronunciation of loan words from French and other languages is a very perplexing question. Many of them are pronounced in various ways, and it is by no means easy to decide what pronunciation should be recommended, and whether those who are able to pronounce the language from which they are borrowed should use a foreign or an anglicized pronunciation. On the whole, it seems best to anglicize them, as far as custom will permit, for many foreign words, especially French ones, require a great effort to pronounce them in the foreign fashion when they occur in the middle of an English sentence, even on the part of those who know them well, and they must be miserably mispronounced by the average English- man. Moreover the French pronunciation of a French word, in such a position, far from being appreciated by Frenchmen, is particularly offensive to them. There are, however, a few foreign sounds which all should try to learn, and which can be very easily acquired in child- hood. For instance, the use of English ong as in song, in the Fr. bonbon, bdton, etc., is not tolerated amongst well educated people, who are expected to know the French nasal vowel on. Special Symbols Required. § 161. The minimum number of foreign sounds for which fresh symbols are required seems to be nine, as follows : — (95) 96 Loan Words used in English. [§ 161. Fr. Germ. Fr. Germ, a as in pktte Mknn aw as in £>an x as in acn 6 ,, £>eu schon sen ,, pm c „ iCB. ii ,, pu Kijhn on ,, poxt caw ,, un a serves for two sounds which are not identical, short Fr. a in pktte, and short German a in Mknn. a, is used to represent (1) the Fr. a in pAte, (2) the long Fr. a in menkge, and (3) the long Germ, a in Ikrnn. a is used for the short vowels (1) e in Fr. Ze, and (2) e in Germ. Gab&. oe represents French eu in £>Eur. ny is used for French n in viGxette. Generally speaking, the length of the Fr. vowel in not indi- cated. When we have in English pairs of narrow and wide vowels, such as those in gate, get (ey, e), feet, fit (i, i), fool, full (u, u), the symbol for the long narrow vowel is more suitable for the corresponding short narrow vowel in French than the symbols e, i, u would be, because these would mis- lead the English people by suggesting that the vowels ought to be wide, and more open than they really are. So ey, i and u are used for the vowels in EfcEJ, fins, tout. Many English people fail to pronounce the French nasal vowel aw, and use on instead, as in encore, carte blanche, pro- nounced by them owkor, kartblowsh. It is not necessary to provide symbols for the German glottal stop, nor for the French voiceless liquids. In the following list, final r is put in brackets in words which are thoroughly anglicized, to show that it is silent unless a vowel follows in the next word. When r is not bracketed, it should be trilled, though it requires some effort to do so when it is final, or followed by a consonant, as in abattoir, abatwar apercu, apersii belles lettres, bel letr arpeggio, arpejyo' § 162.] The Most Necessary Foreign Sounds. 97 The Most Necessaey Fokeign Sounds. § 162. Hints for Learning the Most Necessary Foreign Sounds. The formation of the sounds represented by these nine symbols is explained in the French and German sections of this book. But as it is a considerable undertaking to learn all these foreign sounds, it may be worth while to note that some occur much more frequently, and are much more necessary than others. There are only three foreign sounds which occur very frequently, namely a, aw, and on, and one tolerably often, namely u, making four in all. And, as already observed, most English people pronounce aw and on alike, making them both equal on. This seems the more excusable, as I am informed, on the authority of M. Passy, that young children in Paris are doing the same, and it seems likely that the next generation of Parisians will drop aw altogether. This leaves then practically a minimum of three foreign sounds to be learnt — a, on and ii. • Concerning a I may observe that, although we have many more French than German loan words, the German a in Mann is decidedly easier than the French a in patte, which is inter- mediate between the English sounds in father and man, and this German sound also serves to represent a in Italian much better than the French patte vowel. So it is best for those who cannot hope to master both vowels to content themselves with the German short a. It is not at all difficult to acquire this sound. All that is necessary is to shorten the vowel in father. It is a curious fact that this short German a may be heard in two genuine English words in the mouths of children in the middle and lower classes, namely in Mamma and Papa, where they introduce it into both syllables, wrongly accenting the first of them. They ought to pronounce Mama, Papa, but they actually do pronounce Mama, Papa. The three most necessary foreign sounds are explained further on in this volume as follows : — a, Fr. pktte, § 204 ; Germ. Mknn, § 251 ; on, Fr. on, % 215 ; ii, Fr. pv, §§ 213 f. 7 98 Loan Words used in English. [§ 163. For the remaining foreign sounds the references are : — 6, Fr. £>eu, §§ 213 f. ; an, Fr. _pAN ; sen, Fr. pm ; and oen, Fr. un, § 215 ; x, Germ. acH, and c, Germ. icH, §§ 242 f. § 163. List of abandon, aba/ndon. abatis, aba'ti. abattoir, aba'twar. abbe, abey. ab initio, seb inishio'. accelerando, sekselirse'ndo'. acciacatura, achakatu'ra. accolade, seko'leyd, ako'la'd. accoucheur, akushoer. accoucheuse, akushoez. adagio, adajyo'. ad hominem, sed hominem. adieu, adyu. ad infinitum, sed infinaitam. ad interim, sed intarim. ad libitum, sed libitam. ad nauseam, sed nosissm. ad valorem, sed Yalorem. cegis, ijis. cegrotat, igrowtset. JEneid, Ini'id, 1'niid. a fortiori, ey foshio'rai. agape, segapi. agio, sejio', eyjio'. Agnus Dei, segnas diai, agnus deyi. aide-de-camp, eydakan. aiguille, eygwil. Loan Wokds. a la carte, a la kart. a la mode, selamowd, ala- mowd. alcalde, alka'ldey. alfresco, alfresko'. alga, pi. alga, selga, selji. alguazil, selgwazil. alibi, selibai. allegretto, aleygreto'. allegro, aleygro'. al segno, al seynyo'. alto, alto', selto'. alto-rilievo, alto' or selto' rilivo'. amateur, sematyu'a(r), some- times amatoer, sematoer or sematyua(r). Ameer, amia(r). amende honorable, ama'nd on- ora'bl. amour, amua(r). amour-propre, amur propr. amphora, semfara. anabasis, ansebasis. anacoluthon, senako'lyu'than. ancien regime, ansysen rey- zhim. andante, anda'ntey, sendse'nti. a, pktte, Mhnn, 6, £>eu, schon. ii, pv, Jcumi. an, £>an. 163.] List of Loan Words. 99 anglice, senglisi. Anno Domini, seno' Dominai. ante meridiem, senti miridyem. a outrance, a utra^s. aperqu, ape'rsii. aphasia, afeyzya. Aphrodite, iEfro'daiti. a piacere, a piache'rey. aplomb, aplo'^. aposiopesis, aepo'saio'pi'sis. a posteriori, ey postiario'rai, -ri. applique, apli'key. appogiatura, apojatii'ra. appui, apwi. a priori, ey praio'rai. apropos, apropow. arc-boutant, arbu'taw. Areopagus, iEriopagas. arete, are't. argot, argo'. Aries, Eriiz. armada, am^yda. arpeggio, arpejyo'. arras, geras. arriere-pens&e, arye'r pawsey. arrondissement, aro'wiisma/ft. artiste, artist. asafcetida, sBsafetida. Ate, eyti. atelier, atelyey. atoll, atol, setol. attache, atashey auberge, owberzh. au courant, ow kuraw. aufait, ow fey. aujond, ow ton. au naturel, ow natiirel. au revoir, ow ravwar. auto-da-fs, oto'dafey. avalanche, sevalansh. av ant- courier , ava'nt or avae'n- kuri'a(r). ave, eyvi. ayah, aya. Baal, Beyal. baboo, babu. Bacchas, Bsskas. bacillus, basilas. bacterium, foaektiari'am. badinage, badinazh, bsedinej. bagatelle, bsegatel. bakshish, bsekshish. ballade, balad. ballet, baley. bambino, bambino'. banquette, basket. bardge, bareyzh. bas bleu, ba, bio. bashi-bazouh, bseshibazu'k. basso-rilievo, baso-rili'Yo'. basta, basta. Bastille, Basti'l. bateau, bato'. baton, bato%, b set an. battue, batii. &n, pm. on, poM. otn, un. x, z. bonhomie, bonomi. bon mot, obn mow, pi. mowz. bonne, bon. bonne bouche, bon bush. bon-ton, bon ton. bon vivant, obn yiyeU. bon voyage, obn Ywaya'zh, bo^ Yoia'zh. Bootes, Bo'owtiz. boudoir, budwar. bougie, buzhi. boulevard, bulYar. bo u leversement, bulYer sma?; , bulYoesmant. bouquet, bnkey. bourgeois, burzhwa (but when meaning a size of printing type, pronounced boejois). bourgeoisie, burzhwazi. Bourse, Burs, Buas. bouts-rimes, bu rimey. bravura, braYU ra. bric-a-brac, brikabraek. brochure, broshtir. Brumaire, Brumer. brunette, brunet, brunet. brusque, briisk. brusquely, bruskli. brusqueness, brtisknis. brusquerie, bruskari. a, pxtte, Mawi. 6, i?Eu, schon. ti, pv, kvwi. an, jjas. § 163.] List of Loan Words. 101 buffet, biifey, a refreshment bar. buffet, bcefit, a sideboard or a cupboard. bureau, byuaro', byurow, and when an office is meant, sometimes biirow. caballero, kabalye'ro'. cabaret, kabarey. cabbala, kaebala. cabriolet, kabrio'ley. cache, kash. cachet, kashey. cachucha, kachucha. cacique, kasik. cacoethes, kseko'i'thiz. cadenza, kadentsa. cadi, kadi, keydi. cadre, kadr. cafe, kafey. caftan, kafta'n, kseftan. caisson, keysan. camera obscura, kaemera ob- skyu'ara. camaraderie, kamara/dari. Campagna (the), Kampa'nya. campanile, kampaniley. Canaan, Keynan. canaille, kana'y. canard, kanar, kanad. canon, ksenyan. cantabile, kanta'biley. cantata, kanta'ta. canlatrice, kantatri'chey. cap-a-pie, kaepapi'. capriccio, kapricho'. capriccioso, kaprichowzo'. carafe, karaf. carbonari, karbo'na'ri. carillon, karilyon. carmagnole, karmanyol. carte-blanche, kart blawsh. carte-de-visit, kart da Yizi't. caryatid, pi. -ides, kaerise'tid, -idiz. casino, kasino'. catalogue raisonne, katalog reyzoney. catena, katina. cathedra, kathidra, kae'thidra cause celebre, kowz seleybr. causeuse, kowzoez. cavass, kayses. cavatina, kavati'na, kseva- ti'na. centime, sawti'm. cerise, seri'z. chaise-longue, sheyz long. chalet, shaley. chamois, shamwa; when lea- ther is meant, shsemi. chaperon, shaeparown, -on. char-a-banc, sharabaw. charge d'affaires, sharzhey dafe'r. charivari, shariYa'ri. sew, £>in. on, post, oen, un. x, acH. c, ^ch. 102 Loan Words used in English. [§ 163. chasse, shasey. chasseur, shasoer. chdteau, shato'. chatelaine, shataleyn. chef, shef. chef d'ozuvre, sheydoevr. chemise, shimi'z. chemisette, shemizet. chenille, shini'l. cheval-glass, shaYal glas. chevaux de /rise, shevo' da friz. chevrette, sheyret. chiaroscuro, kyaro'sku'ro*. chiffon, shifo^. chiffonier, shifani'a(r). chignon, shinyow. cicala, sika'la. cicerone, chicheyrowney, sisa- rowni. cicisbeism, chichisbi'izm'. cicisbeo, chichisbeyo'. ci-devant, sidayaw. cinquecento, chingkwichento' . clairvoyance, klerYwa'yaws, kleavoians. claque, klak. claqueur, klaeka(r). clientele, kliaratel, klaiantel. cloture, klowtiir. cobra de capello, kowbra da kapelo'. cognac, konyaek. cognoscenti, kono'shenti. collaborateur, kola'bo'ratoer, or spelt collaborator, kalae'- bareyta(r). colporteur, kolportoer. comme il faut, kom i fow. commode, kamowd. communique, komii'nikey. complaisant, kompleza'nt. compte rendu, kowt randii. con amore, kon amo'rey. concierge, kowsyerzh. concordat, kankodset. condottieri, kondotye'ri. confrere, kowfrer. conge d'elire, kowzhey d eyli'r. connoisseur, koneysoer. contre-temps, kowtrataw. conversazione, konYasaetsiow- ni. coquette, koket. cordon, kordow. corps diplomatique, kor di- plowma'tik. corsage, korsazh. corUge, korteyzh. corvee, kdrvey. costumier, kostyu'mya(r). coterie, kowtari. cotillon, ko'tilyan. couchant, kauchant. couleur de rose, kuloer da rowz. a, |JA^e, Mknn. 6, £>eu, schon. ii, pv, kvmi. §Ln, £>an. § 163.] List of Loan Words. 103 coup de grace, ku da gras. coup de main, ku da msew. coup de soleil, ku da soley. coup d'etat, ku d eyta'. coup d'ceil, ku d oey. coupe, kupey. coupon, kupow. cofUe que cotlte, kut ka kut. crayon, kreyan. creche, kreysh. crescendo, kreshendo'. cretin, kritin. crevasse, kriYse's. crochet, krowshey. croquet, krowkey. cui bono, kai bowno'. cuisine, kwizi'n. cuisse, kwis. cul-de-sac, kill da sak. Culturkampf, kulturkampf. cure, kiirey. Czar, Za(r). Czarina, Zari'na. Czarewitch, -owitz, Zaravich, -Yits. Czech, Ghek. dais, deyis. danseuse, dawsoez. Dauphin, dofin. debonair, debane'a(r). debris, debri. debut, deybii. debutant, -ante, debiitaw, -awt. dejeuner a la fourchette, dey- zhoeney a la furshet. dementi, deyma'wti. denotement, deynu'maw. de novo, da iiowyo'. depot, depo'. de rigueur, da rigoer. deshabille, desabil. detour, detua(r). de trop, da trow. devoir, deYwar. dies non, daiiz non. Lieu et mon droit, Dyd ey mow drwa. dilettante, dilitsa'nti. distrait, distrey. divan, diYse'n. Dives, DaiYiz. doctrinaire, doktrine'a(r). dolce far niente, dolchey far nientey. donna, dona. douane, dua'n. double entendre, dubl' aw- ta'ndr. douceur, dusoer. eau de Cologne, ow da Ka- lown. eau-de-vie, ow da yi. ecarte, eyka'rtey. e'claircissement, eykle'rsismaw. 6clat, eykla'. edelweiss, eydalYais. sew, £>in. on, pont. oew, un. x, acn. c, icn. 104 Loan Words used in English. [§ 163. edition de luxe, eydi'syo^ da liiks. Effendi, Efendi. Eiffel, aifl\ Eisteddfodd, aistefod. elan, eylk'?i. elite, eyli't. eloge, eylowzh. embarras de richesse, amba'ra da rishes. embonpoint, a^bo^pwae??. embouchure, a^bu'shiir. emeute, eymoet, imyu't. employe, a?£plwa'yey, em- ploiey. empressement, a^presma?i. en bloc, kn blok. enccenia, ensi'nya. enceinte, ansse'?zt. encore, gUko'r. en famille, kn fami'l. enfant perdu, knikn perdu. enfant terrible, knikn teribl. en masse, kn mas. ennui, awnwi'. en regie, kn reygl. en route, kn rut. ensemble, awsa'nbl. entende cordiale, kntknt kord- yal. entourage, kntu'rkzh. en tout cas, kn tu ka. entree, a?itrey. entremets, a?ztramey. entre nous, a^tra nu. envelope, anvilowp, envilowp. epergne, epoen. esclandre, esklandr. escritoire, eskritwar. espieglerie, espyeyglari. espionage, espyonazh. esprit de corps, espri da kor. etablissement, eyta'blisma^. etagere, etazhe'r. etiquette, etiket. exigeant, -te, egzizha'«, -k'nt. \ ex-officio, eks ofishyo'. I ex parte, eks pati. | expose, ekspo'zey. extempore, ekstempari. facade, fasa'd. facile princeps, fsesili prin- seps. facon de parler, faso?* da parley. faience, faians. faineant, feyneysU. fait accompli, feyt ako'^pli. fakir, faekia(r). fantasia, faenteyzha. fantoccini, feento'chi'ni. farceur, farsoer. faubourg, fowbur. faute de mieux, fowt da myo. fauteuil, fowtoel. faux pas, fow pa. a, p\tte, M&nn. o, _^eu, schon. ii, pv, k\jun. kn, _^an. 163.] List of Loan Words. 105 felo de se, felo' di si. femme de chambre, fam shanbr. fete, feyt. feu de joie, fo da zhwa. fiacre, fiakr. -fiance, -ee, f iansey. fiasco, fia'sko*. jfo/m, f ishti. finale, fina'li. -finesse, fines. jfrm, firn. flambeau, flaembo'. flamboyant, flaamboiyant. fleche, fleysh. fleur de lis, floer da li. forte, fortey. fortissimo, forti'simo'. fracas, fraka. franc, frasngk. Frau, Frau. Fraulein, Froilain. gala, gala. gargon, garson. gasconade, gaeskaneyd. gauche, gowsh. gaucherie, gowshari. Gemini, Jeminai. gendarme, zhawda'rm. genre, zhanr. giaour, jaua(r). glace, glasey. glacier, glassy a(r). da glacis, glasi. glissade, glisa'd. goitre, goita(r). gramme, gram, graem. grande vitesse, grand Yites. groschen, groshan. guillotine, gilyo'ti'n. guipure, gipu'r. habitue, abi'twey. harem, herem. hauteur, howtoer. haut ton, how ton. Hebe, Hibi. Kerr, Her. hiatus, haieytas. Hinterland, Hintarlant. honi soit qui mat y pense, honi swa ki mal i pans. hors de combat, ho da komba. hotel de ville, owtel da vil. Huguenots, Hyuganots. hyperbole, haipoebali. ich dien, ic din. imbroglio, imbrowlyo'. impasse, ae/ipas. impromptu, impromptyu. incognito, inkognito'. insouciance, aensu'sians. jager, yeygar. jalousie, zhaluzi. jardiniere, zhardinyer. je ne sais quoi, zha na sey kwa. een, pm. on, post, oen, un. x, o.ch. c, *ch. 106 Loan Words used in English. [§ 163. jet d'eau, zhey d ow. jeu d' esprit, zho d espri'. journal, zhurnal. jujube, zhuzhub. Kaiser, Kaiza(r). khan, kan. Khedive, Keydi'Y. kindergarten, kindagatn'. kiosk, kiosk. kirschwasser, kirshvasar. kraal, kral. kreutzer, kroitsar. kyrie, kirii. Koran, Kora'n, Korse'n, Ko- ran. laissez faire, lesey fer. Lama, Lama. landsturm, landshturm. landwehr, landYer. Laocoon, Leyoko'on. lapis lazuli, leypis lsezyulai. lapsus lingua, laepsas linggwi. lares, leriz. Lateran, Lsetaran. latrine, latrin. lazzaroni, latsarowni. legerdemain, lejadameyn. levee, leYi. lingua franca, linggwa fraeng- ka. liqueur, likoer. UtUrateur, liteyratoer. litre, lita(r). locale, lo'kal. locum tenens, lowkam tinenz. Louvre {the), Luyr. louvre (a), luYa(r). Madame, Madam. Mademoiselle, Madmwazel. Madonna, Madona. Magna Gharta, Maegna Kata. maison de sante, meyzow da santey. maitre d'hotel, meytr d owtel. mal a propos, mal a propow. marguerite, margari't. marionette, maeri'anet. mark (Germ, coin), mak. Marseillaise, Maselyeyz. massage, masazh. maUriel, materiel. matinee musicale, matiney miizikal. mauvaise honte, moveyz ont. mediocre, medio wka(r). meerschaum, miasham. melee, meyley. menage, menazh. menagerie, mena'zhari. menu, menii, menyu. mesalliance, meyzalians. messieurs, meshaz. metayer, meteyey. metempsychosis, metempsi- kowzis. mdtre, mita(r). a, pAtte, Mhnn. o, £>eu, sch'6n. u, pv, kvmi. aw, £>an. § 163.] List of Loan Words. 107 metronome, metronom. mirabile dictu, mireybili dik- tyu. mirage, miyra/zh. mitrailleuse, mitrayoez. modus vivendi, mowdas vai- vendai. moire, mwarey. Monseigneur, Monseynyoer. Monsieur, Miisyii. morceau, morsow. mot, mow. motif, mo'tif. muezzin, nmedzin. mufti, mcsfti. munshi, munshi. naive, naiv. naivete, naivtey. ne'e, ney. n&ve, neyvey. nirvana, noeva'na. nisi, naisai. noblesse oblige, nobles obli'zh. nom de plume, non da plum. nom de guerre, non da ger. nonchalant, nowshala'%. nonchalance, nowshala'ws. nonpareil, nonparel. nous, naus. nous verrons, nu YGvdn. nouveaux riches, nuYo' rish. nuance, niians. oasis, oweysis. obbligato, obliga'to'. octroi, oktrwa. oesophagus, isofagas. olla podrida, ola podri'da. on dit, on di. oubliette, ubliet. outre, utrey. pace, peysi. paillasse, paelyas. paletot, pselto'. panacea, paenasi'a. papier-macM, papyey mashey. par excellence, par ekselaws. parterre, parte'r, pate'a(r). parvenu, parYanii. Pasha, Pasha, Pasha. passe", pasey. passe-partout, pas-partii'. pastille, psestil. patois, patwa. penchant, pawshaw. pension, pawsyow. perdu, perdu. persiflage, persiflazh. persona grata, poesowna greyta. personnel, personel. petite, patit. petite culture, patit kiiltii'r. pfennig, pfenic. phthisis, thaisis. piano (subst.), pia/noSpise'no'. piano (adv.), pia'no*. een, pm. on, poxt. oew, un. x, acH. g, ion. 108 Loan Words used in English. [§ 163. pianoforte, pia'no'foti. piastre, piae'sta(r). piazza, pia'tsa, piae'tsa. piece de resistance, pyeys da reyzi'staws. pince-nez, paews ney. piquant, pikant. pique, pikey. pis oiler, piz aley. plebiscite, plebisit. Pleiades, Plaiadiz. poco cur ante, powko' kur- antey. poignard, ponyad, sometimes spelt poniard, point d'appui, puasw d apwi'. pongee, ponji. porte cochere, port koshe'r. portemonnaie, portmoney. portiere, portyer. poste restante, post restart. post meridiem, powst miri- dyem. pour encourager les autres, pur awkiirazhey leyz owtr. pour parler, pur parley. pour prendre conge, pur prawdr kowzhey. precis, preysi. prefet, prefey. prestige, presti'zh. preux chevalier, prii sheva- li'a(r). priedieu, pridyo. prima donna, prima dona. prima facie, praima feyshi. proces verbal, prosey verbal. promenade, promna'd. pronunciamento, pro'noen- shi'amento'. pro rata, prow reytey. programme, prowgraem. prote'ge, proteyzhey. pugaree, poegari. quantite nSgligeable, kawtitey neglizhabl. quartette, kwotet. quasi, kweysai. quatrefoil, kaetrafoil. queue, ko. qui vive, ki yiy. quondam, kwondaem. raconteur, rako'wtoer. ragout, ragu. raison d'etre, reyzow d eytr. Bajah, Raja. rallentando, ralenta'ndo'. ranche, ransh. rapprochement, raproshmaw. rationale, raeshaneyli. rechauffe, reshowfey. razzia, ratsya. recherche, reshe'rshey. reconnaissance, rikonisans. reconnoitre, rekanoita(r). refrain, rifreyn. a, pAtte, MA.nn. 6, £>eu, schon. ii, pu, kijmi. aw, £>an. § 163.] List of Loan Words. 109 regime, reyzhim. Reichsrath, Raicsrat. Reichstag, Raicstag. Renaissance, Rineysaws. rendezvous, rawdeyYu'. rentes, rawt. repertoire, repertwar. repousse, rapusey. requiem, rekwiem. restaurant, restoraw. resume, reyzu'mey. reveille", reveyey. reverie, reYari. riant, riaw. ricochet, riko'shey. role, rowl. rondeau, rowdo'. rondel, rondel. roturier, ro'turiey. roue, ruey. rouge, ruzh. rouge et noir, ruzh ey nwar. roulade, riilad. ruche, riish. ruse, riiz, ruz. sabot, sabo'. sachet, sashey. saga, seyga. sahib, saib. salaam, sal am. salon, salow. sangfroid, sawfrwa. sans-culottes, saw kulot. sans-fagon, saw fasow. sans-souci, saw susi'. Sassenach, Ssssinsek. sauerkraut, sauakraut. sauve qui peut, sowy ki po. savant, saYaw. savoir-faire, savwar fer. savoir-vivre, savwar Yivr. scrutin de liste, skriitsew da list. scherzo, skertso'. seance, seyaws. seigneur, seynyoer. seigneury, sinyari. serviette, sersyet. Sevres, SeyYr. sgraffito, greafito'. sheikh, shik. siesta, siesta. Signor, Sinyor. Signora, Sinyo'ra. Signorina, Sinyori'na. silhouette, siluet. sine qua non, saini kwey non. sobriquet, sobrikey. soi-disant, swa dizaw. soiree, swarey. solidaire, solidea(r). sortie, sorti. sotto voce, soto' Yowchey. sou, su. souvenir, suYanir. staccato, staka'to'. gew, _piN. on, poM. oew, un. x, acu. q, icn. 110 Loan Words used in English. [§ 163. suave, sua Y. sub judice, sceb judisi. suite, swit. surveillance, soeYeylyans. tableau vivant, tablo' yIyeiw. table d'hdte, tabl' d owt. tapis, tapi. tazza, tsetsa. technique, tekni'k. terra incognita, tera inkog- nita. tete-a-tete, teyt a teyt. thaler, taler. tic douloureux, tik dulurii'. timbre, tse^br. tirade, tireyd. toilette, twalet. tour de force, tur da fors. toumure, turntir. tout ensemble, tut awsa/wbl. train de luxe, tvmn da liiks. trait, trey. tremolo, tremo'lo. trio, trio'. trisagion, trisee'gion. troupe, trup. tulle, tiil. ta quoque, tyu kwowkwi. turquoise, tiirkwaz, toekoiz. uhlan, ulan. ukase, yukeys. Vallauris (ware), Yalari. Valenciennes, Yalansy6n. vaZetf, Yselit. -yaZe£ ^e chambre, Yaley da shawbr. valise, Yaliz. vaudeville, YOwdYil. vedette, Yidet. vertu, Yertii. verve, YerY. vignette, Yinyet. vinaigrette, Yineygret. violoncello, Yaialanchelo'. virtuoso, Yoetyuowzo'. vis a vis, yiz a yi. vise, Yizey. visaed, Yizeyd. vivandiere, YiYandye'r. vivat, YiYa'. viva voce, YaiYa Yowsi. volte face, Yolt fas. Walhalla, Yselhsela. Zeitgeist, tsaitgaist. zeitung, tsaitung. zenana, zina'na. zither, zithar. Zollverein, Tsolfarain. zouave, zua'Y. a, pAtte, Mknn. 6, pEu, schon. ti, pv, kijH.n. slu, p&N. &n, pm. on, poxt. oew, un. x, &ch. c, ion. VI. HINTS FOE TEACHEES. Method Eecommended. § 164. The subject of phonetics having as yet been very little taught in English schools, the outline of a method which has been found practically useful may not be unacceptable. The imitative faculties are so strong in early childhood that it is desirable to try to give young children a practical mastery of the sounds from the very beginning, before they can be expected to learn much as to the manner of their formation. They ought to have some drill in pronouncing the sounds of English and French in the Kindergarten. Experience shows that little children of six years of age are quite capable of ob- serving some of the most important distinctions in phonetics, e.g., between lip, point and back consonants, between stops and continuants, and between consonants which are voiced and un- voiced. But it is impossible to teach phonetics systematically without some phonetic notation ; and as, in secondary schools, most children come having already learnt the ordinary spelling at home, it seems difficult to attempt a course of lessons in phonetics before they are tolerably familiar with the ordinary spelling, say at about ten years of age. And meantime the teacher who is acquainted with the subject may do much in teaching them to pronounce clearly and well, and may lay a good foundation for the more systematic teaching which is to follow. In the following suggestions on the teaching of phonetics I (in) 112 Hints for Teachers. [§§ 165-167. assume then that the children are about ten years of age, but it is hoped that they may be useful for older pupils also, as it is not proposed to sketch out a course of lessons in detail, but only to give some broad outlines and general instructions which each teacher can adapt to his own class. § 165. The first and most important matter will be to teach the English sounds as thoroughly as possible, for when this is done, the formation and classification of French and German sounds will easily be understood. But as it may be taken for granted that the pupils already know a little French, at least as it appears in books, and in any case a few foreign sounds are wanted for the pronunciation of loan words from French and other languages, it will be desirable to teach a few of the most prominent sounds of French and German, in connexion with English phonetics, before beginning a systematic study of the sounds of these languages ; to do so will vary the lessons agree- ably and make them more interesting. § 166. The chief things we have to teach are these : — (1) English sounds and the ordinary alphabet do not corre- spond. (2) A phonetic English alphabet. (3) A few sounds from French and German. (4) The structure of the vocal organs. (5) Formation and classification of sounds. (6) To read English aloud from phonetic spelling. (7) To analyze English words into their component sounds. It will be convenient to discuss separately the teaching of each of these divisions of the subject, although instruction in several of them may be going on simultaneously. § 167. I. Sounds and Symbols do not Agree. First show that the sounds of English do not correspond with the twenty- six letters of our alphabet, and that — (1) For some sounds we must use digraphs, e.g., sh, th, ee, oo, as in SHe, ths, jdeeI, pool. (2) For some we have no symbols at all. We cannot dis- § 168.] Method Recommended. 113 tinguish the sounds in hut and put, Tms and Tmstle, sir and leisure. (3) We often use different symbols for the same sound, as in Kill, cat, queen, ecHo. § 168. II. The Phonetic Alphabet. It is best to learn this by degrees, taking a few new sounds in each lesson, and carrying on simultaneously the teaching as to formation and classification of letters, and the combination of the easier sounds in words. Point out the difference between the sounds and their names, showing that the names are generally distinct from the sounds. Be careful to have the names of ng and e well pronounced. See §§ 61, 82. When teaching the vowels and diphthongs, let the list of key-words be learnt first, and then the names of the sounds. The children should finish learning the alphabet before learn- ing the formation and classification of all the sounds, and it will be convenient to teach the names of the short vowels before attempting the long ones. The reasons for this are that (1) whole sentences can be constructed with short vowels only, and (2) that we use no new symbols for the vowels in pet, pit, pot, put. So it is a good plan to teach words having these four vowels as soon as the six stops and three nasals have been learnt. The first spelling lesson contains no sounds besides these, and it might be read in the second lesson of the course. The order suggested is as follows : — 1. Stops and Nasals with e, i, 0, u Spelling Lesson I. 2. Consonants as far as dh ,, II. 3. All the Consonants ,, III. 4. The Short Vowels 03, se „ IV. 5. The Short Unaccented Vowels a, i, o' „ V., VI. 6. The Long Vowels „ VII., VIII. 7. The Diphthongs „ IX., X. The diphthongs might be learnt after the reading lessons have been begun. 8 114 Hints for Teachers. [§§ 169-171. The teacher will find all the rarer sounds fully illustrated on p. xv. When the children have learnt to analyse ch, j, and the diphthongs into the sounds which compose them, they should, in repeating the alphabet, say : — ch = t+sh ai = a + i oi=6+i j = d + zh au = a + u yu = y + u § 169. III. The Most Necessary Sounds in French and German. These are the vowels in patte, pen, pu, the four nasal vowels, and the consonants in ach and ich. Diagram V., on p. xxvii., will be a help in teaching some of the new vowels. French sounds should also be compared with English when teaching the English diphthongs ia, iia in peer and p>oor. Compare these diphthongs with the sounds l and u as they occur both in English words without r and in French words with r following, thus : — peel peer Fr. pire pool poor Pr. pour Pronounced. pil pia(r) pir pul piia(r) pur § 170. IV. Structure of thej Yocal Organs. This cannot be explained much more simply than by referring to the diagrams on pp. xxvi., xxvii., and using the explanations in §§12-17. § 171. V. Formation and Classification of the Sounds. This must be taught in such a way as to lead the children to discover as much as possible by their own observation. Many details which have been mentioned in the previous chapters should be omitted, being intended for the teacher only, who will want to know much more than he is able to impart ; but the order in which the chief facts are there explained has been carefully arranged to assist students in passing from the more obvious distinctions to those which are less noticeable, and 171.] Method Eecommended. 115 more difficult to grasp, and this order might be followed in teaching children. It will certainly be found expedient in teaching to explain consonants before vowels, and the stops first of all. Again, amongst the stops, p and b, in which the action of the lips can so easily be seen, naturally come first. Then the distinction as to place, between lips, point of the tongue and back of the tongue, is easier to make out than that between voiced and unvoiced consonants, so it should be the first distinction noted. Two children of six have been found quite well able, in one lesson of a few minutes, to pronounce the name of ng, and to classify the stops and nasals as lip, point and back consonants, observing the difference for themselves. The difference between stops and continuants is also very easy to observe, and it might come next in order. Again, though we have observed that it is convenient to teach the names and sounds of the short vowels at a very early stage, we shall find, when the formation and classification of the vowels are to be taught, that it is easier to begin by studying the long vowels, and not those which are short and fleeting. It is a useful exercise to let the children write the conson- ants down the middle of a sheet of paper, gradually filling in the names which describe them, thus : — English Consonants. b Stops < CO •i— i t d k r 'NasaHn Ug Side 1 Trill r Breathy . Voiced/ ™ B V [Point. B V [Back. V Lips. V Point. V Back. Point. 116 Hints for Teachers. [| 172. Continuants ■{ rwh w f Y th dh s z sh zh y h B V B V B V B V B V V B Lips. Lip-teeth. Point-teeth. Point. Point-blade. Front. Throat. Composite I . __ , , ' The German consonants in ach and ich might be taught in connexion with the English continuants, the French vowels in patte, pen, pa, immediately after the classification of the five principal vowels, a, ey, i, ow, u, and the nasal vowels when all the long English vowels have been studied. § 172. VI. Reading aloud from Phonetic Spelling. This exercise is a very necessary one, and will afford an excellent opportunity for training the children to pronounce clearly and well. But it will be found necessary to recognise some differ- ences between the pronunciation represented in this book and that of the teacher, seeing that no two people pronounce exactly alike, and to tolerate some varieties of pronunciation among the children themselves. We cannot fix upon any standard pro- nunciation which will be universally accepted. There are several pronunciations of English tolerated amongst educated people, besides those which are condemned as vulgar. The teacher should study the varieties of pronunciation pointed out in §§ 144-157, as well as the common mistakes to be guarded against in §§ 177-179. Though it has been thought desirable to use fixed forms of spelling for the weak and variable words, it must be remem- § 173.] Method Becommended. 117 bered that this does not accurately show their pronunciation when combined in sentences, and the teacher must not encour- age an unnatural use of the emphatic forms. He should study the list of weak words in § 150, and make the children notice some of the weak forms in the course of the reading lessons. It would not be difficult to begin reading a narrative in the very first lesson, deciphering it by the help of an occasional reference to the phonetic alphabet ; but this course is not recommended. The children would not see what was aimed at, or why they should be troubled with an unaccustomed spelling, unless they had first received a little instruction in phonetics. Before they attempt to read a narrative they should (1) commit to memory all the consonants and vowels (the diph- thongs might be learnt afterwards) ; (2) learn some of the more obvious distinctions between different classes of sounds ; and (3) read some of the spelling lessons — at least the first five — learning to spell the words aloud. They might begin to read the first spelling lesson as early as the second lesson of the course. § 173. VII. Analysis of Words. This is a matter of no little difficulty, because in English we pronounce unaccented words and syllables so indistinctly, and some of the sounds are so short and fleeting that it is difficult to ascertain their real character. Moreover our minds are much confused by our irregular spelling, and it is as difficult to learn to trust the ear in phonetics as to trust the eye in drawing. Just as the beginner in drawing thinks he sees foreshortened lines and spaces nearly as large as those which face him, because he knows what their size really is, and imagines that a distant hill looks green when it really looks blue or purple, because he knows if it were near he would see it to be covered with green grass and trees, so that he cannot, without long training, learn to trust his sight and draw things as they appear ; so beginners in phonetics, thinking they know words to be pronounced 118 Hints for Teachers. [§ 174. according to the spelling, seem unable to trust their ears and to write down what they hear. And even after some training, we are still liable, when we repeat words to see how we pro- nounce them, to depart from the pronunciation which we use when we are speaking unconsciously. For instance, Dr. Ellis tells of an old lady who stoutly as- serted that she always pronounced lecture as lektyuar, and the very next minute unawares said lekchar, with the same ending as teacher, just like other people. Dr. Sweet too observes that few people realise that they pronounce farther and save her exactly like father and savour. It is a good experiment, if we can find a friend upon whom we may venture to try such ex- periments without endangering our friendship, to ask some one who says this year, changing the s into sh, or adds r to idea in the idea of it, whether he ever pronounces in this fashion, for the reply will undoubtedly be an indignant denial, although most cultivated men and a large proportion of cultivated women pronounce in this manner, and we shall probably soon catch him in the very act he so vehemently repudiated. As therefore the analysis of words is difficult, and that of sentences far more so, it will be sufficient to ask children to analyse single words. For this purpose they should have much practice in — (1) Spelling aloud words pronounced by the teacher. (2) Spelling aloud words seen in phonetic spelling. (3) Writing phonetically from dictation ; and lastly, (4) Transcribing into phonetic spelling words and passages spelt in the ordinary way. This last is difficult, and should be reserved to the end of the course. A series of graduated exercises in it is given at II., pp. 69-77. For the Key, see I., §§ 180, 181. § 174. How to Spell Aloud. The only difficulties here are (1) Syllable division, and (2) How to name the short vowels. Eules for syllable division are given in § 140 ; but the teacher will not go far wrong if he follows these two simple § 175.] Method Becommended. 119 directions. (1) Aim at a natural division of syllables, according to sound and not according to spelling. Hour, fire, and chasm are dissyllables in reality, just like power, higher, and season, and should be divided accordingly. (2) When several con- sonants occur between two vowels they ma,y be divided at pleasure in the way which seems most natural. Short accented vowels, when isolated, are to be called oet, est, et, it, ot, ut, because it is difficult to pronounce them alone, but the introduction of the t sound would make a con- fusion in spelling, so the children should take them with the consonant which follows, not breaking up at all such mono- syllables as if, on, and dividing such words as bed, nod into two parts only, thus : — b, ed ; n, od. Short unaccented vowels require to be treated differently, except i in close syllables, that is in syllables ending with a consonant, i may be taken with the consonant following it in such words as in-tend, dis-tress ; but in open syllables, where no consonant follows in the same syllable, it must be pronounced alone, e.g., in ni-ses-i-ti, di-poz-i-ta-ri. The unaccented vowels a and o' are to be called by their names — a and short o'. Otherwise, if a were taken with a consonant following, the children would identify it with oe, making the an in organ (ogan) just like cen in hunter (hoentar), and if they tried to pronounce an isolated o', or o' with a con- sonant following, they would really pronounce ow, making o'z in folo'z like owz in flowz. The short open unaccented vowels u as in intu, influans, and ey as in essay (esey), survey (soevey), subst., are so rare, except when u occurs as part of the diphthong yu (see §§ 103, 105), that it is hardly worth while to make the children call them short u and short ey. It may suffice to call them ii and ey. § 175. Miscellaneous Exercises. The teacher will have no difficulty in inventing a variety of exercises to test the chil- dren's knowledge and cultivate their powers of observation. It will interest them, for instance, and be useful also, to give 120 Hints for Teachers. [§ 176. them a list of words in ordinary spelling illustrating the nine values of the letter a (§ 80), or the four values of the digraph ng (§ 66), and to ask them to write after each word the proper phonetic symbol for a or ng. But it would be a waste of time to attempt to show them all the intricacies of ordinary spelling, as exhibited in the exx. in §§ 19-59. § 176. How to Teach the Sounds of French and German. It is so easy to explain the sounds of French and German when once a good foundation of English phonetics has been laid, that the teacher will probably find no difficulty in simplifying the French and German sections of this book and adapting them to his class. The cultivation of the ear and the vocal organs to enable the children to distinguish and reproduce correctly the new sounds and combinations of sounds, will no doubt require a good deal of patience, but the work will be wonderfully facilitated by a sound elementary knowledge of phonetics, and what is learnt will be so clearly grasped that it will not easily be forgotten. The other important requirement is that, in the children's first course of lessons in a foreign language, some sort of pho- netic spelling should be used. The particular alphabets used in this work are commended to the teacher's notice as being pecu- liarly easy to read, to write, and to print ; but it is probable that some may prefer to use the international alphabet of the Maitre Phonetique, or the French alphabet of Franke's Phrases de tons les jours, as that little book contains such good material for conversation. Teachers who have tried the experiment of using phonetic spelling in this way are unanimous in pronouncing it a far more effectual plan than to begin with ordinary spelling. The child sees how each word should be pronounced, and is saved from those perpetual corrections and fault-findings which are so wearisome and discouraging to beginners. To those who ob- serve that this involves the trouble of learning two things instead of one, M. Passy's reply is that when a man is told to § 176.] Principes Pedagogiques de V Association, etc. 121 convey a load from one place to another, he does not complain because he has to take a wheelbarrow as well. It may perhaps be useful and instructive to print here the rules which have been adopted by the International Phonetic Association. PEINOIPES PEDAGOGIQUES DE LTASSOCIATION PHON^TIQUE INTEENATIONALE. Secretaire, M. Paul Passy, 11, route de Fontenay, Bourg-la-Beine. 1. — Ce qu'il faut etudier d'abord dans une langue etrangere, ce n'est pas le langage plus ou moins archaique de la literature* mais le langage parle de tous les jours. 2. — Le premier soin du maitre doit etre de rendre parfaite- ment familiers aux eleves les sons de la langue etrangere. Dans ce but il se servira d'une transcription phonetique, qui sera em- ployee a l'exclusion de l'orthographe traditionelle pendant la premiere partie du cours. 3. — En second lieu, le maitre fera etudier les phrases et les tournures idiomatiques les plus usuelles de la langue etrangere. Pour cela il fera etudier des textes suivis, dialogues, descriptions et recits, aussi faciles, aussi naturels et aussi interessants que possible. 4. — II enseignera d'abord la grammaire inductivement, comme corollaire et generalisation des faits observes pendant la lecture ; une etude plus systematique sera reservee pour la fin. 5. — Autant que possible, il rattachera les expressions de la langue etrangere directement aux idees, ou a d'autres expres- sions de la meme langue, non a celles de la langue maternelle. Toutes les fois qu'il le pourra, il remplacera done la traduction par des lecons de choses, des lecons sur des images et des expli- cations donnees dans la langue etrangere. 6. — Quand plus tard il donnera aux eleves des devoirs ecrits a faire, ce seront d'abord des reproductions de textes deja lus 122 Hints for Teachers. [§ 177. et expliqu6s, puis de recits faits par lui-meme de vive voix ; en- suite viendront les redactions libres ; les versions et les themes seront gardes pour la fin. Common Mistakes. § 177. The varieties of pronunciation among educated English people are so numerous and so perplexing, that it is by no means easy to say what may be tolerated and what must be reckoned as a mistake. In the following list I mention some pronunciations which occur in the most instructive book which has been written on English pronunciation — Dr. Sweet's Ele- mentarbuch. But I wish it to be understood that I do not deny that some of these so-called mistakes, e.g., dhi aidi'ar av it, are extremely common amongst educated Englishmen. I do not presume to lay down any authoritative rule of pro- nunciation, but it may perhaps be useful to point out what I myself should aim at in teaching children to pronounce the English language. Teachers of children are compelled to be dictators. The following list is not meant to include provincialisms or vulgarisms of any sort, but only some slip-shod habits into which well-educated people may easily fall unawares. I. Do not introduce final r because the next word begins with a vowel. Avoid : — (1) -a changed to -ar, as in Yikto'ri'ar auar kwin, dhi aidi'ar oy it, dha sowfar iz kcBYad, etc. (2) -6 changed to or, as in dha lor ay dha Lod. (3) -a changed to -ar, as in papar iz gon aut. (4) -o' changed to -ar, as in dha windar iz owpn', dha felar iz leyzi. II. Do not alter final point consonants because the next word begins with y. Avoid : — (1) s changed to sh, as in dhish yoer, siksh yoez. This practice is extremely common, even amongst highly educated people. A lady of the name of Alice Young told me that a § 177.] Common Mistakes. 123 large proportion of her friends called her JSlish Yoeng, and many dignitaries of the Church are caught in this pitfall. (2) z changed to zh, as in sszh yuzhwal, aezh yet, 61 dhizh yoez, preyzh yi dha L6d. The change of z to zh, or to sh, before sh, in such phrases as is she, pronounced izh or ish shi, seems, however, to be unavoidable in rapid speech. (3) t, with y following, changed to ch, as in hi wil mi chu (mit yu), las chiar (last yiar), ey chiaz agow (eyt yiaz), down chu (or cha) now (downt yu). In last yiar avoid also dropping the t and reducing it to lash yiar. (4) d, with y following, changed to j, as in it woz pey jestadi (peyd yestadi), it mey ju heziteyt (meyd yu). III. Pronounce clearly the endings n, ing, o', 6, iti. Avoid : — (1) n changed to m, after a lip consonant, as in ileYm' a klok, giYm' cep, a keep m' sosar. (2) ing changed to in, as in telin, givin, etc. (3) o' changed to a, as in winda, pila, for windo', pi!o\ (4) 6 changed to da, as in ritn' in dha 16a, as if lore were written instead of law. So raw, daw, flaw must have a pure unaltered vowel, and not end with a vowel glide as roar, door, floor often do. (5) iti changed to ati, as in yunati, abilati. IV. Keep ty and dy clear in accented syllables. Avoid : — (1) ty changed to ch, as in opachuniti (opatyuniti). (2) dy changed to j, as in juaring (dyuaring). Observe that in unaccented syllables the change of ty to ch is often allowed, as in nature, venture, question, and the change of dy to j occasionally, as in soldier. V. Pronounce r carefully in unaccented syllables. Avoid : — (1) Introducing a before it when it follows a consonant, as in Henari, oembarela. (2) Dropping an r or otherwise mispronouncing a word in which r occurs twice, as in laibrari, Februari, tempararili? sekritari, diti'ariareyt, litarari, lasbaratari, mispronounced laibri, Febyuari, temparali, and so on. 124 Hints for Teachers. [§ 178. VI. Keep a and i distinct from one another in unaccented syllables, as far as can be done without pedantry. Avoid : — (1) i changed to a, as in Apral, Yizabl', herasi, as well as in the ending -iti, already mentioned. (2) a changed to i, as in mirikl'. § 178. Avoid also these miscellaneous mistakes, which are all heard in the speech of educated people : — Mispronounced. Properly. antarctic senta'tik senta'ktik arctic atik aaktik aye (yes) ey ai 1 biography biografi baiografi calisthenic ksslistenik kaelisthenik catch kech ksech christian krishtyan kristyan or krischan drama drsema drama economic eko'nomik iko'nomik God God God heterogeneous hetaro'genyas or hetaro'jenyas hetaro'ji'nyas homogeneous howmo'genyas howmo'ji'nyas I dare say ai desey ai dear sey idyll idil aidil Isaiah Aizaia Aizaiai just jest jcest neighbourhood neybarud neybahud nomenclature nowmenklachar nowmenkleychar panorama paenaraVma p»nara'ma 'philanthropic filantropik filanthropik philosopher filosifar filosafar presumptuous prizce'mshas prizoemtywas primer praimar primar question kwesshan or kweshshan kweschan On the diphthong ai, see § 105. 179.] Common Mistakes. 125 recognise rekanaiz rekagnaiz rheumatism rumatizam rumatizm' schism sizim sizm' sure shoar shuar surely sholi shuarli thank thengk thsengk § 179. And, above all, avoid : — Faults Characteristic of Teachers, that is to say, pedantic efforts to pronounce as we spell. The derivation of the word "pedantic" might in itself serve as a warning against this fault, but it will be useful to give some illustrations of what is meant. A well-known teacher of elocution tells me that she thinks she shall be compelled to leave off teaching in girls' schools, because the mistresses require, amongst other things, that she should make the girls pronounce mountain and fountain, with the ending -teyn, like obtain, and several of the mistakes given below are such as none but teachers could, I think, be guilty of, though others are more widely spread. mountain fountain cp. villain chaplain captain curtain often cp. soften associate (sb.) associate (vb.) cp. social musician officiate propitiation conquer Mispronounced. maunteyn faunteyn oftan or oftan asowsyit asowsieyt pro'pisieyshan kongkwar Properly. mauntin fauntin Yilin cheeplin keeptin koetin ofn* or ofn' sofn' or sofn' asowshyit asowshieyt sowshal myuzishan ofishieyt or afishiey t pro'pishieyshan kongkar 126 Hints for Teachers. [§ 180. cp. exchequer liquor soldier 1 inspiration recitation cp. admiration resignation respiration England cp. pretty says, said sowldyar inspaireyshan risaiteyshan Enggland seyz, seyd ekschekar likar sowljar inspireyshan resiteyshan sedmireyshan rezigneyshan respireyshan Inggland priti sez, sed ate ebb egg ill if of wreck rick is this puss says § 180. KEY TO THE SPELLING LESSONS. I. on pot kid good big pet put cod nook bog pit bed could cook Tom II. fill full it in odd rock rook when wen whet wet thin then them fell bull deaf give was wash dish push should shook yes yet III. yell his hiss chin chick hook John Jem pith with fit foot wood etch edge which witch men king gong thick lock look pull wool rich hedge lodge push 1 The only words with, endings similar to that of soldier, are procedure, verdure, grandeur, and it is best to pronounce -jar in them all ; but as they are not in such common use as soldier, the ending -dyar is allow- able. Soldiers themselves cry out that they would rather be called sojaz than sowldyaz, when some young lady at a penny reading scrupulously pronounces the word according to the spelling. 2 See Phonetic Reading Booh, p. 5. § 180.] Key to the Spelling Lessons. 127 as ash buck bach booh up us at add am amid aback attach among above a an and the before vowel the before consonant that rel. or conj. palm calm barn cart are far burn turn dirt hurt word Persian cup cap bud bad rug IV. rag dove thumb have than thus sung puss sang rush V. abash villa attach Bella amass Anna amiss Hannah ahead collar VI. that demonstrative to tivo, too a man an ox pen and ink VII. they he pause obey me port pale see law pace feel draw eight piece for gate machine nor VIII. fairy father hairy martyr Mary regard daring bazaar wearing return tearing deserve rash push much match judge dollar miller rudder gunner fuller the orange the nuts putty folly fully resist no go so bowl boat coat repairing despairing daisy station peaceful deceive madge gush bush dull pull colour ma?iner matter mother slimmer pretend select protect window follow following who do shoe rude rule boot recourse portion mowing motion ruler truthful 128 Hints for Teachers. [§ 181. IX. bide prying how join joying new bite flying now choice cloying few cry house bowing boy duke unique fly mouse allowing joy duty unite X. wear there rear door hoar pear hair fears more poor ivhere ear seer roars tours air peer hear soars doer tares tiers oar, ore wore moor dares dear or four, fore wooer cares mere pour for sure rare near tore nor brewer § 181. KEY TO THE EXEBCISES. 1 EXEECISE I. Bel, eg, in, stif, od, ful, digd, livd, led, ded, piti, meri, sori, Wili, redi, sens, stik, blok, horid, plenti, plentifuli. Exeecise II. Jon haed a gud dog. Flori lukt set it. A baeg ful ov wul. A wuli laem. Hiz fut iz wet. Hiz haend iz ful. Saem left hiz buk. Jim tuk it. Wili iz not stedi. Giv him ten minits. Exeecise III. iEn iz a gud kuk. Henri haez a priti boks. Ten penz. Twenti pens. Fifti buks. Siksti bedz. Meni koks and henz. A boks ov briks. Wili nokt. Jon helpt Tom. Mini haez bred and egz. Ned spelz wel. Kiti haez meni frendz. Exeecise IV. iEni woz thingking. Dha laem iz Mezhar dhis bit ov wud. A mosi baangk. A Dha bel woz ringing. dringking 1 See Plwnetic Reading Book, p. 69. § 181.] Key to the Exercises. 129 hochpoch. Maech dhget red wul. Put in a stich. Dringk dha milk. Faeni iz set lezhar. Ned haez a trezhar. Jon iz veri aonggri. Tom iz aenggling. Exeecise V. Heyst meyks weyst. Now peynz, now geynz. II widz grow apeys. Ikstrimz (or ekstrimz) mit. Chseriti biginz set howm. Greyt iz dha truth, and it shsel priveyl. Ncen ov dhiz thingz muvd him. Dha toeng iz not stil, beet it kcets. Trezhaz ov wikidnis (or -nes) profit ncething. Exercise VI. Amz ar dha solt ov richiz. Truth mey bi bleymd, boet kant bi sheymd. Hi dhat slipith (or -eth) in havist iz a soen dhat kozith sheym. A soft (or soft) ansar toenith awey roth. 01 hoer padhz ar pis. Fowo'nd, fora'md. Exeecise VII. A stich in taim seyvz nain. If dhau du il, dha joi feydz, not dha peynz ; if wel, dha peyn dceth feyd, dha joi rimeynz. Dha psen sez tu dha pot, " Kip of, or yu 1 smcech mi ". Moe- dar wil aut. Hu nowz noething, dauts noathing. Woen fow iz tu meni, and a hcendrad frendz tti fyu. Now kros, now kraun. Exercise VIII. Aut ov det, aut ov deynjar. A profit hasz now onar in hiz own kcentri. Fizishan, hil dhaiself. Dha risi'var z (or -vaz) sez bsed aez dha thif. A rowling stown gsedhaz now mos. Dhau shaelt sunar ditekt an asnt (or ant) mtiving in dha dak nait on dha blask oeth, dhasn 61 dha mowshanz ov praid in dhain hat. Exercise IX. Msen pro'powziz, God dispowziz. Kowlz tu Nyukasl'. Misfochauz nevar kcem singgl'. Hevn' and oeth fait in veyn agenst (or ageynst) a dcens. Dha rivar past and God fogotn'. 9 130 Hints for Teachers. [§ 181. When dha teyl ov briks iz doebl'd, Mowziz koemz. Iz Sol olso' ainceng dha profits ? Exercise X. Moar heyst, woes spid. A skoldid dog fiaz kowld wotar. II diiaz ar il dirnaz. Dhear z {or dheaz) meni a slip twikst dha keep and dha lip. Dha fiar ov maen bringith (or -eth) a snear. A puar msen iz betar dhaen a ful. Bifoar onar iz hyuniiliti. Exercise XL Dha greyps ar sauar. Xohj iz pauar. A boent chaild dredz dha faiar. It iz not, it iz not, seth dha baiar, boat when hi iz gon (or gon) hiz wey, dhen hi bowstith. Dhey woer mseriing and giving in maerij. Tu dha pyiiar 61 thingz ar pyfiar. Wi kaunt dhem blesid which indyiiar (or endyiiar). Exercise XII. A hori owld maen. A dering robari. Dha doar woz ajar. Wud iz poras. Klera wil not ritoen. Men iz injoiing hoer raid. Alistar Jownz iz imploiing a gadnar. Hoer mowtivz ar not aperant. Maroko' weaz wel. Sera iz laiing daun. Lm'za iz centaiing a not. Dhey ar risto'ring dha choech. Exercise XIII. Class 1. Class 2. Class 3. divizhan pro'tekt kondisend siveriti advaiz ritoen obzaveyshan parental ditoemin ikspae'nshan or eks- o'bidyant igzibit, or egzibit pae'nshan molest intelijant eksibishan kantinyii intimideyt prejudishal abominabl' dislaik insensibiliti kansil dilyn'zhan imposibiliti obligeyshan VII. FEENCH ANALYSIS. § 182. The following pages are not an attempt to treat the sounds of the French language very fully, but only to give an easy introduction to the study of French pronunciation, in the hope that students will at least go on to read M. Paul Passy's Sons du Francais and Le Francais Parle, if they have not leisure to attempt any larger treatises on the subject. The pronunciation of the French language presents special diffi- culties to English people, for French and English are strongly contrasted with one another, not only in their system of sounds, but in their accentuation and intonation. German pronuncia- tion is comparatively easy. The Consonants. § 183. This is the easiest part of our task. A comparison of the table of French consonants on p. xix. with the English table on p. xviii. does indeed show a formidable array of nine new consonants, five of which are included in the alphabet on p. xvi., but the difficulty is greater in appearance than in reality, as will be seen when these consonants are explained in detail. No less than five of the symbols in the scheme of French consonants on p. xix., namely, r 2 , 'r 2 , \c, 'w and e y, can be dis- pensed with in writing, though they are wanted to make the scheme complete, and to enable us to explain the sounds of French. It will be found that the points requiring most attention are the use of unvoiced 1 and r, as in table and autre (tab'l, ot'r), (131) 132 French Analysis. [§§ 184-186. and what is really more difficult, the use of the familiar voiced r in unaccustomed positions. The Stops. § 184. The French stops, p, b, t, d, k, g, correspond with the English stops. They are formed in the same way, and we use the same symbols to represent them. The usual symbols for k are c and qu, as in cou, qui (kou, ki). There are, however, three points of difference in the forma- tion and sound of the French and English stops, recognised by phoneticians, but not very important for beginners. First, the English hard stops, p, t, k, when they occur before an accented vowel, are pronounced with a forcible expulsion of the breath, so that they may be said to be aspirated, and this is not the case in French. Secondly, according to M. Passy, the French soft stops, b, d, g, differ from English b, d, g in being fully voiced. And thirdly, the French point stops t and d are formed by placing the point of the tongue against the upper teeth (some say the back and some the edge of the teeth), whilst in the English t and d the point of the tongue touches the upper gums. They are therefore decidedly further forward than our point stops. The Liquids. § 185. The Nasals. The French nasals are three in number, m, n and ft. The back nasal (English and German ng) does not exist in French, but we find a new palatal nasal ft, which does not occur in English and German. § 186. The Lip-nasal m is, properly speaking, a voiced consonant, but under special circumstances it is liable to become voiceless. It is never syllabic as in English. At the end of a breath group, after a consonant — a position in which English m becomes syllabic — it is voiceless, and is written thus : c m, as in the words prisme, rhumatisme, pronounced §§ 187-190.] The Liquids. 133 pris'm, rumatis'm. Compare English chasm, criticism (kaezm', kritisizm'). On the pronunciation of words like prisme, when not at the end of a breath group, see § 234. § 187. The Point-nasal n is slightly different from the English n, in that the point of the tongue is placed against the teeth. In this respect it corresponds with the French point stops d and t. § 188. The Front-nasal fi. This sound does not occur frequently, and like the English and German ng, it is never heard at the beginning of a word. It is formed in the same part of the mouth as y, that is, by the front of the tongue and the hard palate. But the tongue comes into contact with the palate, so that, as in the case of the other nasal consonants, the mouth passage is closed, and the breath is sent through the nose. The nearest approach to it in English is the ny in onion, pinion (oenyan, piny an). M. Passy says that French people have different ways of pronouncing this sound, and that many educated people sound it as ny, making the last syllable of regner like that of panier. But in panier, and wherever n is followed by y, n is not formed in the same place as t and d, but is more or less thrown back or palatalised. § 189. 1 in French, like t, d and n, is formed by placing the point of the tongue against the teeth ; and as in English 1, the sides, or at least one side of the tongue, is left open as a passage for the breath. 1 But the most important point to be observed is the same which has been already noticed in ex- plaining French m. § 190. Voiceless 1. At the end of a breath group, after a consonant, French 1 is always voiceless, and we represent it by 1. This requires special attention, for in the same position English 1 is voiced and syllabic. Compare English table, noble, with French table, noble. Breathed 1 will present no difficulty 1 The back of the tongue is not raised as in English 1, which may be described as a point-back, instead of a point, consonant. — Ed. 134 French Analysis. [§§ 191-193. to those who have mastered the distinction between breathed and voiced sounds. See § 64. On the variations of such words as table, peuple, under different circumstances, see §234. The Welsh breathed 1, written 11 in Llangollen, etc., differs from French 1 in having the breath expelled much more forcibly, so that it may be said to be aspirated, and also in occurring sometimes at the beginning of words. § 191. 1 niouille. This sound is the same as the Italian gl, and is an 1 formed by contact of the tongue and palate, corre- sponding to the front-nasal n. It is still heard in the south of France, but has been superseded in the north by y, and may therefore be omitted from our alphabet. § 192. r and r 2 . The symbol r 2 is used to denote the guttural r which is used in Paris and is now becoming general in all the large towns of France. It is very different from our English r, being formed further back in the mouth than k and g, by trilling the uvula. But in the country and the smaller towns r is formed as in English, with the point of the tongue, and this pronunciation is not considered faulty. And the Parisian guttural r 2 is not allowed to be used on the stage or in singing. It is quite unnecessary for English people to learn to pro- nounce r 2 , and indeed it is so difficult for us that the attempt would certainly result in failure. Some forty years ago the Parisian guttural r was thought to be affected, and the servant-maids who were engaged to speak French with us in the nursery were chosen from the district round Orleans, so that we might learn the purer French of that province. § 193. Yc-iced r. French r, like the other French liquids, is usually voiced, and the French voiced r, when formed with the point of the tongue, is like the English r in rat, tree, etc., but more distinctly trilled. Yet it is perhaps the most trouble- some of all the French consonants for English students. For § 194.] The Liquids. 135 in English this sound never occurs before a consonant, nor is it ever heard at the end of a word, unless the next word begins with a vowel. Moreover, it usually converts the preceding vowel into a diphthong, by introducing the sound a, as in peer, poor (pia(r), pua(r)). See § 108 f. So English people find it very difficult (1) to pronounce r as a consonant when it is final or followed by another consonant, and (2) to keep long vowels followed by r pure to the end. Although French r is short, and slightly trilled as com- pared with the r heard in Italian, the best way to learn to pronounce it properly is to begin by practising a long trill, and then to learn to hold the vowels which precede it steady and unchanged, passing suddenly from them to the r sound. It will be a useful exercise to learn to distinguish accurately between the English and French words given below, where the difference is only in the treatment of r. English. French. English. French, peer pire rear rire tier tire sere sire dear dire poor pour leer lyre tour tour § 194. Voiceless r. The sound r follows the same rule as m and 1, becoming voiceless at the end of a breath group after a consonant, as in poudre, maitre (pouch?, met'r). c r is rather more difficult for English people than 1, and needs some practice. It should be pronounced very softly. It is a good exercise to learn to make a long trill without any voice. The sound is very like the purring of a cat. Compare with Fr. sawt c r, fib'r, Eng. centre, fibre (senta(r), faiba(r)), where we introduce the obscure vowel a, and do not pronounce the r unless a vowel follows in the next word. On the pronunciation of the above words, when not at the end of a breath group, see § 234. 136 French Analysis. [§§ 195-199. The Continuants. § 195. The Front-round Lip-continuant u. This sound is heard in huile, huit, nuit, lui, etc., and is apt to be con- founded by English people with w or ou (Eng. u). They do not distinguish as they ought between lui and Louis (lui, Lwi), but pronounce them both alike lwi or loui. The consonant u is derived from the vowel u, bearing the same relation to it as the consonants w and y do to ou and i (Eng. ii and i) respectively. See §§ 71, 76. So when the student can pronounce the French u in bu, lu, nu, etc., he need only try to pronounce this vowel very rapidly and pass quickly to the vowel which follows, and he will not fail to produce the consonant u in buis, lui, nuit, etc. Observe that the action of the lips is the same for w and u, but a different part of the tongue is raised, namely, the back for w and the front for u. § 196. Voiceless u. The lip- continuant u generally ceases to be voiced when it follows a voiceless consonant, as in puis, fids (p e «i, t'ui). But some Frenchmen pronounce u in puis like u in buis, so the distinction is not of much importance, and it is practically unnecessary to write \i. § 197. The Back-round Lip -continuant w. This does not occur in French so frequently as in English, but it is heard in oui, Bouen, bois, voix (wi, Rwaw, bwa, YWa), and many other words. After a voiceless consonant it generally becomes voiceless, as in poids,foi (pwa, f'wa) ; but there is no necessity to use the symbol 'w. It is never so strongly aspirated as the English wh in where. There is some difference between English, and French w heard vrhen we carefully compare them, as in French end and English ice. The dis- tinction appears to be that French w is narrow, whilst English w is wide. § 198. The Lip-Teeth Continuants f and y. These are like English f and Y, and need no special remark. § 199. The Point- Continuants or Sibilants s, z, ch, j. §§ 200, 201.] The Continuants. 137 All that we need notice here is that in French ch and j stand for the simple sounds which are represented in English by sh and zh, 1 and not for the composite sounds tsh and dzh, for which we use the symbols ch and j. French chou is like English shoe, and not like chew, and French joue differs in like manner from English Jew. Many French words, such as je, joue, jeune, begin with j = English zh, a sound which we use only in the middle of words, as in leisure, treasure, measure (lezhar, trezhar, mezhar), etc. § 200. The Front Continuant y. This sound very seldom occurs at the beginnings of words, and is not often represented by y. The symbols for it are i, 'i, y, ill and 11, as in oien, mens, mangions, a'ieul, yeux, joyeux, paille, fille (hyen, Yyhn, manjyow, ayeul, yeu, jwayeu, pa:y, fi:y). Though not so difficult as the 1 mouille which it has superseded, it needs attention and practice, because in English we are not accustomed to pronounce it at the end of our words. y after a hard consonant generally becomes voiceless, following the same rule as u and w. It is voiceless, for instance, in pied, chien (pye, ch'yew), but it is practically unnecessary to use the symbol c y to represent this sound. e y is nearly the same as the German ch in ich. § 201. The Throat Continuant h. This sound has ceased to be used in Paris and in most parts of France. The so-called aspirated h only denotes that there must be no liaison with the preceding word. But this produces an awkward hiatus, quite contrary to the genius of the French language, e.g., in en haut (Bin 6), and M. Passy recommends the retention of the h, as in the French of Normandy. I myself was taught to sound it in my childhood by bonnes who were supposed to pronounce better than the Parisians, but it is probable that most students will prefer to omit it, following the example of the Parisians and of the great majority of French people in this respect. 1 They may be called point-blade continuants. — Ed. 138 French Analysis. [§§ 202-204. The Vowels. § 202. The French vowel system is very different from ours, as may be seen by a comparison of the schemes on pp. xxii., xxiii. ; and nothing is commoner than to hear English people, who can speak French quite fluently, make sad havoc of the vowels. For our short vowels are quite different from theirs, and we have a tendency to turn our long vowels into diph- thongs, which is a great obstacle to us in trying to acquire the long vowels of either French or German. In studying the French vowels it is best to begin with the eight normal vowels, a, a, e, e, i, o, 6, ou, as in pdte, patte, pres r eU, fini, homme, drole, tout. The Open Vowels. § 203. a in pdte is very like a in father, but deeper, the tongue being more depressed. It does not occur very fre- quently, and is represented by a or a, or when combined with w, by oi = wa, exx. : — male, passer, trois (ma:l, pase, trwa). It is easily recognised when written a, and it is heard in all those words which end in -ation or -assion (-asyow), and wherever oi is preceded by r, making the sound rwa, exx. : — preparation, passion, trois, froid (preparasyow, pasyow, trwa, frwa). French a is sometimes mistaken for English 6 in Paid, as it resembles it in being more open than English a, and French pas is pronounced like English paw, but this is a bad fault. French a should not be rounded like English 6, and those who cannot imitate it precisely would do better to substitute for it the English a in father. § 204. a in patte is a mixed open vowel, differing from a in father in being mixed and not back, and from 38 in fat in being more open. It is intermediate between the two, and pains should be taken to make it distinct from both of them. It is generally short, as in a, la, patte, madame (a, la, pat, madam), but it may also be long, as in rare, cage (ra:r, ka:j). §§ 205-207.] The Front Vowels. 139 a is easiest for English people when it is short and followed by a consonant ; and if a difficulty is found in pronouncing final a, as in la mer (la me:r), it is best to practice it a few times with the first consonant of the next word, thus : — lam, lam, la me:r. As I have followed M. Paul Passy throughout the French section of this book, it is right to mention that, in calling a in patte a mixed vowel, I have ventured to differ from him. He says that it is a front vowel, and observes, what is no doubt true, and is shown in diagram A (p. xxvii.), that in low vowels the difference between front and back is not nearly so great as in high vowels. But it appears to me that although his own a may well be described as a front vowel, it is not quite the normal French a, but exceptionally far forward. It seems to my ear to approximate very closely to our English ae in pat, though it is generally acknowledged that the normal French a is about midway between the & in father and the sd in pat. The Front Vowels. § 205. There are three front vowels in French which are not rounded and may be considered normal sounds, namely, the open e in pres, the close e in e"te, and i as in fini. They correspond, roughly speaking, with English e, ey, i in fairy, fate, feet. The French, who use their lips in speaking much more than we do, draw back the corners of the mouth and lengthen the opening to form the sound i, and this they do in a less degree for e and e. § 206. i in fini. The sound i in French may be long, as in abime, pire, rive (abi:m, pi:r, ri:Y), or short, as in fini, vie, lime, gite, vif, triste (fini, vi, lim, jit, vif, trist). Special attention must be paid to the short i, which does not exist in English. For our short i in pit is very different, being a wide vowel, and much more open than the long i. French fini is not at all like English finny. § 207. Close e in 6U never occurs in close syllables and is never long. It is therefore shorter than English ey in fate, 140 French Analysis. ['§§ 208-210. they, and it does not end with an i sound like ey, which is almost a diphthong. The nearest approach to it in English is the shortened ey sometimes met with in unaccented syllables, as in survey (sb.). We meet with e in parler, nez, pied, ble, j'ai, donnai, gai (parle, ne, pye, ble, je, done, ge). § 208. Open e in pres is nearly the same as e in English fairy (feri), but for all that it is difficult for English people to pronounce well. It is long in tete, reve, fer, vert, terre, frere, chaise, neige, reine (te:t, re:v, fe:r, ve:r, te:r, fre:r, che:z, ne:j, re:n), and short in tel, href, herbe, net (tel, bref, herb, net). It is more open than our e in pet, but slightly less open than our e in Mary, fairy. When it is long, there is a diffi- culty in pronouncing it arising from the English habit of always following it by r or a, generally by a, thus forming the diphthong ea, as in fairy (feri or feari), tearing (tering or tearing), fares, cares, wears, tears (feaz, keaz, weaz, teaz). We find it hard, therefore, to pronounce it in any other position. We have to aim at prolonging the first sound in air (ea(r)) without altering it in any way, as this will give us a vowel almost identical with the Erench long e. The Back-eound Vowels. § 209. There are in French three back-round vowels, corres- ponding with the three front vowels e, e, i, namely, open o in homme, close 6 in drole, and ou in tout. The open o is not nearly so open as our 6 in Paul or o in pot, but, roughly speaking, Erench 6 corresponds with ow in pole, and ou with u in pool. Here again the Erench use their lips much more than we do, not only contracting and rounding them, but also projecting them forward considerably for ou, and in a less degree for o and 6. § 210. ou in tout. French ou may be long, as in rouge, jour, amour (rou:j, jou:r, amou:r), or short, as in loup, tousse, §§ 211-213.] The Front-round Vowels. 141 gout (lou, tous, gou). When long, it is almost the same as English u in food, but it is equally close throughout, not getting gradually closer like our u. Short ou is just as close as long ou, and must not be made like our u in put, pull, etc., which is a wide vowel and much more open. The nearest approach we have to French short ou is our short u in open syllables, e.g., in influence, instrument, into (intu). § 211. Close 6 in drole. English students must be careful not to let this sound become diphthongal, like the English ow in pole. They should also observe that French 6 is not quite identical with the first element of English ow, though it is not easy to define the difference, which is easier to hear than to imitate. It requires very careful attention and imitation from those who aim at speaking French as well as possible. It is long in rose, chose, trone, cote (ro:z, cho:z, tro:n, ko:t), and short in mot, saut, tdt, cote, aussi, rideau (mo, SO, to, kote, 6si, rido). § 212. Open o in homme. This sound is not very easy. It is long in corps, loge (ko:r, lo:j), and short in trop, sol, robe, album (tro, sol, rob, albom). It differs from English 6 in Paul and o in pot in two respects. In the first place it is not nearly so open as our open o's, which indeed are quite abnormal sounds. So far, it corresponds with the German o in Sonne. But it differs from the English and German sounds in being less clearly and distinctly a back vowel. It seems intermediate between o in Sonne and eu in peur, and some people regard it as a mixed vowel. The Front-kound Vowels. § 213. These vowels are found in German as well as in French, but we do not meet with them in English or in Italian. They may be regarded as abnormal vowels. They are formed, like the ordinary front vowels e, e and i, by the front of the tongue approaching the hard palate, but at the same time the lips are rounded as for the back-round vowels o, 6, ou. 142 French Analysis. [§§ 214-215. § 214. The French vowels belonging to this series are three in number, corresponding with the two sets of vowels just mentioned, viz., eu, eu and u, as in peur, pen, pu (peu:r, peu, pu). It is best to begin by learning to pronounce u, which is not difficult if we first sound i, and then, without stopping the voice or altering the position of the tongue, bring our lips into the position for ou. In like manner a rounded e will form eu, and a rounded e will become eu, but the sound eu is certainly more difficult than u. The sound of eu is very like our English unrounded oe in burn (boen), though these two vowels differ considerably in their formation. Examples of eu, eu and u : — eu is long in heure, veuve, fleuve, co&ur, ceil, accueil (heu:r, Yeu:v, fleu:Y, keu:r, eu:y, akeury), and short in seul, jeune, ceuf, cueillir (seul, jeun, euf, keuyir). eu is long in creuse, neutre, emeute, jetme (kreu:z, neu:t c r, emeu:t, jeu;n), and short in peu, queue, veut, deux (peu, keu, Yeii, deu). u is long in pur, ruse, sur, eurent (pu:r, ru:z, su:r, u:r), and short in vue, lune, eu, eumes, eutes (yu, lun, u, um, ut). The Foub Nasal Vowels. § 215. In forming most vowel sounds, the passage of the breath through the nose is stopped by raising the soft palate, so that it issues through the mouth alone. But if, in pro- nouncing any vowel, the soft palate is lowered, allowing the breath to escape partly by the nose and partly by the mouth, the vowel becomes nasal. There are no nasal vowels in the best English, except in loan words borrowed from French ; but in French the four vowels, a, e, o, eu, are liable to be nasalised, thus forming the four nasal vowels which occur in pan, pin, pont, un, and which in this scheme are represented by B,n, en, on, ewi. § 216.] Vowels in Unaccented Syllables. 143 One of these symbols, namely, qu for the sound in pin, will probably seem strange, but it should be remembered that in rien, bien, chien, Amiens, pensum, and many other words, the symbol for it is en. Frenchmen, as well as students of other nations, are apt to fancy that a sound of n is heard in these nasal vowels. They are, however, simple vowel sounds, and it is only when there is a liaison with a following vowel that any consonant is heard. When there is a liaison, add an n in ordinary type, thus : — mon enfant (mown awfaw). Examples of the Nasal Yowels : — aw : — an, champ, plante (aw, shaw, pla^:t). en : — fin, mince, soin, grimper, plaindre, faim, plein, bien, rien, pensum (few, me%:s, swew, grewpe, plew:d e r, fen, plew, byew, ryew, pewsom). on : — rond, conte, nom (row, kow:t, now). euw : — ww, parfum, jeun (euw, parfeuw, jeuw). When there is a liaison, some speakers denasalise these vowels altogether, and they always lose more or less of their nasality. It may be worth noting that some of the French nasal vowels differ from the oral vowels on which they are based in being more open. §n at least is unquestionably more open than e. My own observations led me to conclude that it was the English se nasalised before I had studied any books on French phonetics, and it still seems to me nearer to this sound than to the French e. But on is hardly as open as o in foomme. Perhaps, though pretty nearly on a level with this o, it may really be derived from the closer 6 in clrole. Vowels in Unaccented Syllables. § 216. There are three vowels which occur only in un- accented syllables and are always short. The most important of these is : — The Natural Yowel e in le. e is called the French natural vowel, because when Frenchmen hesitate in speaking and simply let the voice go on without attempting to modify it, 144 French Analysis. [§ 217. this is the sound they utter. It is not quite the same as a in villa which Englishmen use in the same way, the French sound being a little closer and slightly rounded. 1 There is not much difference in sound between French eu and e, but it is convenient to use different symbols for them, because there is this important distinction, that eu may be long and accented, whilst e is always unaccented and short, and is also very often elided. Examples of e : — je, me, le, de, ne, degre, faisant, faisons, faisais (fezaw, fezon, feze). § 217. Two other Unaccented Yowels. There are two other vowels occurring in unaccented syllables only, namely, one intermediate between e and e, e.g., in maison, which is not precisely = mezow or mezo^, and another which is between o and 6, e.g., in comment (komaw or koma^). There is no need to use special symbols for these sounds. They can be repre- sented by the characters e and o in a work which does not aim at making minute distinctions. These vowels are always short. 1 F. Beyer says that it is closer than eu in peur, but not so close as efi in peu, and this appears to me to be correct. VIII. FBENCH SYNTHESIS. Accent. § 218. The French language differs so much from English in the use of accent, i.e., stress or emphasis, that English students who have only paid attention to the pronunciation of particular words, and not to the accentuation of whole sentences, can only speak a miserable sort of English-French, totally different from the French language in the mouth of a native. Who has not heard English people say Pdrlez-vous frdngais ? or C&mment-vous pdrtez-vous ? with a strong accent on the first syllable of the principal words, bringing these out in sharp contrast to the remaining syllables, utterly regardless of French habits of accentuation ? The first point to be observed with regard to accent in French is that there is no such well-marked contrast between accented and unaccented syllables as we find in English and in German. Dr. Abbott, in his Hints on Home Teaching, goes so far as to say that there is equal stress on all the syllables ; and although this is an exaggeration, it must be confessed that Frenchmen are not all agreed among themselves as to where the stress should fall. But happily there is not much difference of opinion among the leading phoneticians. Beginners must then be frequently reminded that in French the syllables should be all perfectly clear and distinct, like a row of pearls on a string, not weak and confused, with a few syllables coming into prominence here and there. This remark, (145) 10 146 French Synthesis. [§ 219. which applies to the spoken language, must not, however, be understood to mean that everything which appears as a syllable in the ordinary spelling is to be clearly pronounced as such. In the spoken language the vowel e very frequently disappears, petit is pronounced pti, or if a vowel follows, ptit, and in je ne sais pas the vowel of ne is lost, and so on. And in all such cases the syllable is lost also, for French has no syllabic con- sonants like English, 1', m', n' in trouble, criticisM, open. The French accent laws differ also from the English in these particulars : — (a) The syllables which bear the accent or stress are not necessarily the same as those on which the voice is raised to a higher pitch. This has occasioned some difficulty in ascer- taining where the accent really does fall. (b) The accent, as a general rule, is not logical, that is, it does not serve to distinguish the principal words in the sentence. The rule which governs French accentuation is a very simple one, and soon stated, but it requires great attention on the part of English people to carry it out in practice. It is as follows : — § 219. Rule for French Accentuation. The accent falls on the last syllable in each sentence or breath group ; and if the breath group is a long one, it is broken up, at the discretion of the speaker, into several accent groups, each one of which ends with an accented syllable. So in the two phrases given above — Komaw you porte you ? and Parle you frawse ? — the last syllable of each phrase should have the stress, whilst the other syllables are made as equal as possible. The following sentence, taken from M. Passy's Le Francais Parle, shows how longer sentences are broken up into accent groups, the last syllable of each group bearing the accent : — S etet eurai om | de ho:t nesaws, | don 1 ton [ n ete pa move, | me ky ete | korowpu | par la Yanite | e par la moles. §§ 220-222.] Quantity. 147 The most important exception to this rule is that when the last syllable has the vowel e, the accent falls on the preceding syllable. It should be observed also that a logical accent is occa- sionally used in French as in English, to mark an antithesis. F. Beyer gives as examples, " donner et pardonner" ; " pagina n'est pas le, mais la page en francais ". § 220. Secondary Accents are met with in words where the final vowel which bears the principal accent is immediately preceded by a long vowel. This long vowel then becomes half long, and takes a secondary accent. Exx. : — baron, bdton, chdteau, passer, raison, and words ending in -asion, -ation, -assion and -ision. § 221. The Accents in Poetry. It is evident that French poetry cannot be scanned like English poetry. Theoretically, there is a fixed number of syllables in each line, but in point of fact these syllables are not all heard, many of the final syllables in e being omitted, though the readers sometimes fancy that they scrupulously pronounce them according to rule. There are different theories as to the principle of rhythm observed in French poetry. M. Passy's theory is that although the number of syllables is variable, there is a fixed number of accent groups in each line, and the division of the lines into accent groups is shown in the specimens of poetry in M. Passy's Les Sons du Franqais and Le Frangais Parle. Quantity. § 222. Here again we are met by the difficulty that phone- ticians are not all agreed as to the laws of quantity in the French language. And certainly the differences of quantity or length, like those of accent, are not so clearly marked in the French language as they are in English and German. More- over, the dialects of French differ as to the length of certain syllables, e.g., the first syllables of beaucoup and comment. It is in accented syllables that the difference between long and 148 French Synthesis. [§§223,224. short vowels is most apparent, and that there is a general agreement in the uses of the various dialects. As regards quantity, French vowels may be divided into three classes. Class I. Two vowels which are always short : — e and e. Class II. Seven vowels : — a, 6, eu, wi, Qn, on, ewi, which are more frequently long than any others, and may be called long by nature. Note that these consist of the three which, in this scheme, are marked with a circumflex, and the four nasal vowels. Class III. The remaining seven vowels : — a, e, i, 0, ou, eu, u. § 223. As regards Class I., reasons can be given why e and e are always short, namely, that e is always unaccented, and that, although e may have an accent, it never occurs in a position where, by rule, other vowels would be long, that is, not before a final consonant. Three rules concerning quantity apply equally to the vowels in Classes II. and III. First, all final vowels are short, as in tot, pas, joue, vie (to, pa, jou, yi). Secondly, vowels in accented syllables, followed by a single final consonant, are long, if that consonant is r or one of the soft continuants. Exx. : — cave, ruse, cage, travail, soleil, rare (ka*.Y, ru:z, ka:j, traYa:y, solery, ra:r or ra:r). And thirdly, all vowels are generally long when they occur, followed by a consonant, in the final syllables of words borrowed from foreign languages. Exx. : — iris (iri:s), blocus (bloku:s), Minos (Mino:s). Liaison does not lengthen a vowel, apparently because the consonant is pronounced as though it belonged to the following word : — il n'est pas ici (inepa zisi). § 224. The vowels in Class II. — a, 5, eu, and the nasal vowels — when accented and followed by any one or two con- sonants, are long : — cote, passe, jetme, fonte, pente, pdtre, apotre §§ 225, 226.] Intonation. 149 (ko:t, pa:s, jeu:n, fow:t, paw:t, pa:t'r, apo:t e r). Exceptions in the case of a: — froide, froisse, paroisse (fpwad, frwas, parwas). Here again vowels are not lengthened by liaison : — tant et phis (taw teplus). § 225. The vowels in Class III. — a, e, i, o, ou, eu, u — followed by any consonant other than a soft continuant or r, may be long or short, but they are most frequently short. One only, namely e, may be indifferently long or short in such a position. Exx. : — mdtre (met'r), maitre (me:t'r) ; saine (sen), Seine (se:n) ; renne (pen), reine (pern) ; tette (tet), tete (te:t). It is worth noting also that the vowels in tons (toir.s), boite (bwa:t), serve to distinguish these words from tousse (tons), boite (bwat). In unaccented syllables, long vowels generally become half- long, and as a rule their length can then be left unmarked, but it is worth while to distinguish the half-long vowels in the participles tirant (ti:raw), couvant (kou:Yaw), from the short ones in the substantives tyran (tiraw), convent (kouYaw). Intonation. § 226. We have seen that French syllables differ but slightly from one another in accent and quantity. And yet the effect of spoken French is not monotonous, owing to the well-marked modulations of the voice. English students, and those of other nations also, find the French intonation extremely difficult to imitate, so that it is often the one thing wanting to those who, in other respects, pronounce French almost like a native. And unfortunately but little can be done by means of symbols to show the rising and falling of the voice. The chief points of contrast to be observed between the English and French systems of modulation are these : — (1) In French the voice rises and falls through much larger intervals than in English, producing a greater contrast between the high and low syllables. 150 French Synthesis. [§§ 227, 228. (2) Whereas in English, sentences which are not interroga- tive fall at the close, French sentences often, and indeed most frequently, rise at the end, even when they are not interroga- tive, in a manner which sounds very strange to English ears. (3) The English rule that accented syllables rise in pitch does not prevail in French, where a syllable may rise without being accented, or be accented without rising. This fact is said to be the explanation of the difference of opinion concerning the accent in French, those syllables which are higher in pitch appearing to be accented when this really is not the case. Syllables. § 227. We have seen that in English a consonant may sometimes form the nucleus of a syllable, as in troubles, opened (troebl'z, owpn'd), where 1 and n are syllabic. But in French there are no syllabic consonants, and every syllable must have a vowel. And as there are no diphthongs in French, the rule is that there are as many syllables as there are vowels. Such combinations as ui 9 wa, wan, ya, ye, etc., are indeed sometimes reckoned as diphthongs, but the first sound in each of them is generally pronounced as a consonant. M. Passy at least reekons them as such, and lays down the rule that the number of vowels and of syllables is the same. § 228. Syllable Division. In French, as many consonants as possible are joined with the vowel that follows, and this rule holds good when final consonants are followed by a vowel in the next word. The syllables are divided quite irrespectively of word division. Exx. : — tapis, cadeau, tableau, insensibilite, quel age a-t-il ? are divided thus : — ta-pi, ka-do, ta-bld, en- san-si-bi-li-te, ke-la-ja-til ? This French habit is very confusing to foreigners, for the words all run into one another, so that it is impossible for the ear to detect where one word ends and another begins. In English, on the other hand, a new word almost always begins a new syllable. §§ 229-231.] Liaison. 151 § 229. Open Syllables. It follows from the rule for syllable division that French syllables are almost always open, that is, they end in a vowel. The vowel e never occurs in close syllables ; so although it is heard in j'ai (je), it is changed to e in ai-je (ej). The French Academy have recognised this law by altering colUge, siege, in the last edition of their dictionary, to college, siege. Liaison. § 230. As in French open syllables are preferred, and com- binations of consonants are avoided, many final consonants which were formerly pronounced, are now silent, unless a vowel follows in the next word. And when such final con- sonants are sounded, there is said to be a "liaison". Cp. les chevaux (le cnvo), un grand chien (ewi gvwi chyew), with les hommes (lez oni), un grand homme (eun grawt om). We have parallel cases in English, as the n of an is never used unless a vowel follows, and it is only before a vowel in the next word that final r is ever heard. Observe the change of consonants in (lez om, eun grawt om), neuf heures (neuY eu:r), un sang impitr (ewi sawk ewpu:r), s and f being changed to z and y, and d and g to t and k respectively. The rule is that in liaison continuants become soft and stops become hard. § 231. Many more liaisons are made in careful reading than in ordinary speech. It is very difficult for foreigners to know when to make a liaison. The following rules are from Mr. Beuzemaker's French and German Journal, very slightly modified by M. Passy. They apply to colloquial French. The liaison should be used before vowels : — (1) Between articles and their nouns : — Lez arb'r. (2) Between nouns and preceding adjectives : — yoz awfaw, se moYez ekolye. But when the adjective follows the noun, it is not used in ordinary speech : — ewi gou orib'l, in elevated style, ewi gout orib'l, 152 French Synthesis. [§ 232. (3) Between numerals and their nouns : — diz om, vewt ardwaz. (4) Between pronouns and verbs : — i(l) youz on done. (5) Between verbs and pronouns : — partet i(l), dit el, prenez an. (6) Between adverbs and adjectives or verbs : — trez aktif, pluz okupe. (7) Between prepositions and their complement : — chez el, sawz e(k)sku:z. (8) Between the words est, il, Us and a following vowel : — il et isi, iz on peur. Observe that il and Us are sounded i before a consonant, and il, iz, before a vowel. Monosyllables are oftener tied than longer words : — trez eraportara, but ase, or asez ewportaw ; and that when the first word already ends with a consonant, the liaison is generally omitted : — anver el. Elision. § 232. There are some few cases in which elision is recog- nised in the ordinary French spelling, le and de being written V and d" before vowels, as in l' enfant, un verve d'eau. But elisions are far more frequent than the spelling would lead us to suppose. The only sound which is elided is e, and this usually dis- appears whenever it can be omitted without bringing too many consonants together. Examples of its disappearance in the middle of a word are : — petit (pti), second (zgon), mesure (mzu:r), demain (dmew). In an elevated style it is not so often omitted as in colloquial French. As a general rule, three consonants cannot come together in French without e intervening, but M. Passy observes that this rule has exceptions. He says : " When the third con- sonant is one of the following — 1, r, W, u, y, which may be called vowel-like consonants — three consonants are quite §§ 233, 234.] Hoiu Stops are Combined. 153 natural: — Madam Blaw, kat plawsh, pom k^it. In some cases where the first consonant is one of these five, it is the same : — euwn ark-fooutaw ; indeed, in this way four con- sonants may be allowed : — sa marsh hjm. Forms such as opstine, un bel statu, nn graw:d statu, were originally artificial (popularly ostine, un foel estatu), but are now quite natural to educated people. The use of e to avoid awkward combinations of consonants is not limited to those words in which it is written. It may be heard, for instance, after arc in the phrase Varc de triomphe, and after est in Vest de la France. How Stops are Combined. § 233. It is important to observe the different way in which the stops are combined in English and in French. We have noticed in § 116 how in English, when a stop is followed by another stop, or by a liquid, as in active, bacon (aektiv, foeykn'), the first consonant is implosive and not explosive, that is, it is heard only in the act of shutting. But if the French actif (aktif ) were pronounced in this way, a Frenchman would fail to hear the k. In such cases there should be a slight explosion, with a little escape of breath between the two consonants. Variations of Words ending in Voiceless m, 1 or r. § 234. We have seen already (§§ 186, 190, 194) that some French words end with voiceless m, 1 or p, when not followed by another word in the same breath group. But these words have the provoking habit of going through a good many varia- tions under different circumstances. M. Passy writes to me that they are " une veritable scie". They are the words commonly spelt with the endings -le, -re, -me, preceded by a consonant, such as peuple, table, spectacle, souffle, propre, arbre, autre, tendre, livre, souffre, rhumatisme. All such words have three different forms, and some have four, according to their position in the sentence. Speaking generally, the terminations of these words are : — 154 French Synthesis. [§ 234. (1) 1, e r, c m at the end of the breath group. (2) 1, r, m before a vowel. (3) le, re, me before a consonant, or else (4) 1 and r are altogether dropped before a consonant. When English people are in doubt whether to use 3 or 4, it is safer to use 3, and pronounce le and re before a consonant. The first set of endings hardly needs further illustration, as we meet with them whenever a word of this class is isolated, or at the end of a sentence, or of any breath group. But in familiar conversation 1 and r are often dropped altogether, and we hear peup, kat, for peupl, kat c r, and M. Passy says that in dogme he pronounces a voiced m. The rule for the second set appears to be invariable, final m, 1 and r being always voiced when followed by a vowel in the next word, as in la Bibl awtye:r, nio^ p6:vr ami. The perplexing point is to know what ending should be used when a consonant follows in the next word. The general rule is to have voiced m, 1 or r followed by the obscure vowel e, so as to prevent three or more consonants coming together, as in rumatisme kronik, sa propre la%:g, table d 6:t, but there are many exceptions. In this position m is not liable to be dropped altogether by people who pronounce carefully, though pris, rumatis, etc., are often vulgarly used; but even those who pride themselves on speaking correctly often drop 1, and still more frequently r, in familiar conversation, e.g., in kat person, not tabl, pov garsow / pour pra?*:d ko?zje. In compounds such as met d otel, eun kat plas, r is invariably dropped. There is also a third form in use before a consonant, voiceless m, 1 and r being sometimes used in this position. M. Passy observes that some French people use syllabic 1 at the end of a breath group, or before a consonant, but he con- siders this abnormal. When we anglicise such an expression as table d'hote, syllabic 1 is, of course, quite allowable, and it would be affectation to try to avoid it, but it ought not to be used in speaking French, IX. GEKMAN ANALYSIS. § 235. The sounds of German are easier to master than those of French, partly because they are more like English sounds, and partly because the spelling is more regular, and consequently a better guide to the pronunciation. And if French has already been acquired, some of those sounds which do not occur in English will have been learnt already. Standard Geeman. § 236. The great differences in pronunciation between the natives of different parts of Germany must be obvious to every one. It has been usual for English people to accept the pro- nunciation of Hanover as the best German, but the Germans themselves are of a different opinion, and ridicule the Hano- verians for their provincialisms. But although provincialisms are to be met with in all parts of Germany, there is happily a pretty general consensus of opinion as to what is the best German. It is the language of the stage, that is the pro- nunciation of north Germany, free from provincialisms, which may be accepted as standard German, and this it is which all foreigners should try to acquire. There are, indeed, some few points which may be regarded as open questions, and Prof. Vietor, whose pronunciation I have followed throughout, accordingly gives some alternative forms, shown in the footnotes to the specimens of German. These (155) 156 German Analysis. [§ 237. forms are what I myself use, and they will be found easier for English pupils than those given in the text. 1 § 237. German Consonants Illustrated. Symbols. Examples. p p, pp, b Paar (pa:r), "pair"; Bappe (rape), " black horse" ; ab fap), "off". b b Balm (ba:n), "track," "railway". t t,tt,th,d,dt Tau (tau), "rope"; fett (fat), "fat"; Thai (ta:l), "valley"; Hand (hant), "hand"; Stadt (shtat), "town". d d du (du:), "thou". k k, cJc, ch, q, c hahl (ka:l), " bald " ; dick (dik), " thick " ; Achse ( J akse), " axle " ; Quelle (kYale), "well," "spring"; Cognac (konjak), " cognac ". g g gut (gu:t), "good"; vergehen (far- ge:en), "pass away". No symbol used all ('al), "all"; ilberall ( ? ii:ber'al), "everywhere " ; abirren ('aip'iren), " swerve ". m m, mm mir (mi:r), " to me " ; Lamm (lam), "lamb". n n, nn nie (ni:), "never"; Mann (man), " man ". ng ng, n sing en (zingen), " sing " ; lang (lang), " long " ; Dank (dangk), "thanks ". 1 I, 11 lahm (la:m), "lame"; voll (fol), "full". 1 As these alternative forms, with stopped instead of open consonants, for g medial and final, are used on the stage and have been gaining ground for some time among educated speakers, I myself have given them the preference in recent publications, such as Aussprache des Schriftdeutschcn, 4th edition, and Lcsebuch in Lautschrift. — Ed. § 237.] German Consonants Illustrated. 157 Symbols. Examples. r or r 2 r, rr rauh (rau), "rough"; Narr (nar), "fool". w (not = Eng. w) used by some Germans instead of y in w, u schwer (shwe:r), " heavy " ; quer (kwe:r), " crosswise ". f f,ff,v Fall (fal), "fall"; Schiff (shif), "ship"; viel (fi:l), "much". Y w, u wohl (yo:1), "well"; Qual (kYa:l), " torture ". s s, ss, ss List (list), " stratagem " ; Kasse (kase), " cash " ; Fuss (fu:s), "foot". S (in the combinations ts and ks). ts z, tz, t, c, besides zu (tsu:), "to," " too " ; Satz (zats), ts, tss, etc. " sentence " ; Nation (natsiom), " nation " ; cis (tsis), " C sharp ". ks x, besides ks, chs, Axt ('akst), " axe ". etc. z s so (zo:), " so ". sh sch, s scharf (sharf), "sharp"; sprechen (shpracen), " speak " ; stehen (shte:en), "stand". zh j, g, ge Journal (zhurna:l), "journal"; Logis (lo:zhi:), " lodging " ; Sergeant (zarzhant), " sergeant ". q ch, g ich ('ig), "I"; solch (zoIq), "such"; Sieg (zi:k or zi:§), " victory " ; Berg (bark or bar§), "mountain". j (Eng. y) j, i, g ja (ja:), " yes " ; Familie (fami:lje), "family"; Siege (zi:ge or zi:je), " victories " ; Berge (barge or barje), " mountains " ; regnen (re:gnen or re:jnen), "rain". 158 German Analysis. [§§ 238, 239. Symbols. Examples. x ch, g ach ('ax), " ah " ; Buck (bu:x), " book " ; Tag (ta:k or ta:x), " day " ; zog (tso:k or tso:x), " drew " (sing.). g g Tage (ta:ge or ta#:e), "days"; zogen (tso:gen or tso:#en), " drew " (plur.). h h Hand (hant), " hand ". This list gives only the symbols which occur in German words, and those used for the foreign sound zh. Other symbols, used in loan words borrowed from French and other languages, are given in Dr. Vietor's German Pronunciation, but this simpler list may be useful in teaching children, who ought not, at first, to be troubled with exceptions. Six New Consonants. § 238. Most of the German consonants are identical with, or very similar to, those used in English, but there are six new consonants, namely, ('), r 2 , w, c, x, g. We shall see, however, that of these, three are really superfluous, so that English students need only learn to pronounce the three following : — C),c,x. § 239. The Glottal Stop, for which we use the symbol ('), is formed by bringing the vocal chords together, so as to close the glottis, and then suddenly opening them with an explosion, as is done in coughing or clearing the throat. It is not a sound difficult to produce, but as it is not ordinarily written, Germans and others who have not studied phonetics, generally fail to observe it. A German master told me that when he repeated the vowels to classes of English children, they always laughed, and he was puzzled by this until it was pointed out to him that in so doing he sounded an emphatic glottal stop before each vowel, producing an effect very strange to English ears. Students must be very careful not to forget to pronounce this consonant. It occurs before all initial vowels, as well as §§ 240-242.] Six Neio Consonants. 159 in the second part of compounds like ilberall, abirren. But in compounds which are no longer felt to be such, like allein, daraus, heraus, hinaus, it is omitted, as also in phrases where little words are closely connected with the preceding word, and consequently unaccented, e.g., in will ich, hat er, muss es. 1 § 240. r 2 . This guttural r, formed with the back of the tongue and the uvula, is the same as the r generally used in Paris, and has been discussed in § 192. Many Germans have substituted it for the r formed with the point of the tongue, and the use of it is spreading in Germany ; but it is not as yet heard in the best German, and there are some Germans who omit final r altogether, substituting for it some sort of vowel sound. This also is a practice to be avoided. § 241. The Simple Lip Continuant w. This again is a sound which it is not necessary to use in German, as it is a substitute for y, and though frequent, is by no means universal amongst careful speakers. It is heard in the combinations written schw, qu and zw, e.g., in schwer, quer and zwei, and pro- nounced either (shw, kw, tsw) or (shy, kv, tsv). It is not a difficult sound to pronounce, being formed by simply bringing the lips together, without rounding them or raising the back of the tongue, as is done in pronouncing English w. It differs also from English w in being very often voiceless. The reason for drawing attention to this sound is that it may easily be mistaken for English w, which ought never to be substituted for it. German Quell must be distinguished from English quell. It is best to pronounce y (1) wherever w is written, and (2) where u is found in the combination qu. The corresponding voiced sound is used in South Germany, e.g., in the word Wesen. § 242. The Palatal Continuant c, commonly called the ich sound, is quite distinct from the back continuant x, called the ach sound. It is sometimes heard in English hue, and we have 1 In South Germany, the glottal stop is, as a rule, not used. — Ed. 160 German Analysis. [§ 243-245. met with it in French pied, where the sign used for it was 'y. In some combinations it is difficult to pronounce, especially- after r, as in the words durch and Furcht. C always occurs after a front vowel or a consonant, except in a few foreign words, such as Charon. There are some instances in which it may be questioned whether c or k should be used, namely, those in which g final is written after a front vowel or a consonant. Prof. Vietor says that two-thirds of German speakers use c in such cases, and that in the termination -ig, as in Konig, the g sound is almost universal. 1 Except the termination -ig, the case is quite analogous to that of medial g ; that is to say, either q or k may be used. But ik for -ig final is quite a provincialism. § 243. The Back Continuant x. This consonant, the so- called ach sound, may be heard in the Scotch loch. Like u, it is formed with the back of the tongue approaching the soft palate. It occurs only after back vowels. § 244. The Voiced Back Continuant g. This differs from the last sound only in being voiced. It is somewhat difficult to pronounce, but is always allowable to use g in its place. 2 It occurs only after back vowels, and is always medial, as in Wagen, Bogen. Familiak Consonants. § 245. A few points concerning these demand our attention, for some of them differ in formation or in use from our English consonants. The Point Consonants t, d, n, 1, sh, r, are somewhat different from the corresponding sounds in English. German t, d, n, 1 are formed with the point of the tongue only, whilst in English t, d, n the blade, or part immediately behind the point, seems to be raised also ; and in forming English 1 the 1 On the stage k is used, except in the termination -ig, which has g (but g in -ige, etc.). See footnote, p. 156. — Ed. 2 This is the stage pronunciation. — Ed. §§ 246, 247.] Familiar Consonants. 161 back of the tongue is raised as well as the point. So students must endeavour to use the point only in forming all these consonants. German sh is formed, Prof. Vietor says, by a broad stream of breath passing between the teeth, whilst the lips are some- what protruded ; but in English sh the lips are not protruded, and the blade of the tongue is made to approach the hard palate, leaving a central channel for the breath. 1 It is usual in Hanover, and in some other parts of Germany, to substitute s for sh in words beginning with the written symbols sp and st, such as sprechen, stehen ; but this is a mistaken attempt to follow the spelling, and ought not to be imitated. r in German is more distinctly trilled than in English, and in the best German it does not lengthen, or modify in any way, the vowels which precede it. It is difficult for English people to pronounce it when final or followed by a consonant ; and the worst mistakes of English students of German are generally due to their habits of omitting it, and allowing it to modify preceding vowels in their own language (see § 108). h is always pronounced. Illiterate speakers do not drop it as they do in England. § 246. Final Consonants are Hard. The only exceptions to this rule are the liquids m, n, ng, 1, r; for though many words are spelt with final b, d, g, Y, the sounds heard in such cases are p, t, c or x (or k instead of c and x), and f, as in ab, Hand, Sieg, Berg, Tag, zog, Motiv. § 247. Final Consonants are Short. It is very necessary to draw the pupils' attention to this fact ; for in English, after short vowels, final consonants are lengthened, and to do the same in German would be a bad mistake. It is particularly important to avoid lengthening final liquids. Pronounce the final consonants in such words as Lamm, Mann, lang, Narr, voll as abruptly as possible. 1 Also in German sh, the blade of the tongue may be raised. — Ed, 11 162 German Analysis. [§ 248. § 248. German Vowels Illustrated. Symbols. Examples. a: a, aa, ah da (da:), " there"; Aal ('a:l), "eel"; nah (na:), "near". a: a, ah sden (za:en), " sow " ; mdhen (ma:en), "mow". e: 0, ee, eh schwer (shveir), "heavy," "difficult "; Beet (be:t), " flower-bed " ; Beh (re:), " roe ". i, ie, ih, ieh mir (mi:r), " to me " ; sie (zi:), " she " ; ihn (i:n), " him " ; Vieh (fi : ), " cattle ". so (zo:), "so"; Boot (bo:t), "boat"; roh (ro:), "raw," "rude". du (du:), " thou " ; Kuh (ku:), " cow ". schon (shd'.n), " beautiful " ; Hohle (hb:le), "cave". fur (fii:r), " for " ; kilhn (kti:n), " bold ". ab ('ap), "off", Gizbotn (gebo:te), "commandments". /est (fast), " fast," " firm " ; Hdnde (hande), "hands". i, ie mit (mit), " with " ; vierzehn (firtse:n), " four- teen ". oo ('op), "if," "whether". Kunst (kunst), " art ". Gespott (geshpbt), "mockery". Hiltte (hute), "hut". Ei ('ai), " egg " ; Mai (mai), " may ". Au ('au), "mead," "meadow". Heu (hoi), "hay"; glaubig (gloibic), "be- Ueving ". The above list does not include symbols occurring only in loan words. It should be observed, however, that in French loan words we meet with four nasal vowels, a?i, e^, on, eun, the French symbols being retained in every case. Exx. : — i: h ie, \ o: o, 00, u: u, uh 6: o, oh ti: it, ilh a a e e a e, a u u 6 6 u il ai ei, ai au au oi eu, du §§ 249, 250.] Long and Short Vowels. 163 aw in Chance (sha%:se), "chance"; Trente-et-un (tra%:t-e Qun). m ,, Bassin (basew:), " basin " ; train (trew:), " baggage " (of an army) ; plein (ple^:), " full ". on ,, Ballon (balow;), " balloon ". euw„ Trente-et-un (traw:t-e:-euw:), parfum (parfeu^:), "per- fume ". Geeman Vowels Desceibed. § 249. The German vowel scheme shown on p. xxiv. should be examined, and compared with the English and French schemes preceding it. We shall find that in some respects the German vowels are like the French, and that in others they resemble our own ; so that, to those who know the sounds of English and French, the mastery of the German vowels will prove to be a matter of small difficulty. Several of the English habits of speech which mislead students of French must be guarded against in German also ; therefore some of the warn- ings given in the chapters on French must be repeated here. Long and Shoet Vowels. § 250. An inspection of the German scheme of vowels on p. xxiv. will show at once that here, as in English, the long and short vowels are distinct from one another, there being only two instances in which the corresponding long and short vowels are identical in sound. And the difference in each pair of corresponding long and short vowels is the same that we have noticed in English ; that is, the short vowel is formed with a relaxed and widened tongue, so that it is called wide, and it is also decidedly more open than the corresponding long vowel. The correspondence of the long and short vowels may be shown thus : — Long and Narrow. Short, Wide and more Open. e: as in geh a as in Hande i: ,, ihn \ ,, Sinn Lor ig and Narrow. o: as in Sohn u: ,, Kuh 6: ,, Sohne ti: ,, hilhn Long. a: as in lahm a: ,, mcihen 164 German Analysis. [§ 251. Short, Wide and more Open. as in Sonne u ,, dumm 6 ,, honnen ti ,, dilnn Short and identical in sound. a as in Lamm a , , Manner The short vowel a appears twice in the above pairs of vowels, because, whilst it is identical in sound with the long a:, it bears the same relation to e: as the other short vowels do to the long ones most resembling them. There is no long vowel corresponding with the short e in Gabe. This short vowel is always unaccented. But whilst, in the distinction between long and short vowels, German is like English and unlike French, there are two points in which the vowels correspond with the French and differ from our own. For first, we have a series of front-round vowels, like the French in peur, peu, pu; and secondly, the German vowels do not, like the English, tend to become diph- thongs. Open Vowels. § 251. The Open Yowels a:, a, as in lahm, Lamm. There is no difficulty in pronouncing the long vowel a:, as it is identical with English a in father. But a in Lamm, Mann, etc., must on no account be made like English a = se in lamb, man, for the sounds are quite different. It is, however, an easier vowel than French a in patte, because it is precisely like English a in father, only shorter, whilst the French a is, as we have seen, intermediate between a in father and ae in fat. When German a is unaccented, great care is needed to avoid altering the vowel and making it like English a in villa, servant, etc. It must be pronounced quite clearly, as in Niemand (nirmant), "nobody". §§ 252, 254.] Bach-round Vowels. 165 Front Vowels. § 252. The Front Yowels a:, a, e:. The easiest of these for English students is the short a, in Fest, Hande, which is the same as our e in pet. The sound must not be altered before r, as English people are apt to do, making German Herr like English her. German a:, as in stien, mahen, corresponds with French e, though the French sound is more open, and German e:, as in geh, with French e. Here, as in French, our difficulty arises from the English tendency to turn long vowels into diphthongs. We can obtain a sound sufficiently near to the open a: by omitting the final sound of English bear, and the close e:, by omitting the i sound at the end of obey. German Beh is not = English ray. The close German e: in sehr schiver, will be found " sehr schwer," i.e., very difficult, because r follows, and this com- bination is contrary to our English habits. § 253. The Close Front Yowels i:, i. The short German i in Sinn, being = English i in pit, will be found very easy, except in the position where all German vowels are more or less difficult, i.e., before r, as in Hirt ; and the difference between the long German i; in ihn and English i in feet, is not very great. It is that English i begins with a more open sound and gradually becomes closer, whilst German i: is equally close throughout. Observe that though German i: is shortened in unaccented open syllables, its quality is not altered. So direht differs from English direct, the i being pronounced like our short unaccented i in the first syllable of eternal. The symbol ie for short i, as in vierzehn, is very rarely used. Back-round Vowels. § 254. The Back-round Yowels o:, o, as in Sohn, Sonne. Both of these require attention. The long o: must not close with a sound of u, like English ow in bowl, but must be kept 166 German Analysis. [§§ 255, 257. unchanged to the end, and it is not quite like the first part of our English ow, but apparently identical with French 6 in drole. See § 211. The short o is very decidedly more close than English o in pot ; it is nearer to French o in homme, but a little closer than the French o, and it has not, like French o, a leaning towards the front-round eu in peur, but is clearer, and more distinctly a back vowel. Both o: and o must be clearly pronounced before r, e.g., in Bohr, fort. 'The long o: is peculiarly difficult in this position. How distressed my excellent German mistress was, to be sure, at the ineffectual attempts of her pupils to pronounce her name, Frau Flohr ! The pronunciations were many and various, but it was most frequently pronounced like English flaw. The symbol oo for long o: is very rare. § 255. The Close Back-round Yowels u:, u, as in Kuh, dumm. These are not difficult, the short u being the same as English u in put, and the long u: like English u in pool. But the long German u is close and unaltered throughout, whilst English u begins with a more open sound and is gradually closed. Feont-eound Vowels. § 256. The Front-round Yowels 6:, 6, as in Sohne, konnen. These have no equivalent in English, being quite distinct from English oe in burn, which comes nearest to them in sound. The long 6: is the same as French eu in peu, except in the matter of length, for French eu may be short, as indeed it is in peu. The short 6 is more like French eu in peur, but it is some- what closer, and is always short, whilst French eu may be long, as it is in peur. The symbol 6 for d: is rare. § 257. The Close Front-round Yowels ti:, ti, as in kiihn, dilnn. These also are missing in English, but ii: is = French §§ 258, 259.] Unaccented Voivels. 167 u in pu, except that it is always long, while French u may be short, and is so in the word pu. The short u is decidedly more open than the long ii:, but this will not be difficult for English students, as we are accustomed to make our short vowels more open than the corresponding long ones. Unaccented Vowels. § 258. Unaccented e. This mixed vowel is the natural vowel of German, that is to say, the vowel uttered by Germans when they simply emit the voice without any attempt to modify it. It is not identical either with the English natural vowel, unaccented a in villa, nor the French natural vowel e in le, but it approaches very nearly to our unaccented a. According to Dr. Sweet, the difference is that German unaccented e is narrow, whilst English a is wide. It appears to me that the German natural vowel is also somewhat closer than the English, as is generally the case with the narrow vowels when compared with the corresponding wide ones. It differs from French e in le in not being rounded. 1 Pronounce German unaccented e somewhat like a in villa or e in silver, not like y in silly ; and take care not to add r when a vowel follows in the next word. English people are apt to do this, just as they often say in English, dhi aidi'ar a¥ it, but this is a very bad fault. § 259. Other Unaccented Yowels. The other German vowels are not liable to change their sound when unaccented ; and as English unaccented vowels are usually reduced to the obscure sound of a in villa, special pains must be taken to pro- nounce them clearly in German. Attend particularly to unaccented a, and u, and do not make the last syllables of Anna, Jacob, Doktor, Fokus like those of English Anna, Jacob, doctor, focus. 1 It is certainly neither narrow nor close in my pronunciation. It has more of the front e element (Eng. e in bet) than English a in villa, and differs from French e in le as stated in the text. — Ed. 168 German Analysis. [§§ 260, 261. Diphthongs. § 260. There are in German three diphthongs, in all of which the stress is upon the first element. They are as follows : — Symbols. Examples. ai ei, ai Ei, " egg " ; Mai, " May ". au an Au, " meadow ". oi en, au Hen, "hay"; gldubig (gloibic), "believing". These diphthongs are almost the same as the English ai, au, oi, in time, laud, noise. The points of difference to be observed are : — (1) In ai and au the first element is clearer. Make it like a in German Mann. (2) In oi the first element is closer, just as German o in Sonne is much closer than English o in pot. And the first element is never lengthened as it sometimes is in English, e.g., in oil. 1 Nasal Vowels. § 261. These are identical with the French nasal vowels, see § 215, and occur only in French loan words. We can use the symbols aw, en, on, eun to represent them. Germans are careful to distinguish between a,n and on, whilst most English people pronounce them both alike, as on. The nasal vowels are always long in German. In French they may be long or short. In North Germany the nasal vowels are often omitted, and ong or ang may be heard instead of the French nasal on or a?*-, etc. But this is not worthy of imitation. 1 The second element is often u (stage pronunciation). — Ed. X. GEBMAN SYNTHESIS. Vowels followed by r. § 262. As already observed, all the German vowels are diffi- cult to English students when they come before r, especially the long e: and o:, as in schwer, Ohr. Care must be taken not to alter the sound in any way, as we are apt to do in English, where we allow the preceding vowel to become a diphthong, as in pare, peer, pore, poor (cp. pale, peel, pole, pool), or to become a mixed, instead of a clear front or back, vowel, as in fern, fir, fur, word (cp. fell, fill, full, folly). It will be found useful to practise all the vowels in suc- cession, by pronouncing aloud the examples given below. The r must be slightly trilled in every case. a: a: e: paar e: Pferd 6: horen i irren Art >> Schwert ?> hort fort zart i: mir ii: fur »> Vorteil Bar >> dir J5 spilren u Urteil Ahre j? ihr a hart >> durch Ehre o: Ohr >> warten >> Furcht Erde >» Moor a Herr 6 Morder erst u: Uhr >> Herz ii Biirde werden »> nur i Hirt e Mutter § 263. Diphthongs and Triphthongs followed by r. We have observed how, in English, diphthongs followed by r are converted into triphthongs, e.g., in ire, our, employer (aia(r), aua(r), imploia(r)), § 106, 108.4. In German also we observe (169) 170 German Synthesis. [§ 264. the same triphthongs occurring before final r, e.g., Eier faier), " eggs " ; Schleier (shlaier), " veil " ; sauer (zauer), " sour " ; Trauer (trauer), ''mourning"; Feuer (foier), "fire"; teuer (toier), "dear". But in such cases the third element of the diphthong is always written as e. We find, however, that when derivative or inflectional endings are added to words ending in auer or oier, the e disappears, and the r follows immediately after the diphthong, as in saures, "sour" (neut.) ; traurig, "mournful"; feurig, "fiery"; teures, "dear" (neut.). Cp. also eirund ('airunt), "oval". When this is the case, be careful to pass at once from the diphthong to the r. Quantity. § 264. In German, as in English, the difference between long and short vowels is generally clearly marked, though long vowels are sometimes reduced to half-long. But in some respects the rules for quantity differ from ours, so that they need to be studied. The rules for the length of the vowels are as follow : — (1) Vowels are long at the end of words, whether they are accented or not. Exx. : — da, Emma, Athene ('ate:ne:), Salomo, Kahadu, the only exceptions being the final vowel e, and the words na, da, ja (interjections). (2) They are long (a) before a single consonant, i.e., before one which is written as single in the ordinary spelling, for when a double symbol follows, as in dilnn, fett, Wolle, the vowel is short, or (b) before a combination which can begin a syllable. Exx. : — ihn, filr, schwer, Mitra. Observe that in such cases the syllables become open if a vowel follows, as in ih-nen, schwe-re. (3) They are seldom long before combinations of consonants which cannot begin a syllable. In this case they remain closed when another syllable is added. Exx. of long vowels before such combinations are : — Mond, Magd, zart, Krebs, Pferd. §§ 265, 266.] Quantity. 171 (4) In compound words, vowels which have a secondary accent are not shortened in consequence. Exx. : — Vorliebe, ausgeben, Abart, Abzug. (5) In unaccented open syllables, long vowels become half- long or even short, as i: in Militar and e: in Sekretdr. In German spelling the short vowels are often indicated by doubling the consonant which follows, as in satt, fallen, and the long ones by adding h, or doubling the vowel, or by some other device, as in Mehl, filhlen, Saat, dieser. § 265. Mistakes to be avoided. It may be useful to guard against those mistakes in the quantity of the vowels to which English people are especially liable. (1) Do not make the long vowels half -long, when a hard consonant follows, because this is the rule in English. German vowels in such a case retain their full length. The vowels and diphthongs are half-long in English graced, note, goose, ice, out, but fully long in German gehst, Not, Gruss, Eis, laut. (2) In compound words be careful to make the vowel with the secondary accent long. See exx. above. (3) Make even unaccented vowels long if they happen to be final. See exx. above. (4) Do not lengthen a short vowel because r follows, though it is difficult for English people to avoid this, when the r is followed by another consonant, or final, as in ivarten, Bart, zart, hart, Hirt, Herr, Herz, Erbe, Urne. (5) When a long vowel is shortened to half-long, because it is not accented, do not on that account alter its quality and make it more open. The i in Militar should be pronounced like English i in eternal (itdenal) and e in Sekretdr nearly like English ey in chaotic (keyotik), but without the slight sound of y heard in English. §266. Length of Consonants. The consonants in German are never lengthened, except in compound words, such as mitteilen, Packkorb, Tauffeier, Still-leben, and even in such cases they are commonly short in conversational German. 172 German Synthesis. [§ 267. English people must guard against lengthening the con- sonants after short vowels, as we habitually do in English. They should practice them in this position, pronouncing them as quickly and sharply as possible, e.g., in Sinn, Mann, Lamm, contrasted with English thin, man, lamb. Accent. § 267. The accentuation of German words and sentences is almost identical with the accentuation of English, and does not present much difficulty. The principal rules are as follows : — (1) The stem syllable, being the most significant, bears the principal accent. This rule is almost universal in words not borrowed from foreign languages. The chief exceptions are that the particles, in some compound words, take the principal accent. Exx. : — Antiuort, unwohl, Ursache, ausgeben, in each of which the first syllable is accented. (2) The weaker syllables all have a slight stress, unless they have the vowel e. English people should note this, and pro- nounce the unaccented vowels clearly, not making them obscure, as we are apt to do in English. (3) In German, as in English, the accent may be shifted when two words are contrasted, as in z&rgehen, nicht vergehen. The rules for accenting sentences are the same as in English, but these deviations should be noted : — (a) A great number of words receive the accent. Compare das Bitch, witches er mir gab and the bdoJc which he gave me, where the German has three accents and the English only two. (b) Verbal forms following the object must not be strongly accented in such clauses as the following : einen Brief schrei- ben, einen Brief geschrieben haben, wenn ich einen Brief schreibe. As in English, the accent may be shifted so as to emphasize any word in the sentence to which the speaker wishes to draw special attention. In gib mir das Buch her, the stress might therefore be laid at pleasure (a) upon gib and Buch, which would be the regular accentuation, or (b) on das, or (c) on her. §§ 268, 269]. Syllable Division. 173 Some words, when unaccented, have weak forms, but the cases are not nearly so numerous as in English. Exx. er, 'e:r, 'ar, 'er, er; der, de:r, dar, der. And in conversation er is sometimes weakened to r (syllabic), and der in like manner to dr with syllabic r. Intonation. § 268. Little need be said concerning intonation in German, for it follows the same laws as in English. The chief point of difference seems to be one which is very noticeable in the ex- clamation so ! It is amusing to English people to observe the variety of feelings which can be expressed in German by this one little monosyllable, by varying its intonation, and as it were singing a little tune upon it. Prof. Vietor observes that when monosyllables such as ja, so, wie, are used to represent a whole sentence, all the intonation of that sentence may be given in a single syllable. Syllable Division. § 269. Germans divide their syllables in the same way as the English, as far as speech is concerned, but when a con- sonant belongs equally to the syllables before and after, as in leidend, and yet an artificial division must be made, they divide thus : — lei-dend, whilst in similar cases we divide as follows ; — ■ lead-ing. XI. SYMBOLIZATION OF GEKMAN SOUNDS. Symbols used for the Consonants. § 270. The use of some of the consonant symbols has been shown already (§ 237), but a few more explanations are needed : (1) to account for some variety in the symbols used for the same sounds ; (2) to help students to determine what sound is expressed by a doubtful symbol; and (3) to guard against some common mistakes. § 271. Doubled Letters, and the combinations ck, tz, serve to indicate that the preceding vowel is short, as in fett, Lamm, Mann, voll, Narr, Schiff, dick, Satz. The distinction between the doubled letter ss (ff) and the symbol fs (£), which is not reckoned as a double letter, is not usually shown when German is printed in Eoman characters, ss being used for both. We find long vowels before fs when that symbol is retained in the inflected forms of the word, e.g., in Fufs, pi. Filfse. But as fs is regularly substituted for ss at the end of words, we meet with fs after short vowels also, e.g., in Nufs, "a nut". In these cases the infected forms of the word are written with ss, thus : — pi. Niisse. § 272. b, d, g, used for Hard Sounds. We have already observed that at the end of a word these are used for p, t and C or x. 1 Note that g = g 1 after a front vowel or a consonant, as in Sieg, Berg, and x l after a back vowel, as in Tag, zog. These letters are also reckoned final and pronounced as 1 Or k (stage pronunciation) instead of q and x« — Ed. (174) § 273.] Symbols used for the Consonants. lib hard sounds whenever they are not initial, and are followed by a liquid not belonging to the stem, or by any other consonant. So b is pronounced p in liebt, "loves," iiblich, "customary". d stands for t in handlich, "handy," and g for q 1 in regsam, " active," and for x 1 in Wagnis, " perilous enterprise ", But in ilbler, " worse," as the 1 belongs to the stem, b is not pronounced p, but b. § 273. The rest of the doubtful symbols, arranged alpha- betically, are : — c. 1. = ts before front vowels, as in Officier. 2. = k in other cases, as in Cognac. cc. 1. = kts before front vowels, as in Accent ('aktsent), "accent ". 2. = k before back vowels, as in Accord ('akort), " accord ". ch. 1. = Q after front vowels and consonants, as in ich, "I," solch, " such," and always in the ending chen, as in Mamachen, " dear mamma ". Also initial in Chemie, "chemistry," China, "China," and some other foreign words. 2. = ch after back vowels, as in ach. 3. = k when followed by radical S, as in Fuchs, " fox," sechs, " six," etc. Also in Chor, "choir," Chronik, "chronicle," and a few other foreign words. 4. = sh in Chance, "chance," Chef, "principal," and some other words borrowed from French. 9- 1. = g, initial, and when beginning the primarily accented syllable in foreign words, as in gut, " good," regieren, " reign ". 1 Or k (stage pronunciation) instead of g and x. — Ed. 176 Symbolization of German Sounds. [§ 273. 2. = j, 1 medial after front vowels and consonants, as in Siege, "victories," Berge, " mountains," regnen, "rain". 3. = g, 1 medial, after back vowels, as in Tage, "days," zogen, "drew". 4. = zh, initial, and medial in some loan words, as in arran- gieren, "arrange," Genie, "genius," "ingenuity". 5. = §, 2 final, after front vowels and consonants, as in Sieg, Berg, regsam. 6 = x, 2 final, after back vowels, as in Tag, zog, Wagnis. h. Pronounced h, or used as part of a digraph, such as ah, e\ ch, th, or of the trigraph sch. i. Often pronounced j, instead of i, in unaccented syllables in such words as Familie (famr.lje), Spanien (shpa:njen). 1. = j, as in/a. 2. = zh in some loan words, e.g., Jalousie, Journal (zhurna:l). n. 1. = n, as in nie, an. 2. = ng before k, as in sinken, Dank. 3. In French loan words in &n, on, etc., to show that the preceding vowel is nasal. See also under ng. ng. Pronounced as a single sound, ng, as in singen, lang. Barely ngg in foreign words, e.g., Kongo, " Congo ". s. 1. = z, initial before vowels, and medial, as in so, Bose, winsle. 1 Or g (stage pronunciation). — Ed. 2 Or k (stage pronunciation). — Ed. § 274.] Symbols used for the Consonants. Ill 2. = s, initial before consonants, and final, as in Skizze, Hals, ist. 3. = sh, initial in the combinations sp and st, and so also when preceded by German prefixes, as in sprechen, stehen, besprechen, verstehen. t. 1. = t, as in Tau, warten, mit. 2. = ts in words originally Latin, before unaccented i fol- lowed by an accented vowel, as in Nation, Patient. th. Always pronounced t. In German words it occurs by trans- position to show that the vowel next to it is long, as in Thai for "Tahl," cp. Zahl. v. After q pronounced y, or by many persons as a simple lip continuant. Symbols used for the Vowels. § 274. The symbols commonly used to represent the German vowels are shown in § 248. It will be seen there that the symbols a, a, e, i, o, u, 6,u, ie, may be used to represent long or short vowels, and that e has three values, namely long e: in schwer, short a infest, and unaccented e in Gebote. I propose to give here only the general rules for determin- ing the value of these symbols. A full statement of the rules and exceptions will be found in Vietor's German Pronunciation. The symbols a, a, e, i, o, u, o, u, are used to represent long vowels when they occur (1) in open syllables, that is, when they are not followed by a consonant in the same syllable, and (2) when, in a final syllable, they are followed by one consonant only. In other cases they are short. Exx. : — a laden (a:) war (a:) warten (a) a saen (a:) Bar (a:) Hande (a) 12 178 Symbolization of German Sounds. [§ 274. e BBde (e:) schwer (e:) /es£ (a) i Igel (i:) mir (i:) j^is^e (i) Bose (o:) Ge6o£ (o:) homm (o) u rufen (u:) gut (u:) Mutter (u) ode (o:) sc/ww (6:) Morder (6) u milde (ti:) fur (u:) Hutte (ii) e stands for unaccented e in the unaccented prefixes fre and ge, and in the unaccented derivative or inflectional suffixes e, el, em, en, end, er, em, es, est, et, as in habe, "have," Vogel, "bird," Atem, "breath," lieben, "love," rasend, "furious," Vater, "father," eisern, "iron," alles, "all," leidet, "suffers". e has the same sound in der, dem, den, des, es, when they are unaccented. ie stands for short i in Viertel, vierzehn, vierzig. In other cases it represents long i:, as in sie, Liebe. PAET II BEADING LESSONS AND EXEECISES PHONETIC READING BOOK (ENGLISH, FBENCH AND GERMAN) WITH Exercises BY LAUEA SOAMES XonDon SWAN SONNENSCHEIN & CO., Lim. NEW YORK : THE MACMILLAN CO. 1899 SPELING LESN'Z. 1 I. Nine Consonants with e, i, o, u. et it on pot kid gud big men eb in pet put kod nuk bog king e g od pit bed kud II. kuk Tom gong Consonants to dh. il rok wet fil pith thik if ruk thin ful widh lok ov when dhen bul fit luk rek wen dhem def fut pul rik whet fel III. giv wud wul Bemaining Consonants. iz woz shud yel chik ech rich dhis wosh shuk hiz huk ej hej pus dish yes his Jon which loj sez push yet chin Jim wich push IV. Bemaining Short Accented Vowels — ce, se. Script Forms (%} % cep 83Z keep raeg dcev raesh Maej 03S aesh keep thoem haev push goesh set bcek bced dhaen dhoes moech bush sed baek baed soeng pus maech doel gem buk roeg saeng roesh joej pul See Introduction to Phonetics, § 180. (5) Speling Lesn'z. V. Unaccented Vowels — a, and ending ar. amid abaesh vila dolar kcelar abaek ataech Bela milar maenar ataek amaes iEna roedar maetar amceng amis Hasna goenar moedhar abcev ahed kolar VI. fular soemar Weak Words. Unaccented i and o\ a dhaet dhi orinj pri-tend an tu (to) dha ncets si-lekt and tuw (two, too) poet: L pro'tekt dhi a maen foli windo' dha an oks full folo' dhat pen and ingk ri-zist folo'ing VII. Long Vowels — a, ey, i, 6, ow, u. pam _dhey hi poz now hu kam o'bey mt pot gow du ban peyl si 16 sow shti kat peys fil dro bowl riid A ar eyt pis for bowt rul far geyt mashin nor kowt but VIII. Long Vowels- -oe, e. boen feri fadhar ripe'ring riko's toen heri matar dispe'rin g poshan doet Meri riga'd deyzi mowing hoet dering bazar steyshan L mowshan woed wering ritoen pisful rular Poeshan tering dizoev disi'v truthful Speling Lesn'z. IX. Diphthongs — ai, au, oi, yu. baid praiing hau join joiing nyu bait flaiing nau chois cloiing fyu krai haus bauing boi dytik yAni'k flai maus alauing joi dyuti yunait X. Diphthongs — ea, ia, 6a, ua. wear dhear riar doar hoar pear hear fiaz moar pilar whear iar siar roaz tuaz ear piar hiar soaz dtiar teaz tiaz oar (oar, ore) woar milar deaz diar or (or) foar (four, fore) wtiar keaz miar poar for (for) shuar rear niar toar nor (nor) bruar BIDING LESN'Z— PKOWZ. I. Dha Foks and dha Gowt. A Foks hsed folan J intu a wel, and heed bin kasting abaut for a long taim hau hi shud get aut agen • 2 when set length a Gowt keym tu dha pleys, and wonting tu dringk, ast Eenad whedhar dha wotar woz gud, and if dhear woz plenti ov it. Dha Foks, disenabling dha rial deynjar ov hiz keys, riplaid, " Koem daun, mai frend; dha wotar iz sow gud dhat ai kaenot dringk ancef 3 ov it, and sow aboendant dhat it kaenot bi igzo'- stid." Apon dhis dha Gowt, widhaut eni moar adu, lept in; when dha Foks, teyking advantij ov hiz frendz honz, aez nimbli lept aut ; and kulli rima'kt tu dha puar dilyu'did Gowt, "If yu hsed haf sez moach breynz sez yti hsev biad, yu wud haev lukt bifo'ar yu lept." II. Dha Maizar. A Maizar, tu meyk shuar ov his propati, sowld 61 dhat hi haed and kanvoetid it intu a greyt losmp ov gowld, which hi hid in a howl in dha graund, and went kantinyuali to vizit and inspekt it. Dhis rauzd dha kyuariositi ov ween ov hiz woek- man, hu, saspekting dhat dhear woz a trezhar, when hiz mastaz baek woz toend, went tu dha spot, and stowl it awey. When dha Maizar ritoend, and faund dha pleys emti, hi wept, and toar hiz hear. Beet a neybar hu so him in dhis ikstrae'va- gant grif, and loent dha koz ov it, sed, "Fret yoself 4 now longgar, boat teyk a stown and put it in dha seym pleys, and thingk dhat it iz yor lcemp ov gowld ; for sez yu nevar ment tu ytiz it, dha ween wil du yu aaz mcech gud aaz dhi oedhar." Dha woeth ov mceni iz not in its po'zeshan, 5 beet in its yus. Alternative forms : — 1 foln / . 2 ageyn. 3 inoe'f. 4 yaself. 5 pazeshan. (8) Dha Hilar, hiz Seen, and dhear As. 9 III. Dha Kok and dha Juil. Mz a Kok woz skraeching oap dha stro in a fam-yad, in soech oy ftid for dha henz, hi hit apon a Ju.il dhat bai seem chans haed faund its'wey dhear. "How!" sed hi, " yu. ar a veri fain thing, now daut, tu dhowz hu praiz yu ; boat giv mi a bali-kon bifo'ar 61 dha poelz in dha woeld." Dha Kok woz a sensibl' Kok : boat dhear ar meni sili pipl' hu dispaiz whot iz preshas ownli bikoz 1 dhey kaenot cenda- stse'nd it. IV. Dha Kr^eb and hoer Moedhar. Sed an owld Krseb tu a yoeng woan, " Whai du yu wok sow krukid, chaild? wok streyt ! " " Moadhar," sed dha yoeng krseb, "show mi dha wey, wil yu? and when ai si yu teyking a streyt kos, ai wil trai and foloV Igza'mpl' 2 iz betar dhsen prisept. V. Dha Milar, hiz Scen, and dhear As. A Milar and hiz Seen woer draiving dhear As tu a ney- baring fear tu sel him. Dhey hsed not gon 3 far when dhey met widh a trup of goelz ritoening from dha taun, toking and lafing. " Luk dhear!" kraid woen ov dhem ; "did yu evar si soech fulz, tu bi trcejing along dha rowd on fut, when dhey mait bi raiding! " Dhi owld msen, hiaring dhis, kwaiatli baed hiz Seen get on dhi As, and wokt along merili bai dha said ov him. Prezantli dhey keym osp tu a grtip ov owld men in oenist dibeyt. " Dhear ! " sed woen ov dhem, " it prtivz whot ai woz a-seying. Whot rispekt iz shown tu owld eyj in dhiz deyz ? Du yu si dhaet aidl' yoeng rowg raiding, whail hiz owld fadhar Alternative forms : — 1 biko'z. 2 egza'mpl' 3 gon. 10 Biding Lesriz — Prowz. haez tu wok? — Get daun, yu skeypgreys ! and let dhi owld maen rest hiz wiari limz." Apon dhis dha Fadhar meyd hiz So3n dismaunt, and got oep himself. In dhis maenar dhey haed not pro'sidid far when dhey met a koempani ov wimin and childran. " Whai, ju. leyzi owld felo' ! " kraid sevral tosngz set woens, " hau kaen yu raid apon dha bist, whail dhaet piiar litl' laed dhear kaen hadli kip peys bai dha said ov yu." Dha gud- neychad Milar stud karektid, and imi'jitli tuk 03p hiz Soen bihaind him. Dhey haed nau olmowst richt dha taun. " Prey, onist frend," sed a taunzman, " is dhaet As yor own? " " Yes," sez dhi owld maen. " Ow ! Woen wud not haev thot sow," sed dhi cedhar, " bai dha wey yu lowd him. Whai, yu tu felo'z ar betar eybl' tu kaeri dha puar bist dhaen hi yu ! " " Enithing tu pliz yu," sed dhi owld maen; " wi kaen beet trai." Sow, alaiting widh hiz Soen, dhey taid dhi Asiz legz tagedhar, and bai dha help ov a powl indevad tu kaeri him on dhear showldaz owvar a brij dhat led tu dha taun. Dhis woz sow entateyning a sait dhat dha pipl' raen aut in kraudz tu laf aet it ; til dhi As, not laiking dha noiz nor hiz sityueyshan, kikt asoendar dha kodz dhat baund him, and, toembling of dha powl, fel intu dha rivar. Apon dhis thi owld maen, vekst and asheymd, meyd dha best ov hiz wey howm ageyn 1 — kanvinst dhat bai in- devring 2 tu pliz evribodi hi haed plizd nowbadi, and lost hiz As intu dha bagin. VI. Dha Kcentri Meyd and hoer Milk-K^n. A Koentri Meyd woz woking along widh a kaen ov milk apou hoer hed, when shi fel intu dha folo'ing streyn ov riflekshanz : " Dha mceni for which ai shael sel dhis milk wil ineybl' mi tu inkrl's mai stok ov egz tu thri hoendrad. Dhiz egz, alauing for whot mey pruv aedl', and whot mey bi distroid bai voemin, Alternative forms : — 1 agen. 2 indevaring. Dha Frogz Asking for a King. 11 wil pro'dyus set list tu hoendrad and fifti chikinz. Dha chikinz wil bi fit tu kaeri tu makit joest aet dha taim when powltri iz olwiz 1 diar ; sow dhat bai dha nyti-yoer 2 ai kaenot feyl ov haeving moeni anoef 3 tu poechis a nyu gaun. Grin — let mi kansidar — yes, grin bikoe'mz mai kamplekshan best, and grin it shael bi. In dhis dres ai wil gow tu dha fear, whear 61 dha yoeng felo'z wil straiv tu haev mi for a patnar ; bost now — ai shael rifyu'z evri woen ov dhem, and widh a disdeynful tos 4 toen from dhem." Transpo'tid widh dhis aidi'a, shi kud not fobe'ar 5 aekting widh hoer hed dha thot dhat dhces past in hoer maind ; when daun keym dha kaen ov milk ! and 61 hoer imae'- jinari haepinis vasnisht in a mowmant. VII. Dha Frogz Asking fSb a King. In dha deyz ov owld, when dha Frogz woer 61 aet libati in dha leyks, and haed grown kwait wiari ov folo'ing evri woen hiz own divaisiz, dhey asembl'd woen dey tagedhar, and widh now litl' klaemar pitishand Jupitar tu let dhem haev a King tu kip dhem in betar odar, and meyk dhem lid honistar laivz. Jupitar nowing dha vaeniti od hevar hats, smaild aet dhear rikwest, and thru daun a log intu dha leyk, which bai dha splaesh and kamowshan it meyd, sent dha howl komanwelth intu dha greytist terar and ameyzmant. Dhey roesht cender dha wotar and intu dha meed, and dead not koem widhin ten lips length ov dha spot where it ley. Mt length woen Frog, bowldar dhaen dha rest, venchad tu pop hiz hed aboev dha wotar, and teyk a soervey ov dhear nyu King aet a rispektful distans. Prezantli, when dhey poesi'vd 6 dha log lai stok-stil, cedhaz bigae'n tu swim up to it and araund it, til bai digri'z, growing bowldar and bowldar, dhey aet last lept apon it, and tritid it widh dha greytist kantempt. Disae'tisfaid widh sow teym a rular, dhey fothwith pitishand Alternative forms : — 1 olweyz. 2 yiar. 3 ince'f . 4 tos. 5 f abear. 6 pastvd. 12 Biding Lesn'z — Prowz. Jupitar a sekand taim for anoedhar and moar aektiv King. Apon which hi sent dhem a stok, hu now stinar araivd amoeng dhem dhaen hi bigae'n leying howld ov dhem and divauaring dhem woen bai ween aez fast; aez hi kud, and it woz in veyn dhat dhey indevad tu iskeyp him. Dhen dhey sent Moekyuri widh a praivit mesij tu Jupitar, bisi'ching him dhat hi wud teyk piti on dhem woens moar ; boat Jupitar riplaid dhat dhey woer ownli scefaring dha poenishmant dyu tu dhear foli, and dhat anoedhar taim dhey wud loen tu let wel alown, and not bi disae'tisfaid widh dhear naecharal kandishan. VIII. Dha Kcentei Maus and dha Taun Maus. Woens apon a taim a Koentri Maus hu haed a frend in taun invaitid him, for owld akweyntans seyk, to pey him a vizit in dha koentri. Dhi inviteyshan biing aekseptid in dyu fom, dha Koentri Maus, dhow pleyn and roef and soemwhat frugal in hiz neychar, owpn'd hiz hat and stoar in onar ov hospitaeliti and an owld frend. Dhear woz not a keafuli stod oep mosl' dhat hi did not bring foth aut ov hiz ladar, piz and bali, chizperingz and noets, howping bai kwontiti tu meyk oep whot hi fiad woz wonting in kwoliti, tu syut dha paelat ov hiz deynti gest. Dha Taun Maus, kondisending tu pik a bit hiar and a bit dhear, whail dha howst saet nibling a bleyd ov bali-stro, set length ikskleymd : " Hau iz it, mai gud frend, dhat yu kaen indyu'ar dha doelnis ov dhis oenpolisht laif ? Yti ar living laik a towd in a howl. Yu kant riali prifoer dhiz solitari roks and wudz tu strits timing widh kaerijiz and men. On mai onar, yti ar weysting yor taim mizarabli hiar. Wi moest meyk dha mowst ov laif whail it lasts. A Maus, yu now, doez not liv for evar. Sow koem widh mi, and ai l 1 show yu laif and dha taun." Owvapauad widh soech fain woedz and sow polisht a maenar, dha Koentri Maus aesentid ; 2 and dhey set aut tagedhar on Alternative forms : — 1 wil. 2 asentid. Dhi Asiz Shcedo'. 13 dhear joeni tu taun. It woz leyt in dhi ivning when dhey krept stelthili intu dha siti, and midnait ear dhey richt dha greyt haus, whear dha Taun Maus tuk oep hiz kwotaz. Hiar woer kauchiz ov krimzan velvit, kavingz in aivari ; evrithing in shot dinowtid welth and loekshari. On dha teybl' woer dha rimeynz ov a splendid baengkwit, tu pro'kyuar which 61 dha choisist shops in dha taun haed bin raensaekt dha dey bifo'ar. It woz nau dha toen ov dha kotyar tu pley dha howst ; hi pleysiz hiz koentri frend on poepl', rcenz tti and frow tu saplai 61 hiz wonts, presiz dish apon dish and deynti apon deynti, and, sez dhow hi woer weyting apon a king, teysts evri kos ear hi venchaz tu pleys it bifo'ar hiz rcestik kcezn'. Dha Koentri Maus, for hiz pat, afekts tu meyk himself kwait set howm, and blesiz dha gud fochan dhat hsez rot soech a cheynj in hiz wey ov laif ; when, in dha midst ov hiz injoimant, sez hi iz thingking widh kantempt ov dha puar fear hi haez foseykn', l on a scedn' dha doar flaiz owpn', and a pati ov revl'az ritoening from a leyt entateynmant boests intu dha rum. Dhi afraitid frendz joemp from dha teybl' in dha greytist konstaneyshan and haid dhemselvz 2 in dha foest konar dhey kaen rich. Now sunar du dhey venchar tu krip aut ageyn 3 dhaen dha baking ov dogz draivz dhem baek in stil greytar terar dhaen bifo'ar. 2Et length, when thingz simd kwaiat, dha Koentri Mous stowl aut from hiz haiding-pleys, and biding hiz frend gud-bai, whispad in hiz iar, 4 " Ow, mai gud soer, dhis fain mowd ov living mey du for dhowz hii laik it ; beet giv mi mai bali-bred in pis and sikytiariti bifo'ar dha deyntiist fist whear Fiar and Kear ar in weyting." IX. Dm Asiz Shcedo'. A yuth, woen hot soemaz dey, haiad an As tu kaeri him from ^thinz tu Megara. Mt middey dha hit ov dha soen woz sow skoching, dhat hi dismauntid, and wud haev saet daun tu Alternative forms : — 1 faseykn'. 2 dhamselvz. 3 agen. 4 yoer. 14 Riding Lesn'z — Prowz. A ripowz cendar dha shaedo' ov dhi As. Boet dha draivar ov dhi As dispyii'tid dha pleys widh him, dikle'ring dhat hi haed an ikwal rait tu it widh dhi oedhar. " Whot ! " sed dha yuth, " did ai not haiar dhi As for dha howl joeni ? " " Yes," sed dhi A A. oedhar, "yu haiad dhi As, boet not dhi Asiz shaedo'." Whail dhey woer dhoes raenggling and faiting for dha pleys, dhi As tuk tu hiz hilz and raen awey. X. Dha Mc3Ngki and dha Dolfin. It woz an owld koestam amoeng seylaz tu kaeri abaut widh dhem litl' Moltiz laep-dogz, or moengkiz, tu amytiz dhem on dha voiij ; sow it haepn'd woens apon a taim dhat a maen tuk widh him a Moengki aez a kampaenyan on bod ship. Whail dhey woer of Sunyam, dha feymas promantari ov iEtika, dha ship woz kot in a vaialant stom, and biing kaepsaizd, 61 on bod woer thrown intu dha wotar, and haed tu swim for laend aez best dhey kud. And amoeng dhem woz dha Moengki. A Dolfin so him strcegling, and teyking him for a maen, went tu hiz asistans and boar him on hiz baek streyt for shoar. When dhey haed joest got opazit Pairi'as, dha habar ov iEthinz, dha Dolfin ast dha Moengki if hi woer an Athinyan ? " Yes," ansad dha Moengki, " ashuaridli, and ov ween ov dha foest faemiliz in dha pleys." " Dhen ov kos yu now Pairi'as," sed dha Dolfin. " Ow, yes," sed dha Moengki, hu thot it woz dha neym ov seem distinggwisht sitizn' ; " hi iz ween ov mai mowst inti- mit frendz." Indignant aet sow grows a disi't and folsud, dha Dolfin daivd tu dha botam, and left dha laiing Moengki tu hiz feyt. XI. Dha Wind and dha Scen. A dispyti't woens arowz bitwi'n dha Wind and dha Seen, which woz dha stronggar ov dha tu, and dhey agrid tu put dha point apon dhis isyti, dhat whichevar sunist meyd a traevl'ar Dha Foks widhdut a Teyl. 15 teyk of hiz klowk, shud bi akauntid dha moar pauaful. Dha Wind bigae'n, and blu widh 61 hiz mait and meyn a blast, kowld and fias sez a Threyshan stom ; beet dha stronggar hi blu dha klowsar dha traevl'ar raept hiz klowk arannd him, and dha taitar hi graspt it widh hiz haendz. Dhen browk aut dha Seen ; widh hiz welkam bimz hi dispoest dha veypar and dha kowld ; dha trsevl'ar felt dha jinyal womth, and sez dha Seen shon braitar and braitar, hi saet daun, owvakce'm widh dha hit, and kast hiz klowk on dha graund. Dhces dha Seen woz dikle'ad dha kongkarar ; and it haez evar bin dimd dhat poesweyzhan J iz betar dhaen fos ; and dhat dha scenshain ov a kaind and jentl' maenar wil sunar ley owpn' a puar maenz hart dhaen 61 dha thretningz and fos ov blcestaring 2 othoriti. XII. Dha Foks widh/ut a Teyl. A Foks biing kot in a traep, woz glaed tu kampaund for hiz nek bai living hiz teyl bihaind him ; beet apon koeming abrod intu dha woeld, hi bigae'n tu bi sow sensibl' ov dha disgreys seech a difekt wud bring apon him, dhat hi olmowst wisht hi haed daid radhar dhaen koem awey widhaut it. Hau6var, rizolving tu meyk dha best ov a baed maetar, hi kold a miting ov dha rest ov dha foksiz, and pro'powzd dhat 61 shud folo' hiz igza'mpl'. " Yu haev now nowshan," sed hi, " ov dhi iz and koemfat widh which ai nau muv abaut ; ai kud nevar haev bili'vd it if I haed not traid it maiself ; 3 beet, riali, when ween koemz tu rizn' apon it, a teyl iz seech an cegli, inkanvi'nyant, cennesisari apendij, dhat dhi ownli wcendar iz dhat, aez foksiz, wi kud haev put oep widh it sow long. Ai pro'powz, 4 dhearfor, mai woedhi bredhrin, dhat yu 61 profit bai dhi ikspi'rians dhat ai aem mowst wiling tu aford yu, and dhat 61 foksiz from dhis dey fowad koet of dhear teylz." Apon dhis ween ov dhi owldist Alternative forms : — 2 pasweyzhan. 2 bloestring. 3 miself. 4 prapowz. 16 Biding Lesn'z — Prowz. stept fowad and sed, "Ai radhar thingk, mai frend, dhat yii wud not haev advaizd oes tu pat widh auar teylz if dhear woer eni chans ov rikoe'varing yor own." EIliz tu Plants. In dha reyn ov Kwin Ilizabath, tu plants woer brot tu Inggland, for dha foest taim, bai Soer Woltar Bali, bowth ov which ar nau veri mcech yiizd — dha tabaeko'-plant and dha pateyto'. Soer Woltar haed seyld akros dha siz tu Amerika, in soech ov nyu laendz, and hi brot baek bowth dhiz plants widh him. When hi woz in Amerika, hi haed sin dhi Indyanz smowk, and bifo'ar long hi akwaiad dha haebit himself. Hi bikeym ikstri'mli fond ov smowking, and frikwantli indceljd in dha praektis. When hi ritoend tu Inggland, hi woz siting bai dha faiar woen dey, and bigae'n tu smowk. In dha midl' ov hiz smowking, dha doar owpn'd, and in keym hiz maen-soevant. Nau dhis maen haed nevar in hiz laif sin eni woen smowk, and did not now dhat dhear woz soech a plant aez tabaeko'. Sow when hi so dha smowk koeming from hiz mastaz mauth, hi thot dhat hi woz on faiar ! Hi kraid aut in alam, raen tu fech a boekit ov wotar tu put dha faiar aut : and Soer Woltar woz delyujd bifo'ar hi haed taim tu ikspleyn whot hi woz riali diiing. Beet veri sun dhi owld soevant got yust tu siing pipl' widh smowk koeming aut ov dhear maudhz ; and 61 dha yoeng nowbl'z ov dha kot bigae'n tu smowk bikoz Soer Woltar did sow. iEt foest pipl' did not laik dha pateyto' aet 61; nowbadi wud it it. Yet Soer Woltar towld dhem hau yusful it wud bi. Dha pateyto', hi sed, kud bi meyd tu grow in Inggland. Hi towld dhem dhat, when dha kon-havist feyld — which it 6fn' yust tu du — pipl' nid not stav if dhey haed plenti ov pateyto'z. Kwin Ilizabath, hu woz a veri klevar wuman, lisn'd tu whot Soer Woltar sed, and haed pateyto'z soevd cep aet hoer own A Boiz Advenchaz amceng dha Si-Keyvz. 17 teybl'. Dh6ar dha graend pipF hu daind widh hoer maBJisti woer o'blaijd J tu It dhem. Beet dhey spred a ripo't dhat dha pateyto' woz poizn'as, bikoz it bilongz tu dha seym odar aez dha dedli naitsheyd and meni cedhar poizn'as plants. Sow in spait ov 61 dhat dha Kwin kud du, now ween wud It pateyto'z, and dhey woer left for dha pigz. Dha pipl* did not faind aut dhear misteyk til meni yoez 2 aftawadz. Dha puar pateyto' woz dispaizd and fdrgotn' 3 til dha reyn ov dha French 4 King Luis XVI., when dhear livd a Frenchman hu haed meyd a stcedi ov growing plants for fud. Hi felt shuar dhat hi kud meyk dha pateyto' a greyt blesing tu dha koentri; and hi bigae'n set weens tu trai. Aftar a greyt dil ov troebl' hi saksidid. Pipl' laft aet him aet foest, and wud not teyk eni nowtis ov whot hi sed. Boat hi went on growing dha pateyto' til hi brot it tu poefekshan. 5 Ivn' dhen now woen wud haev itn' it, if its pat haed not bin teykn' bai dha king. Hi haed laj pisiz ov graund plantid widh pateyto'z, and went abaut widh dha flauar ov dha pateyto in hiz bcetn'-howl. Now woen dead tu laf aet dha king, and when hi sed dhat pateyto'z woer tu bi itn', pipl' bigae'n tu faind aut hau gud and howlsam dhey wcer. Bai digri'z dha pateyto' woz moar and moar laikt; and nau dhear iz hadli eni vejitabl' dhat iz moar haili isti'md. A Boiz Advenchaz amceng dha SI-Keyvz. A Teyl of dha Kromati Kowst. From Mai SkUlz and ShUlmaastaz, dhi 6to'bai6grafi ov Hyu Milar, dha selibreytid jiolajist, hu woz twelv yoez 6 owld when hi haed dhis streynj advenchar. It woz on a plezant spring moning dhat, widh mai litl' kytiarias frend bisaid mi, ai stud on dha bich opazit dhi istan Alternative forms : — a ablaijd. 2 yiaz. s fagotn'. * Prensh. 5 pafekshan. 6 yiaz. 2 18 Biding Lesn'z — Prowz. promantari, dhat widh its stoen grsenitik wol, baz aekses for ten deyz aut ov evri foti'n l tu dha wcendaz ov dha Dukot ; and so it streching pro'vowkingli aut intu dha grin w6tar. It woz had tu bi disapointid, and dha keyvz sow niar. Dha taid woz a low nip, and if wi wontid a psesij drai-shod, it bihu'vd oes tu weyt for set list a wik • boat nidhar 2 ov oes oandastud dha filosafi ov nip-taidz set dhset piari'ad. Ai woz kwait shuar ai hted got raund set low wotar widh mai cengkl'z not a greyt meni deyz bifo'ar, and wi bowth infoed dhat if wi boet saksidid in geting raund nau, it wud bi kwait a plezhar tu weyt amceng dha keyvz insaid, centil 3 soech taim sez dha fol ov dha taid shud ley bear a psesij for aur ritoen. A nsero' and browkn' shelf rcenz along dha promantari, on which, bai dhi assistans ov dha neykid fit, it iz joest posibl' tu krip. Wi saksidid in skrsembling oep tu it, and dhen, kroling cepwadz on 61 foz — dha presipis, sez wi pro'sidid, bitling moar and moar fomidabl' from aboev, and dha wotar bikoe'ming grinar and dipar bilow — wi richt dhi autar point ov dha pro- mantari ; and dhen, doebling dha keyp on a stil nsero'ing majin — dha wotar, bai a rivoes proses, bikce'ming shaelo'ar and less grin aez wi advanst inwads — wi faund dha lej toemineyting jcest whear, aftar kliaring dha si, it owvahoe'ng dha grsevl'i bich set an eliveyshan ov niali ten fit. Adaun wi bowth dropt, praud ov aur sakses — cep splaesht dha rsetling graevl' sez wi fel, and for set list dha howl koeming wik, dhow wi woer oenawe'ar ov dhi ikstent ov auar gud-loek set dha taim, dha mavl'z ov dha Dukot Keyv mait bi riga/did sez sowlli and iksklu'sivli auar own. For woen shot sevn' deyz, tu boro' emfasis from dha freyziolaji ov Kalail, " dhey woer auar own and now cedhar msenz." Dha foest ten auaz woer auaz ov shiar injoimant. Dha lajar keyv prtivd a main of mavl'z \ and wi faund a greyt dil adisha- nal tu wcendar set on dha slowps bini'th dha presipisiz, and Alternative forms: — 1 fo'tin. 2 naidhar. 3 oe'ntil. A Boiz Advenchaz amceng dha Si-Keyvz. 19 along dha pis ov roki si-bich in frcent. Wi saksidid in dis- kce'varing l for auselvz bai kriping, dwof-bushiz dhat towld ov dha Waiting infiu'ansiz ov dha si-sprey, dha peyl yelo' hoenisoekr, dhat wi haed nevar sin bifoar seyv in gadn'z and shroebariz, and on a dipli-sheydid slowp dhat lind agenst 2 woen ov dha stipar presipisiz, wi ditektid dha swit-sentid wudroef ov dha flauar- plot and pate'ar widh its delikit whait flauaz and priti livz, dhat bikoe'm dha moar owdarifaras dha moar dhey ar kroesht. Dhear tu, imi'jitli in dhi owpning ov dha dipar keyv, whear a smol strim keym paetaring in ditae'cht drops from dhi owvar- bitling presipis aboev, laik dha foest drops ov a hevi thcendar- shauar, wi faund dha hot, bitar skoevi-gras, which dha greyt Kseptin Kuk yuzd in hiz voyijiz ; aboev 61, dhear woer dha keyvz, widh dhear pijanz, 3 whait, vearigeytid, and blu, and dhear misti'ari'as and gltimi debths, 4 in which plants hadn'd intu stown, and wotar bikeym mabl'. In a shot taim wi hsed browkn' of widh auar haamaz howl pokit fulz ov staelaktaits and petrifaid mos. Dhear wcer litl' ptilz aet dha said ov dha keyv, whear wi kud si dha woek ov konjileyshan gowing on, sez a3t dha kamensmant ov an Oktowbar frost, when dha kowld noth wind beet beali roefl'z dha soefis ov seem maun tin lokan or sloegish mualand strim, and showz dha nyuli-fomd nidl'z ov ais glisning from dha shoz intu dha wotar. Sow raapid woz dha kos ov depazishan, dhat dhear woer keysiz in which dha saidz ov dha holo'z simd growing olmowst in praposhan sez dha wotar rowz in dhem ; dha springz liping owvar, dipozitid dhear mainyu/t kristalz on dhi ejiz, and dha rezavwoz dipn'd and bikeym moar kapeyshas aez dhear maundz woer bilt cep bai dhis kytiarias meysanri. Dha long teliskopic prospikt 5 ov dha spakling si, sez vyud from dhi inar ikstremiti ov dha kaevan, whail 61 araund woz dak sez midnait — dha scedn' glim ov dha si-gcel, sin for a mowmant from dha rises, sez it flitid past in dha soenshain — Alternative forms : — 1 diskce'vring. 2 ageynst. 3 pijinz. 4 depths. 5 prospe kt. 20 Biding Lesn'z — Prowz. dha blaek hiving bcelk ov dha graempas, aez it thru oep its slendar jets ov sprey, and dhen, toening daunwadz, displeyd its glosi baek and vast aengyular fin ; Ivn' dha pijanz, aez dhey shot whizing bai, woen mowmant skeas vizibl' in dha glum, dha nekst reydyant in dha lait — 61 akwaiad a nyu intarist from dha pikytiliaeriti ov dha seting in which wi so dhem. Dhey fomd a siarlz ov scen-gilt vinyets, freymd in jet ; and it woz long ear wi taiad ov siing and admaiaring in dhem mcech ov dha streynj and dha bytitiful. It did sim radhar ominas, hauevar, and pahaeps scemwhot syupanae'charal tu but, dhat abaut an auar aftar nun, dha taid, whail yet dhear woz a ful f aedham ov wotar bini'th dha brau ov dha promantari, sist tu fol, and dhen, aftar a kwotar ov an auaz speys, bigae'n aekchwali tu krip cepwadz on dha bich. Boet joest howping dhat dhear mait bi seem misteyk in dha maetar, which dhi ivning taid wud skeas feyl tu rektifai, wi kantinyud tu amyuz auaselvz, and tu howp on. Auar aftar auar past, length'ning aez dha shaedo'z lengthand, and yet dha taid stil rowz. Dha seen haed scengk bihaind dha presipisiz, and 61 woz glum along dhear beysiz, and dcebl' glum in dhear keyvz ; boet dhear rcegid brauz stil kot dha red glear ov ivning. Dha flcesh rowz haiar and haiar, cheyst bai dha shaedo'z : and dhen, aftar linggaring for a mowmant on dhear krests ov hceniscekl' and junipar, past awey, and dha howl bikeym sombar and grey. Dha si-gcel flaept oepwadz from whear hi haed flowtid on dha ripl', and haid him slowli awey tu hiz loj in hiz dip-si staek ; dha dceski komarant flitid past, widh hevi'ar and moar frikwant strowk, tu hiz whaitn'd shelf on dha presipis ; dha pijanz keym whizing daunwadz from dhi ceplandz and dhi opazit laend, and disapi'ad amid dha glum ov dhear keyvz; evri krichar dhat haed wingz meyd ytis ov dhem in spiding howmwadz, beet nidhar 1 mai kampaenyan nor maiself 2 haed eni, and dhear woz now posibiliti ov geting howm widhaut dhem. A Iternative forms : — l naidhar. 2 mis^lf . A Boiz Advenchaz amceng dha Si-Keyvz. 21 Wi meyd desparit efats tu skeyl dha presipisiz, and on tu sevaral x akeyzhanz saksidid in riching midwey shelvz amoeng dha kraegz, whear dha perigrin-folkan and dha reyvn' bild ; beet dhow wi haed klaimd wel ancef 2 tu rendar auar ritoen a maetar ov bear posibiliti, dhear woz now posibiliti whoteVar ov geting fadhar cep — dha klifs haed nevar bin skeyld, and dhey woer not destind tu bi skeyld nau. And sow aez dha twailait dipn'd, and dha prike'ri'as futing bikeym evri mowmant moar dautful and prike'ri'as, wi haed joest tu giv cep in dispe'ar. "Wudn't kear for miself," 3 sed dha puar litl' felo', mai kampaenyan, boesting intu tiaz, "if it woer not for mai 4 mcedhar; beet whot wil mai 4 moedhar sey?" "Wudn't kear nidhar," sed ai, widh a hevi hat; "beet it s jcest baekwotar, and wi l 5 get aut aet twelv." Wi ritri'tid tagedhar intu ween ov dha shaelo'ar and draiar keyvz, and kliaring a litl* spot ov its reef stownz, and dhen growping along dha roks for dha drai gras, dhat in dha spring sizan haengz from dhem in widhad tcefts, wi fomd for auaselvz a mowst cenkce'mfatabr bed, and ley daun in ween ancedhaz amz. For dha last fyu auaz mauntinas pailz ov klaudz haed bin raizing, dak and stomi in dha si-mauth, and dhey haed flead pot^ntasli in dha seting seen, and haed won, widh dha diklain ov ivning, olmowst evri mitiorik tint ov aenggar, from faiari red tu a sombar thcendaras braun, and from sombar braun tu dowlful blaek, and wi kud nau, aet list, hiar whot dhey p6- t6ndid, dhow wi kud now longgar si. Dha raizing wind bigae'n tu haul monfuli amid dha klifs, and dha si, hidhatu sow sailant, tu bit hevili agenst 6 dha shoar, and tu bum, laik distr^s gcenz, from dha risesiz ov dha tu dip-si keyvz. Wi kud hiar, tu, dha biting reyn, nau hevi'ar, nau laitar, aez dha gcests sweld or saengk; and dhi intamitant paetar ov dha strimlit owvar dha dipar keyv, nau draiving agenst 6 dha pre- sipisiz, nau disending hevili on dha stownz. Alternative forms : — 1 sevral. Mnce'f. 8 mais£lf. *mi. 5 wil. 6 ageynst. 22 Biding Lesn'z — Prowz. Tuwo'dz 1 midnait dha skai kliad, and dha wind fel, and dha mun in hoer last kwotar rowz red aez a mas ov hitid aian aut ov dha si. Wi krept daun in ahi oensoetin lait, owvar dha roef slipari kraegz, tu aesateyn whedhar dha taid haed not foln' safishantli far tu yild oes a paesij, boat wi faund dha weyvz cheyflng amoeng dha roks, joest whear dha taid-lain haed restid twelv auaz bifo'ar, and a ful faedham ov si inkla'sping dha beys ov dha promantari. A glimaring aidi'a ov dha rial neychar ov auar sityueyshan aet length krost mai maind. It woz not imprizamant for a taid tu which wi haed kansaind auaselvz ; it woz imprizanmant for a wik. Dhear woz litl' kcernfat in dha thot, araizing, aez it did, amid dha chilz and teraz ov a driari midnait, and ai lukt wistfuli on dha si aez auar ownli path ov iskeyp. Dhear woz a vesl' krosing dha weyk ov dha mun aet dha taim, skeas haf a mail from dha shoar, and asistid bai mai kampaenyan, ai bigae'n tu shaut aet dha top ov mai lcengz, in dha howp ov biing hoed bai dha seylaz. Wi so hoer dim boelk foling slowli athwot dha red glitaring belt ov lait dhat haed rendad hoer vizibl', and dhen disapi'aring in dha moeki blaeknis ; and joest aez wi lost sait ov hoer for evar, wi kud hiar an indistingkt saund mingling widh dha daesh ov dha weyvz — dha shaut in riplai ov dha statl'd helmzman. Dha vesl', aez wi aaftawadz loent, woz a laj stown-laitar, dipli leydn', and oanfoenisht widh a bowt ; nor woer hoer krti aet 61 shuar dhat it wud haev bin seyf tu atend tu dha midnait vois from amid dha roks, ivn' haed dhey dha minz ov kamyuni- keyshan widh dha shoar. Wi weytid on and on, hauevar, nau shauting bai toenz, and nau shauting tagedhar, boat dhear woz now sekand riplai ; and aet length luzing howp, w r i growpt auar wey baek tu auar koemfatlis bed, joest aez dha taid haed agen 2 toend on dha bich, and dha weyvz bigae'n tu rowl oepwadz, haiar and haiar aet evri daesh. Mz dha mun rowz and braitn'd, ai haed saksidid in droping Alternative forms : — a todz. 2 ageyn. Dha Diskantentid Pendyulam. 23 aez saundli aslip aez mai kampaenyan, when wi woer bowth arauzd bai a laud shaut. Wi statid cep, and agen krept daun- wadz amoeng dha kraegz tu dha shoar, and asz wi richt dha si, dha shaut woz ripi'tid. It woz thaet ov a3t list a doezn hash voisiz yunaitid. Dhear woz a brif poz, folo'd bai ancedhar shaut, and dhen tu bowts, strongli maend, shot raund dha westan promantari, and shautid yet ageyn. Dha howl taun haed bin alamd bai dhi intelijans dhat tu. litl' boiz haed straegl'd awey in dha moning tu dha roks ov dha soedhan Syutor, and haed not faund dhear wey bask. Dha presipisiz haed bin a sin ov fraitful aeksidants from taim imimo'ri'al, and it wcez aet woens infoed dhat woen oedhar saed aeksidant haed bin aedid tu dha noembar. Tru, dhear woer keysiz rimembad ov pipl' haeving bin taid-baund in dha Dtikot keyvz, and not mcech woes in konsikwans, boet aez dha keyvz woer inaeksesibl' ivn' dyuaring nips, wi kud not, it woz sed, posibli bi in dhem ; aend dha sowl rimeyning graund ov howp woz, dhat aez haed haepn'd woens bifo'r, ownli woen ov da tu haed bin kild, and that dhi soevaivar woz linggaring amoeng dha roks, afreyd tu koem howm. And in dhis bili'f, when dha mun rowz, and dha soef fel, dha tu bowts haed bin fitid aut. It woz leyt in dha moning ear wi richt Kromati, beet a kraud on dha bich aweytid auar araivl' ; and dhear woer angshas-luking laits glansing in dha windo'z, thik and maeni- fowld ; ney, soech woz dhi intarist ilisitid, dhat soem ino'masli baed voes, in which dha raitar diskraibd dhi insidant a fyu. deyz aftar, bikeym popyular anoef x tu bi haendid abaut in maenyuskript, and red aet ti-patiz bai dhi eyli't ov dha tun. Dha Diskantentid Pendyulam. An owld klok dhat haed stud for fifti yoez 2 in a famaz kichin, widhaut giving its ownar eni koz ov kampleynt, oeli ween soemaz moning, bifo'ar dha faemili woz stoering, soedn'li stopt. Apon dhis dha daial-pleyt (if wi mey kredit dha feybl') cheynjd Alternative forms: — x inoe'f. 2 yiaz. 24 Biding Lesn'z — Prowz. kauntinans widh alam, dha haendz meyd an inifektywal l efat tu kantinyu dhear kos, dha whilz rimeynd mowshanlis widh sapraiz, dha weyts hoeng splchlis, ich membar felt dispowzd tu ley dha bleym on dhi oedhaz. Mt length dha daial instityutid a fomal inkwaiari intu dha koz ov dha stop, when haendz, whilz, weyts, widh ween vois, pro'testid dhear ino'sans ; 2 beet nau a feynt tik woz hoed bilow from dha pendyulam, hu dhoss spowk: " Ai kanfes maiself 3 tu bl dha sowl koz ov dha prezant stopij, and ai aem wiling, for dha jenaral saetisfaekshan, tu asain mai rizn'z. Dha truth iz, dhat ai aem taiad ov tiking." Apon hiaring dhis, dhi owld klok bikeym sow inreyjd, dhat it woz on dha veri point ov straiking. " Leyzi waiar ! " iks- kleymd dha daial-pleyt. " Mz tu dhaet," riplaid dha pendyu- lam, " it iz vastli izi for yu, Mistris Daial, hu haev olwiz, aez evribodi nowz, set y6self cep aboev mi — it iz vastli izi for yu, ai sey, tu akyuz cedhar pipl' ov leyzinis — yu, hu haev haed noething tu du 61 dha deyz ov yor laif boat tu stear pipl' in dha feys, and tu amyuz yoself widh woching 61 dhat gowz on in dha kichin ! Thingk, ai bisi'ch yu, hau yu wud laik tu bi shoet cep for laif in dhis dak klozit, and waeg baekwadz and fowadz, yoer 4 aftar yoer, 4 aez ai du." M Whai," sed dha daial, "iz dhear not a windo' in yor haus on poepas for yu tu luk thru? " " For 61 dhaet," rizyu'md dha pendyulam, "oldhow dhear iz a windo', ai dear not stop, ivn' for an instant, tu luk aut. Bisaidz, ai aem riali taiad ov mai wey ov laif ; and, if yu pliz, ai 1 5 tel yu hau ai tuk dhis disgee'st aet mai imploimant. Dhis moning, ai haepn'd tu bi kaelkyuleyting hau meni taimz ai shud haev tu tik in dha k6s ownli ov dha nekst foar-and-twenti auaz — pahaeps seem ov yu aboev dhear kaen giv mi dhi igzae'kt seem." Dha minit haend, biing kwik aet figaz, instantli riplaid, " Eyti-siks thauzand foar hcendrad taimz." A Iternative forms : — x inif ekchwal. 2 inasn's. 3 mis^lf . ( 4 yiar. — Ed.) 5 wil. Dha Diskantentid Pendyulam. 25 " Igzae'kli sow," riplaid dha pendyulam ; " wel, ai apil tu yu 61, if dha veri thot ov dhis woz not anoef l tu fatig ween ; and when ai bigse'n tu moeltiplai dha strowks ov ween dey bai dhowz ov mcenths and yoez, 2 riali it iz now wcendar if ai felt diskce'rijd aet dha prospikt : 3 sow aftar a greyt dil ov rizn'ing and heziteyshan, thingks ai tu maiself — ai l 4 stop!" Dha daial kud skeasli kip its kauntinans dyuaring dhis haraeng ; boet rizyu'ming its graeviti, dhces riplaid : " Diar Mistar Pendyulam, ai aem riali astonisht dhat seech a yusful indce'stri'as poesn' aez yoself shud haev bin owvakce'm bai dhis sajeschan. It iz tru, yu haev dcen a greyt dil ov woek in yor taim ; sow haev wi 61, and ar laikli tu du, and dhow dhis mey fatig ces tu thingk ov, dha kweschan iz, wil it fatig ces tu du ? Wud yu nau du mi dha feyvar tu giv abaut haf-a-dcezn' strowks tu ilastreyt mai agyumant?" Dha pendyulam kam- plaid, and tikt siks taimz at its yuzhwal peys. "Nau," rizyu'md dha daial, "woz dhaet igzoe'shan fatiging tu yu?" "Not in dha list," riplaid dha pendyulam, "it iz not ov siks strowks dhat ai kampleyn, nor ov siksti, beet ov milyanz." " Veri gud," riplaid dha daial ; " beet rekalekt, dhat oldhow yu mey thingk ov a milyan strowks in an instant, yu ar rikwaiad tu eksikyut beet ween ; and dhat hauevar ofn' yu mey hlara'ftar haev tu swing, a mowmant wil olwiz bl givn' yu tu swing in." " Dhaet kansidareyshan staegaz mi, ai kanfes," sed dha pendyulam. " Dhen ai howp," aedid dha daial-pleyt, " wi shael 61 imi'jitli ritoen tu auar dyuti, for dha meydz wil lai in bed til nun if wi staend aidling dhces." Apon dhis, dha weyts, hu haed nevar bin akyuzd ov lait kondcekt, yuzd 61 dhear influ'ans in oejing him tu pro'sid ; when, aez widh ween kansent, dha whilz bigae'n tu toen, dha haendz bigae'n tu muv, dha pendyulam bigae'n tu swing, and tu its kredit, tikt aez laud aez evar ; whail a bim ov dha raizing Alternative forms : — l inoe'f. 2 yiaz. 3 prospekt. 4 wil. 26 Hiding Lesn'z — Prowz. soen, dhat strimd thru a howl in dha kichin shoetar, shaming ful apon dha daial-pleyt, meyd it braitn' cep aez if ncething haad bin dha maatar. When dha famar keym daun tu brekfast, hi dikle'ad, apon luking set dha klok, dhat hiz woch haed geynd haf an auar in dha nait. — Jane Taylor. Dha Litl' Deozmak-Boi. Ween kowld Disembar moning, abaut dha bigining ov dhis senchari, a French ami woz krosing dhi iElps. Dha men lukt thin and hevi-aid from wont ov fud and slip ; and dha ptiar hosiz dhat woer draaging dha hevi goenz stoambl'd aat olmowst 1 evri step. Boet dhear woz ween in dhaat ami hu simd tu injoi dha roef maching, and hu traampt along thru dha dip snow and kowld grey mist, aaz merili aaz if hi woer gowing tu a piknik. Hi woz a litl' droemar-boi, ten yoez 2 owld, huwz fresh, rowzi feys lukt veri brait and priti amoeng dha grim, skad feysiz ov dhi owld sowljaz. "When dha koeting wind whoeld a shauar ov snow in hiz feys, hi daasht it awey widh a laaf, and awowk dhi eko'z widh dha laivli rsetl' ov hiz droem, til it simd dhat dha hyu/j blaek roks araund woer 61 ringing in koras. " Bravow, litl' droemar ! " kraid a tol maan in a shsebi grey klowk. Dhis ofisar woz maching set dha hed ov dha lain widh a long powl in hiz hasnd, which hi stroek intu dha snow evri nau and then, tu si hau dip it woz. " Bravow, Pyer, mai boi ! Widh soech myuzik aez dheet, woen kud mach 61 dha wey tu Mosko' ! " Dha boi smaild, and reyzd hiz haand tu hiz kaep in salyut ; for dhis reef -luking maan woz now cedhar dhaen dha jenaral him- self — " Faiting Maakdonald," aaz hi woz kold — ween ov dha breyvist sowljaz in Frans, ov hum hiz men ytist tu sey dhat woen sait ov hiz feys in baetl' woz woeth a howl rejimant. Joest dhen a streynj, oenoethli saund woz hoed far awey oep Alternative forms: — a olmowst. 2 yiaz. Dha LitV Droemar-Boi. 27 dha greyt whait mauntin-said. Evri mowmant it grti laudar and hashar, til set length it sweld intu a dip, hos roar. "On yor feysiz, lsedz ! " shautid dha jenaral. " An sevalansh iz koeming." Bifo'ar hiz men hsed taim tu o'bey, dha ruin woz on dhem. Daun thoendad dha trimendas mses ov snow, swiping laik a wotafol along dha nsero' lej-path ; and, kraeshing along widh it, keym hips ov stownz and graevl' and his oeth, and cepru'tid bushiz, and greyt bloks ov ais. For a mowmant 61 woz dak aez nait ; and when dhi sevalansh hsed past meni ov dha breyv felo'z hu hsed bin stsending on dha path woer nowwhear tu bi sin. Dhey hsed bin kserid owvar dha presipis, and woer idhar 1 kild or berid alaiv in dha snow. When dhear woz a chans tu luk araund, woen krai arowz from niali evri mauth : " Wheal iz auar droemar? Whear iz auar litl' droemar-boi ? " 01 set woens, far bilow dhem, aut ov dha dak, cennown goelf dhat ley bitwi'n dhowz frauning roks, arowz dha feynt rowl ov a drcem, biting dha chaj ! Dha sowljaz statid, and bent igali fowad tu lisn'. Dhen went oep a shaut dhat shuk thi ear ! " Hi iz alaiv, koemridz ! Aur Pyer iz alaiv, aftar 61 ! Hi iz biting hiz droem stil, laik a breyv lsed ! Hi wontid tu haev dhi owld myuzik tu dha veri last ! Boat wi moest seyv him, laedz, or hi 1 2 friz tu deth daun dhear. Hi moest bi seyvd ! " " Hi shsel bi ! " browk in a dip vois ; and dha jenaral him- self woz sin stsending on dha bringk ov dha presipis, throwing of hiz klowk. " Now, now, jenaral ! " kraid dha grenadi'az widh woen vois ; " yu moest not rcen soech a risk sez dhset. Let woen ov oes gow insted ; yor laif iz woeth moar dhsen 61 ov auaz put tagedhar ! " " Mai sowljaz ar mai childran," ansad Msekdonald kwaiatli, " and now fadhar groejiz hiz own laif tu seyv hiz seen. Kwik nau, boiz ! Kast lus dha drseg-rowp ov dhset ksenan, lup it cendar mai amz, and let mi daun." Alternative forms : — l aidhar. 2 wil. 28 Biding Lesnz — Prowz. Dha sowljaz o'beyd in sailans ; and dha nekst mowmant dhear breyv, tendar-hatid jenaral woz swinging in mid-ear, daun, daun, til hi vaenisht intu dha kowld, blaek debth 1 bilow. Maekdonald laendid seyfli aet dha fut ov dha presipis, and lukt aengshasli araund in soech ov Pyer; boet dha biting ov dha droem haed sist, and, in dhaet oful sailans, dhear woz ncething tu gaid dha breyv jenaral. "Pyer!" hi shautid, aez laudli aez hi kud, " whear ar yti, mai boi? " " Hiar, jenaral ! " ansad a wik vois. And, shuar anoef, 2 dhear woz dha litl' felo', haf berid in a hylij maund ov soft 3 snow. Maekdonald went tuwodz 4 him at weens, and oldhow hi saengk weyst-dip aet evri step, aet last richt dha spot. 11 01 rait nau, mai breyv boi ! " sed dha jenaral. Tearing of hiz saesh, and noting woen end ov it tu dha rowp, hi baund Pyer and himself foemli tagedhar widh dhi cedhar end, and dhen geyv dha signal tu dro cep. When dha tu keym swinging cep wo3ns moar intu dha dey- lait, and dha sowljaz so dhear pet stil alaiv and oenhoet, chiar apon chiar raeng aut, rowling far baek along dha lain, til dha veri mauntinz dhamselvz 5 simd tu rijois. "Wi v 6 bin cendar fair and oendar snow tagedhar," sed Maekdonald, eheyfing dha boiz kowld haendz tendali, u and ncething shael pat oes aftar dhis, sow long aez wi bowth liv." And dha jenaral kept hiz weed. Yoez 7 leytar, when dha greyt woz woer 61 owvar, dhear mait haev bin sin, woking in dha gadn' ov a kwaiat koentri haus in dha sauth ov Frans, a stuping whait-head owld maen, hu woz now oedhar dhaen dha feymas Mashal Maekdonald ; and dha tol, sowljar-laik felo' apon huz am hi lind fdr sapot haed weens bin litl' Pyer dha droemar. Alternative forms : — x depth. 2 inoe'f. 3 soft. 4 todz. 5 dhemselvz. 6 hsev. 7 ylaz. Dha Jauf. 29 Dha Jauf. From Pcelgreyvz Areybya. A brod dip vaeli, disending lej aftar lej til its inamowst debths 1 ar hidn' from sait amid far-riching shelvz ov redish rok, bil6w evriwhear stoedid widh tcefts ov pam growvz and kloestaring frut-triz in dak- grin paechiz daun tu dha fadhist end ov its waindingz; a laj braun maes ov iregyular meysanri krauning a sentral hil ; biy6nd a tol and solitari tauar owva- liiking dhi opazit baengk ov dha holo', and fadhar daun smol raund toerits and fleet haus-tops haf berid amid dha gadn' fowlyij, dha howl plcenjd in a poepandikyular floed ov lait and hit ; soech woz dha foest aespikt ov dha Jauf aez wi nau aprowcht it from dha west. It woz a loevli sin, and simd yet moar sow tu auar aiz, wiari ov dha long dezo'leyshan thru which wi haed, widh hadli an iksepshan, joenid dey aftar dey sins auar last fearwel glimps ov Geyza and Paelistain oep tu dha foest entrans on inhae'bitid Areybya. " Laik dha Paeradais ov itoeniti, ncen k33n entar it til aftar haeving privyasli past owvar hel-brij," sez an iErab powit, diskraibing soem similar low- kaeliti in ^lljfari'an laendz. Riae'nimeytid bai dha vyu, wi pusht on auar jeydid bists, and woer olredi disending dha foest kraegi slowps ov dha vaeli, when tu hosman, wel drest and fuli amd aftar dha faeshan ov dhiz pats, keym oep tuwod 2 oes from dha taun, and aet woens salyutid oes widh a laud and hati " Marhaba,* 6r " Welkam " ; and widhaut fadhar prefas dhey aedid, "Alait and it," giving dhemselvz 3 dhi igza'mpl, ov dha fomar bai disending briskli from dhear lait limd hosiz, and centaiing a laj ledhar baeg ful ov eksalant deyts, and a wotar-skin, fild from dha roening spring ; dhen spreding aut dhiz mowst opatyun rifreshmants on dha rok, and aeding: " Wi woer shuar dhat yu moest bi hcenggri and thcesti, sow wi haev kcem redi pro'vaidid," dhey invaitid ces weens moar tu sit daun and bigin. * d represents a short vowel corresponding with d ; see § 162. Alternative forms : — 1 depths. 2 t6d. 3 dhamselvz. 30 Biding Lesrtz — Prowz. Dha So'saiiti ov Buks. Yu wil admit, dautlis, dhat akoding tu dha sinseriti ov auar dizaiar dhat auar frendz mey bi tru, and auar kampaenyanz waiz, and in pro'poshan l tu dhi oenistnis and diskreshan widh which wi chuz bowth, wil bi dha jenaral 2 chansiz ov auar haepinis and yusfl'nis. Boat granting dhat wl haed bowth dha wil and dha sens tu chuz auar frendz wel, hau fyu ov ces haev dha pauar ! or, aet list, hau limitid, for mowst, iz dha sfiar ov chois ! Niali 61 auar asowshieyshanz ar ditoemind bai chans or nisesiti, and ristriktid widhin a nasro' soekl'. Wi kaenot now hum wi wud, and dhowz hum wi now wi kaenot haev aet auar said when wi mowst nid dhem. 01 dha haiar soekl'z ov hyuman intelijans ar, tu dhowz bini'th, ownli mowmantarili and pashali owpn'. Wi mey, bai gud fochau, abteyn a glimps ov a greyt powit, and hiar dha saund ov hiz vois ; or put a kweschan tu a maen ov saians, and bi ansad gud-yumadli. Wi mey intru'd ten minits tok on a kaebinit mini star, ansad probabli widh woedz woes dhaen sailans, biing diseptiv ; or snaech, woens or twais in auar laivz, dha privilij ov throwing a bukey in dha path ov a prinses, 3 or aresting dha kaind glans ov a kwin. And yet dhiz mowmantari chansiz wi koevit, and spend auar yoez, 4 and paeshanz, and pauaz in poesyu't ov litl' moar dhaen dhiz, whail mintaim dhear iz a so'saiiti kantinywali owpn' tu oes ov pipl hu wil tok tu oes aez long aez wi laik, whotevar auar raengk or okyupeyshan — tok tu oes in dha best woedz dhey kaen chuz and ov dha things niarist dhear hats. And dhis so'saiiti, bikoz it iz sow nyumaras and sow jentl' ; and kaen bi kept weyting raund oes 61 dey long — kingz and steyts- man linggaring peyshantli, not tu grant odyans, boat tu geyn it — in dhowz pleynli foenisht and naero' aenti-rumz, auar bukkeys-shelvz, wi meyk now akaunt ov dhaet kcempani, pahaeps nevar lisn' tu a woed dhey wud sey 61 dey long. — Buskin : " Sesame and Lillies ". Alternative forms : — 1 praposhan. 2 jenral. 3 prinses. 4 yiaz. POWITBI. Dha Steit ov Bai-and-Bai. Ow shaen dha spot, mai yuthful frendz, ai oej yu tu biwe'ar ! Bigailing iz dha plezn't wey, and softli 1 bridhz dhi ear ; Yet noen haev evar past tu sinz inowbling, greyt and hai, Hu woens bigae'n tu linggar in dha strtt ov Bai-and-bai. Hau verid ar dhi imijiz araizing tu mai sait, Ov dhowz hu wisht tu shoen dha rong, hu loevd and praizd dha rait, Yet from dha silkn' bondz ov slowth dhey veynli strowv tu flai, Which held dhem jentli prizn'd in dha strit ov Bai-and-bai. "Mai projikts thraiv," dha moechant sed ; "when doebl'd iz mai stoar, Hau frili shsel mai redi gowld bi shauad amceng dha puar ! " Vast gru hiz welth, yet strowv hi not dha monaz tiar tu drai ; Hi nevar joenid onwad from dha strit ov Bai-and-bai ! " Fogfv 2 dhai oering broedhar ; hi haez wept and soefad long ! " Ai sed tu ween • hti ansad — " Hi haeth doan ml grivas rong ; Yet wil ai sik mai broedhar, and fagiv him ear ai dai." Alas ! Deth shotli faund him in dha strit ov Bai-and-bai ! Dha wiarid woeldling myuziz apon lost 3 and weystid deyz, Eizolvd tu toen hiard'ftar from dhi erar ov hiz weyz, Tu lift hiz grovling 4 thots from oeth, and fiks dhem on dha skai; Whai dcez hi linggar fondli in dha strit ov Bai-and-bai ? Alternative forms : — 1 softli. 2 fagiv. 3 lost. 4 grovl'ing. (31) 32 Biding Lesn'z — Powitri. Dhen sheen dha spot, mai yuthful frendz ; woek on whail yet yu mey; Let not owld eyj 6t6yk 1 yu aez yu slowthfl'i diley, Lest yu shud geyz araund yu, and diskoe'var widh a sai, Yu haev richt dha haus ov " Nevar " — bai dha strit ov " Bai- and-bai." — Abdy. Dha J^ekd8 ov ETmz. Dha Jaekdo 2 saet on dha Kadinalz chear : Bishap and aebat and praiar woer dhear ; Meni a moengk, and meni a fraiar, Meni a nait, and meni a skwaiar, Widh a greyt meni moar ov lesar digri', — In suth a gudli kcempani ; And dhey soevd dha Lod Praimit on bendid nl. Nevar, ai win, Woz a praudar sin, Red ov in buks, or dremt ov in drimz, Dhaen dha Kadinal Lod Achbishap ov Eimz ! In and aut, Thru dha motli raut, Dhaet litr Jaekdo' kept hoping abaut ; Hiar and dhear, Laik a dog in a fear, Owvar koemfits and keyks, And dishiz and pleyts, Kaul and kowp, and rochit and pol, Maitar and krowzhar ! hi hopt apon 61 ! Widh sosi ear, Hi poecht on dha chear Whear, in steyt, dha greyt Lod Kadinal saet In dha greyt Lod Kadinalz greyt red haet ; And hi piad in dha feys Ov hiz Lodships Greys, Widh a saetisfaid luk, aez if hi wud sey, " Wi tu ar dha greytist fowks hiar ta-dey ! " Alternative forms : — l owvateyk. 2 Jsekd6'. The syllables are both accented, and it depends on the position of the word which should have tlie chief stress. It is on the second syllable when the word is followed by a pause. Dha Jcekdo ov Bimz. 33 And dha prists widh 6, Mz soech friks dhey so, Sed, " Dha Devi' mcest bi in dhaet litl' Jaekdo' ! " Dha fist woz owvar, dha bod woz kliad, Dha flonz and dha kcestadz haed 61 disapi'ad, And siks litl' singing-boiz, — diar litl' sowlz ! In nais klin feysiz, and nais whait stowlz, Keym in odar dyu, Tu bai tu, Maching dhaet grsend rifektari thru ! A nais litl' boi held a gowldn' yiiar, Embost l and fild widh wotar aez pyuar, Mz eni dhat flowz bitwi'n Rimz and Namtiar ; Which a nais litl' boi stud redi tu kaach In a fain gowldn' haend-beysn' meyd tu maech. Tti nais litl' boiz, radhar moar grown, Kaarid laavn'dar wotar, and ow da Kalown ; And a nais litl' boi haed a nais keyk ov sowp, Woedhi ov woshing dha haendz ov dha Powp. Wosn litl' boi A naepkin boar, Ov dha best whait daiapar, frinjd widh pingk, And a kadinalz hset makt in " poemanant ingk." Dha greyt Lod Kadinal toenz set dha sait Ov dhiz nais litl boiz drest 61 in whait : From hiz finggar hi droz His kostli 2 toekwo'z j 3 And, not thingking aet 61 abaut litl' Jaekdo'z, Dip6zits it streyt Bai dha said ov hiz pleyt, Whail dha nais litl' boiz on hiz Eminans weyt ; Til, when nowbadi 4 z driming ov eni soech thing, Dhaet litl' Jaekdo' hops of widh dha ring ! Dhear z a krai and a shaut, And a dyus ov a raut And nowbadi simz tu now whot dhear 5 abaut, Boat dha mcengks haev dhear pokits 61 toend insaid aut ; Dha fraiaz ar niling And hoenting, and filing Alternative forms : — 1 imbost. 2 kostli. 3 toekwa'z. 4 nowbodi. 5 dhey ar. 3 34 Biding Lesn'z — Poiuitri. Dha kapit, dha floar, and dha wolz, and dha siling. Dha Kadinal dru. Of ich ploem-kcelad shu, And left his red stokings ikspowzd tu dha vyu ; Hi pips and hi fils In dha towz and dha hilz ; Dhey toen oep dha dishiz, — dhey toen oep dha pleyts, Dhey teyk oep dha powkar and powk aut dha greyts, Dhey toen oep dha roegz, Dhey igzae'min dha moegz : Beet now ! — now soech thing ; — Dhey kant faind dha ring ! And dhi .33 bat dikle'ad dhat, " when nowbadi twigd it, Soem raskl' or oedhar haed popt in, and prigd it " ! Dha Kadinal rowz widh a dignifaid luk, Hi kold for hiz kaendl', hiz bel, and hiz buk ! In howli aenggar and paias grif, Hi solamli koest thaet raskali thif ! Hi koest him get bod, hi koest him in bed ; From dha sowl ov his fut tu dha kraun ov his ov hiz hed ; Hi koest him in sliping, dhat evari 1 nait Hi shud drim ov dha devl', 2 and weyk in a frait ; Hi koest him in iting, hi koest him in dringking, Hi koest him in kofing, 3 in snizing, in wingking ; Hi koest him in siting, in staending, in laiing, Hi koest him in woking, in raiding, in flaiing, Hi koest him in living, hi koest him in daiing ! Nevar woz hoed soech a teribl' 4 koes ! Boet whot geyv raiz Tu now litl' sapraiz, Nowbadi 5 simd woen peni dha woes ! Dha dey woz gon, 6 Dha nait keym on, Dha moengks and dha fraiaz dhey soecht til don ; When dha saekristn' so, On kroempl'd klo, Koem limping a ptiar litl' leym Jaekdo' ; Now longgar gey, Mz on yestadey 7 ; Hiz fedhaz 61 simd tu bi toend dha rong wey, Alternative forms : — x evri. 2 devil. 3 kofing. 4 terabl'. 5 nowbodi, 6 gon. 7 yestadi 4 Dha Jcekdo ov Bimz. 35 Hiz pinyanz drupt — hi kud hadli staend, — Hiz hed woz aez bold aez dha pam ov yor haend ; Hiz ai sow dim, Sow weystid ich lim, Dhat, hidlis ov graemar, dhey 61 kraid, " Dhmt s him ! — Dhaet s dha skaemp dhat haez doen dhis skaendalas thing ! Dhaet s dha thif dhat haez got mi 1 Lod Kadinalz Ring ! " Dha pliar lit!' Jaekdo', When dha moengks hi so, Fibli geyv vent tu dha gowst ov a ko ; And toend hiz bold hed, aez moech aez tu sey, 11 Prey bi sow gud aez tu wok dhis wey ! " Slowar and slowar, Hi limpt on bifo'ar, Til dhey keym tu dha baek ov dha belfri doar, When dha foest thing dhey so, Midst dha stiks and dha stro, Woz dha ring in dha nest ov dhaet litl' Jaekdo' ! Dhen dha Lod Kadinal kold for hiz buk, And of dhaet teribl' koes hi tuk ; Dha myut ikspreshan 2 Soevd in lyli ov kanf eshan, 3 And, biing dhoes koepl'd widh ful restityushan, Dha Jaekdo got plinari aebso'lyushan ! When dhowz woedz woer hoed, Dhaet puar litl' boed Woz sow cheynjd in a mowmant, t woz riali absoed. 4 Hi gru slik, and f aet ; In adishan tu dhaet, A fresh krop ov f edhaz keym thik aez a maet ! Hiz teyl waegl'd moar Ivn' dhaen bifo'ar ; Beet now longgar it waegd widh an impyudant 5 ear, Now longgar hi poecht on dha Kadinalz chear. Hi hopt nau abaut Widh a geyt divaut ; Mt Maetinz, aet Vespaz, hi nevar woz aut ; And sow far from eni moar pilfaring didz, Hi olwiz 6 simd teling dha konfesaz 7 bidz. Alternative forms: — 1 mai. 2 ekspreshan. 3 konfeshan. 4 eebsoed. 5 impidant. 6 olweyz. 7 kanfesaz, when properly accented on the second syllable, but the rhythm requires us here to shift the accent to the first syllable (this being the usual pronunciation a century ago. — Ed.). 36 Riding Lesn'z — Powitri. If eni woen laid, or if eni woen swoar, /S Or slcembad in prear-taim and haepn'd tu snoar, Dhaet gud Jaekdo' Wud giv a greyfc " K6," Mz moech aez tu sey, " Downt dtiw sow eni moar ! " Whail meni rima'kt, aez hiz maenar dhey so, Dhat dhey " nevar haed nown soech a paias Jaekdo' ! " Hi long livd dha praid Ov dhaet koentri said, And set last in dhi owdar ov saengktiti daid ; When, aez woedz woer tu feynt, Hiz merits tu peynt, Dha konkleyv l ditoemind tu meyk him a seynt ! And on nyuli-meyd seynts and powps, aez yu now, It s dha koestam set Eowm, nyu neymz tu bistow, Sow dhey kaenanaizd him bai dha neym ov Jim Krow ! — Barham. OV DHA CHAILD WIDH DHA BoED ^T DHA BUSH. " Mai litl' boed, hau kaenst dhau sit, And sing amidst sow meni thonz ? Let mi boet howld oepon dhi get ; Mai loev widh onar dhi adonz. " Dhau at set prezn't litl' woeth ; Faiv f adhingz noen wil giv for dhi ; Boet pridhi, litl' boed, koem foth ; Dhau ov moar vaelyu art tu mi. " T 2 iz tru, it iz soenshain 3 ta-dey, Ta-moro' boedz wil haev a stom ; Mai priti woen, koem dhau awey, Mai buzam dhen shael kip dhi worn. 11 Dhau soebjikt at tu kowld a 4 naits, When daknis iz dhai koevaring, 5 Mt dey z 6 dhai deynjar greyt bai kaits, Hau kaenst dhau dhen sit dhear and sing ? Alternative forms : — l kongkleyv. 2 it. 3 soe'nshain. 4 ov. 5 kcBvring. 6 iz. Dha Distrozkshan ov Sence'karib. 37 " Dhai fud iz skeas and skaenti tti, T iz woemz and traesh which dhau dcest it ; Dhai prezn't steyt ai piti du, Koem, ai l 1 pro'vaid dhi betar mit. " Ai 1 fid dhi widh whait bred and milk, And shugarploemz, if dhem dhau kreyv ; Ai 1 koevar dhi widh fainist silk Dhat from dha kowld ai mey dhi seyv. " Mai fadhaz paelas shael bi dhain, Yey, in it dhau shaelt sit and sing ; Mai litT boed, if dhau It 2 bi main, Dha howl yoer 3 raund shgel bi dhai spring. " Ai 1 tich dhi 61 dha nowts set kot ; (Entho't ov myuzik dhau shaelt pley ; And 61 dhat dhidhar du rizo't, Shael preyz dhi for it evri dey. " Ai 1 kip dhi seyf from kaet and koer, Now maenar a 4 ham shael kcem tu dhi ; Yey, ai wil bi dhai scekarar, Mai buzam shael dhai kaebin bi." Beet low, bihowld, dha boed iz gon ; 5 Dhiz chamingz wud not meyk hoer yild ; Dha chaild z left aet dha Bush alown, Dha boed flaiz yondar oar 6 dha fild. — John Bunyan. Dha Distec3kshan ov Sen^'kaeib. 7 Dhi Asiryan 8 keym daun laik a wulf on dha f owld, And hiz kowhots woer gliming in poepl' and gowld ; And dha shin ov dhear spiaz woz laik staz on dha si, When dha bin weyv rowlz naitli on dip Gaslili'. 9 Alternative forms : — 1 wil. 2 wilt. 3 yiar. 4 ov. °gon. 8 owvar. 7 Sinse'kerib. 8 ^siri'an, Asiri'an. 9 Geelili. 38 Biding Lesn'z — Potvitri. Laik dha livz ov dha forist when soemar iz grin, Dhaet howst widh dhear baenaz set scenset woer sin : Laik dha livz ov dha forist when Otam haeth blown, Dhaet howst on dha moro' ley widhad and strown ! For dhi Eynjal 1 ov Deth spred hiz wingz on dha blast, And bridhd in dha feys ov dha fow aez hi past ; And dhi aiz ov dha slipaz waekst dedli and chil, And dhear hats boat woens hivd, and for evar gru. stil ! And dhear ley dha stid widh hiz nostril 61 waid Boat thru it dhear rowld not dha breth ov hiz praid ; And dha fowm ov hiz gasping ley whait on dha toef, And kowld aez dha sprey ov dha rok-biting soef. And dhear ley dha raidar disto'tid and peyl, Widh dha dyu. on hiz brau and dha roast on hiz meyl ; And dha tents woer 61 sailant, dha baenaz alown, Dha lansiz oenliftid, dha trcempit oenblown. And dha wido'z ov iEshar ar laud in dhear weyl, And dhi aidalz 2 ar browk 3 in dha tempi' ov Beyl ; 4 And dha mait ov dha Jentail, oensmowt bai dha sod, Haeth meltid laik snow in dha glans ov dha L6d ! — Byron. Dha LLebinaz ov Inggland. Yi Maerinaz ov Inggland Dhat gad auar neytiv siz ! Huz flaeg haez breyvd, a thauzand yoez, Dha baetr and dha briz ! Y6r gloryas 5 staendad lanch a gen 6 Tu maech anoedhar fow ; And swip thru dha dip, Whail dha stomi waindz " du blow ; Alternative forms: — l eynjl'. 2 aidl'z. 3 browkn'. 4 Beyal. 5 glori'as. 6 ageyn. 7 windz. Dha Mczrinaz ov Inggland. 39 Whail dha bsetl' reyjiz laud and long And dha stdmi waindz du blow. Dha spirits ov yor fadhaz Shsel stat from evri weyv — For dha dek it woz dhear fild ov feym, And Owshan woz dhear greyv : Whear Bleyk and maiti Nelsn' fel Yor msenli hats shael glow, Mz yi swip thru dha dip, Whail dha stomi waindz du blow ; Whail dha bsetl' reyjiz laud and long And dha stomi waindz du blow. Britse'nya nidz now bulwoeks, Now tauaz along dha stip ; Hoer mach iz oar 1 dha mauntin weyvz, Hoer howm iz on dha dip. Widh thoendaz from hoer neytiv owk Shi kwelz dha flcedz bilow — Mz dhey roar on dha shoar, When dha stomi waindz du blow ; When dha bsetl' reyjiz laud and long, And dha stomi waindz du blow. Dha mityar fiaeg ov Inggland Shsel yet terifik boen ; Til deynjaz troebl'd nait dipa/t And dha star ov pis ritoen. Dhen, dhen, yi owshan-woryaz ! 2 Aur song and fist shsel flow Tu dha feym ov yor neym, When dha stom hsez sist tu blow ; When dha faiari fait iz hoed now moar, And dha stom hsez sist tu blow. — T. Campbell. Alternative forms : — l owvar. 2 wori'az. 40 Biding Lesn'z — Powitri. A Ansae tu a Chaildz Kweschan. DO yu ask whot dha boedz sey? Dha spsero', dha doev, Dha linit, and throesh, sey " Ai loev and ai loev ! " In dha wintar dhear l sailant, dha wind iz sow strong ; Whot it sez ai downt 2 now, boet it singz a laud song. Boat grin livz and blosamz and soeni worn wedhar, And singing and lceving, 61 koem baek tagedhar. Boat dha lak iz sow brimful ov glsednis and lcev, Dha grin fildz bilow him, dha blu skai abcev, Dhat hi singz and hi singz, and for evar singz hi, " Ai loev mai loev, and mai lcev loevz mi." — Coleridge. Dha Pain-zepl' and dha Bi. Dha pain-eepl'z in tripl' row Woer basking hot, and 61 in blow ; A bi ov mowst dizoening teyst Poesi'vd 3 dha freygrans aaz hi past ; On igar wing dha spoilar keym, And soecht for kraeniz in dha freym, Oejd hiz atemt on evri 4 said, Tu evri peyn hiz trcengk aplaid : Boat stil in veyn — dha freym woz tait, And ownli poevyas tu dha lait : Dhoes hseving weystid haf hiz dey, Hi trimd hiz nait anoadhar wey. Auar diar dilaits ar 6fn' soach : Ekspowzd 5 tu vyu, boat not tu toech, Dha sait auar fulish hat infleymz, Wi long for pain-aeprz in freymz : Widh howplis wish ween luks and linggaz, Alternative forms :— 1 dhey ar. 2 du not. 3 pasivd. 4 evari. 5 ikspowzd. Dha Bitdiad Kcet. 41 Woen breyks dha glas and koets hiz finggaz, Beet dhowz hum truth and wizdam lid, Keen geedhar heeni from a wid. — Cowper. Dha Bita*iad Ket. A powits kaet, sid6yt and greyv Mz powit wel kud wish tu haev, Woz moech adiktid tu inkwaiar, F6r nuks tu which shi mait ritaiar, And whear, sikyu'ar aez maus in chingk, Shi mait ripowz, or sit and thingk. Sosmtaimz x aesending 2 debane'ar, An aspl' tri, or lofti pear, Lojd widh kanvinyans in dha fok, Shi wocht dha gadnar aet hiz woek : Scemtaimz hoer iz and solas sot In an owld emti wotring 3 -pot ; Dhear, wonting noething seyv a feen Tu sim soem nimf in hoer sidae'n, Apserald in igzae'ktist sot, And redi tu bi bon tu kot. Boet lcev ov cheynj it simz hsez pleys Not ownli in auar waizar reys ; Kaets olso' fil, aaz wel aez wi, Dhaet paeshanz fos, and sow did shi. Hoer Maiming, shi bigae'n tu faind, Ekspowzd 4 hoer tu moech tu dha waind, 5 And dhi owld yutansil 6 ov tin Woz kowld and kcemfatlis widhin : Shi dhearfor wisht, insted ov dhowz, Soem pleys ov moar siri'n ripowz, Alternative forms : — 1 soe'mtaimz. 2 asending. 3 w6taring. 4 ikspowzd. 5 wind. 6 yutensil. 42 Biding Lesriz — Poivitri. Whear nidhar 1 kowld mait koem, nor ear Tu rudli wontan widh hoer hear, And sot it in dha laiklyist 2 mowd, Widhin hoer mastaz snoeg abowd. A droar, it chanst, set botam laind Widh linin ov dha softist 3 kaind, Widh soech aez moechants intro'dyu's From Indya, for dha leydiz yus — A droar imp6nding oar 4 dha rest, Haf owpn', in dha topmowst chest, Ov debth 5 anoef , 6 and noen tu spear, Invaitid hoer tu slcembar dhear. Pus, widh dilait biyond ikspreshan, Soeveyd dha sin and tuk po'zeshan. Rikce'mbant set hoer iz, ear long, And lceld bai hoer own hcem-drcem song, Shi left dha keaz ov laif bihaind And slept aez shi wud slip hoer last ; When in keym, hoezifli " inklaind, Dha cheymbameyd, and sheet it fast ; Bai now maligniti impeld, Boat 61 oenkonshas hum it held. Aweykn'd bai dha shok, kraid Pus, " Woz evar kast atendid dhces ? Dhi owpn' droar woz left, ai si, Miali tu pruv a nest for mi ; For sun aez ai woz wel kampowzd, Dhen keym dha meyd, and it woz klowzd. Hau smudh dhiz koechifs, and hau swit ! Ow ! whot a delikit ritri't. Ai wil rizain miself 8 tu rest, Til Sol, diklaining in dha west, Alternative forms: — a naidhar. 2 laikliist. 8 softist. 4 owvar. 5 depth. 6 ince'f . 7 hauswaifli. 8 maiself. Dha Bitdiad Kcet. 43 Shgel kol tu scepar, when, now daut, Stizn' wil ko3m and let mi aut." Dhi ivning keym, dha soen dis^ndid, And Pus rim^ynd stil oenatendid. Dha nait rowld tadili awey, (Widh hoer, indi'd, t woz nevar dey), Dha spraitli mon hoer kos rinyu'd, Dhi ivning grey ageyn 1 insyu'd ; And Pus keym intu maind now moar Dhsen if intu'md dha dey bifo'ar. Widh hcenggar pincht, and pincht for rum, Shi nau priseyjd aprowching dtim, Nor slept a singgl' wingk, or poed, Konshas ov jepadi inkoed. Dhaet nait, bai chans, dha powit woching Hoed an ineksplikabl' skraeching ; Hiz nowbl' hat went pit-a-paet, And tu himself hi sed, " Whot's dhset? " Hi dru dha koetin aBt hiz said, And foth hi pipt, beet ncething spaid ; Yet, bai hiz iar 2 dir6ktid, 3 gest Scemthing imprizn'd in dha chest, And, dautful whot, widh prudn't kear Eizolvd it shud kantinyu dhear. Mt length a vois which wel hi nyu, A long and melankali 4 myu, Salyuting hiz powetik iaz, 5 Kansowld 6 him and dispeld hiz fiaz. Hi left hiz bed, hi trod dha floar, And gaen 7 in heyst dha droz eksploar ; 8 Dha lowist foest, and widhaut 9 stop Dha rest in odar, tu dha top ; Alternative forms : — a agen. 2 yoer. 3 dair^ktid. 4 melangkali. yoez. 6 kons6wld. 7 bigse'n. 8 iksplQ'ar. 9 widhaut. 44 Biding Lesn'z — Powitri. For t iz a truth wel nown tu mowst, Dhat whotsowevar thing iz lost, Wi sik it, ear it koem tu lait, In evri kraeni boet dha rait. — Foth skipt dha kaet, not nau ripll't, Mz oest, widh eri self-kansit, Nor in hoer own fond aeprihenshan A thlm for 61 dha woeldz atenshan ; Boet modist, sowbar, kyuad ov 61 Hoer nowshanz haipabolikl', And wishing for a pleys ov rest Enithing radhar dhaen a chest. Dhen stept dha powit intu bed Widh dhis riflekshan in hiz hed : — Moral. Biwe'ar ov tu sablaim a sens Ov yor own woeth and konsikwans ! Dha maen hu drimz himself sow greyt, And hiz impo'tans ov soech weyt, Dhat 61 araund, in 61 dhat s dcen, Moest muv and aekt for him alown, Wil loen in skul ov tribyuleyshan, Dha foli ov hiz ekspekteyshan. — W. Cowper, KONTEST BITWfN DHA NOWZ AND DHI AlZ. BiTwt'N Nowz and Aiz a streynj kontest arowz, Dha spektakl'z set dhem oenhaa'pili rong ; Dha point in dispyu't woz, sez 61 dha woeld nowz, Tu which dha sed spektakl'z 6t tu bilong. Sow Toeng woz dha loyar, and agyud dha koz Widh a greyt dil ov skil, and a wig ful ov loening ; Whail Chif-baeran Iar 1 saet tu baslans dha 16z, Sow feymd for hiz taelant in naisli dizoening. Alternative forms : — x yoer. Jon Gilpin. 45 " In biha'f ov dha Nowz, it wil kwikli apiar, And yor lodship," hi sed, " wil oendautidli faind Dhat dha Nowz haez haed spektakl'z olwiz in wear, Which amaunts tu pazeshan, taim aut ov maind." Dhen howlding dha spektakl'z oep tu dha kot — " Yor lodship abzoevz dhey ar meyd widh a straedl' Mz waid aez dha rij ov dha nowz iz ; in shot, Dizaind tu sit klows tu it, joest laik a saedP. " Agen, 1 wud yor lodship a mowmant sapowz (T iz a keys dhat haez haepn'd, and mey bi agen) Dhat dha vizij or kauntinans haed not a nowz ; Prey, hu wud, or hu kud, wear spektakl'z dhen ? " On dha howl, it apiaz, and mai agyumant showz, Widh a rizning 2 dha kot wil nevar kandem, Dhat dha spektakl'z pleynli woer meyd for dha Nowz, And dha Nowz woz aez pleynli int^ndid for dhem." Dhen shifting hiz said, aez a loyar nowz hau, Hi plidid ageyn on biha'f ov dhi Aiz ; Beet whot woer hiz agyumants fyu pipl' now, For dha kot did not thingk dhey woer ikwali waiz. Sow hiz lodship dikri'd, in a greyv, solam town, Disaisiv and kliar, widhaut ween if or bat, Dhat — " When^var dha Nowz put hiz spektakl'z on, Bai deylait or kaendl'-lait — Aiz shud bi shoet ". — W. Cowper. Jon Gilpin. Jon Gilpin woz a sitizn' Ov kredit and rinaun, A treyn-baend kaeptin ik woz hi Ov feymas Loendan Taun. Alternative forms : — x ageyn. 2 rtzn'ing. 46 Riding Lesn'z — Powitri. John Gilpinz spauz sed tu hoer diar, " Dhow wedid wi haev bin Dhis twais ten tidyas yoez, 1 yet wi Now holidey 2 haev sin. " Ta-moro' iz aur weding-dey, And wi wil dhen ripe'ar (Entu dha Bel set Edmantn', 01 in a sheyz and pear. " Mai sistar and mai sistaz chaild, Maiself, 3 and childran thri, Wil fil dha sheyz ; sow yu moest raid On hosbaek aftar wi." Hi sun riplaid, " Ai du admaiar Ov wumankaind boet ween, And yu ar shi, mai diarist diar, Dheafor it sheel bi doen. 11 Ai aem a linindreypar bowld, Mz 61 dha woeld doeth now, And mai gud frend dha kaelindar, Wil lend hiz hos tu gow." Kwowth Mistris Gilpin, " Dhaet's wel sed ! And, for dhat wain iz diar, Wi wil bi foenisht widh auar own, Which iz bowth brait and kliar." Jon Gilpin kist hiz loeving waif, Ojoid woz hi tu faind Dhat, dhow on plezhar shi woz bent, Shi haed a frugl' maind. Dha moning keym, dha sheyz woz brot, Boet yet woz not alaud Tu draiv cep tu dha doar, lest 61 Shud sey dhat shi woz praud. Alternative forms : — 1 yiaz. 2 holidi. 3 mis61f . Jon Gilpin. 47 Sow thri doz of dha sheyz woz steyd, Whear dhey did 61 get in, Siks preshas sowlz, and 61 agog Tu daesh thru thik and thin. Smaek went dha whip, raund went dha whilz, Woer nevar fowks sow glaed ; Dha stownz did raetl' cendani'th, Mz if Chipsaid woer maed. Jon Gilpin, set his hosiz said, Sizd fast dha flowing meyn, And cep hi got, in heyst tu raid, Boet sun keym daun ageyn ; For saedl'-tri skeas richt haed hi, His joeni tu bigin, When, toening raund hiz hed, hi so Thri koestamaz koem in. Sow daun hi keym ; for 16s ov taim, Oldhow it grivd him soar, Yet 16s ov pens, ful wel hi nyu, Wud trcebl' him moech moar. T 1 woz long bifo'ar dha koestamaz Woer syutid tu dhear maind, When Beti, skriming, keym daunste'az, " Dha wain iz left bihaind ! " " Gud laek ! " kwowth hi, " yet bring it mi, Mai ledhan belt laikwaiz 2 In which ai bear mai troesti sod When ai du eksasaiz." Nau Mistris Gilpin (keaful sowl !) Haed tuw stown-botl'z faund, Tu howld dha likar dhat shi loevd, And kip it seyf and saund. Alternative forms : — x it. 2 laikwaiz. 48 Riding Lesn'z — Powitri. Ich botl' heed a koeling iar, 1 Thraw which dha belt hi dru, And hoeng a botl' on ich said, Tu meyk hiz baelans tru. Dhen owvar 61, dhat hi mait bi Ikwipt from top tu tow, Hiz long red klowk, wel-broesht and nit, Hi msenfuli did throw. Nau si him mauntid woens ageyn Apon hiz nimbi' stid, Ful slowli peysing oar 2 dha stownz, Widh koshan and gud hid. Boet fainding sun a smudhar rowd Bini'th hiz wel-shod fit, Dha snoting bist bigae'n tu trot, Which gold him in hiz sit. Sow " Fear and softli ! " 3 Jon hi kraid, Boat Jon hi kraid in veyn ; Dhset trot bikeym a gaelap sun, In spait ov koeb and reyn. Sow stuping daun, gez nidz hi mcest Huw kaenot sit oeprait, Hi graspt dha meyn widh bowth hiz haendz, And ik widh 61 hiz mait. Hiz hos, hu nevar in dhaet sot Heed heendl'd bin bifo'ar, Whot thing apon hiz bask haed got Did wcendar moar and moar. Awey went Gilpin, nek or not ; Awey went haet and wig ; Hi litl' dremt, when hi set aut, Ov rcening seech a rig. Alternative forms : — x yoer. 2 owvar. 3 softli. Jon Gilpin. 49 And nau, aez hi went bauing daun Hiz riking hed ful low, Dha botl'z tweyn bihaind hiz baek Woer shaetad aet a blow. Daun raen dha wain intu dha rowd, Mowst pityas tu bi sin, Which meyd hiz hosiz flaengks tu smowk Mz dhey haed beystid bin. Boat stil hi simd tu kaeri weyt, Widh ledhan goedl' breyst ! For 61 mait si dha botl'-neks Stil daenggling set hiz weyst. Dhoes 61 thru meri Izlingtn' Dhiz gaembl'z hi did pley, (Entil x hi keym centu dha Wosh Ov Edmantn' sow gey. And dhear hi thru dha Wosh abaut On bowth saidz ov dha wey, Jcest laik oentu a trosndling mop, Or a waild gus aet pley. 2Et Edmantn, hiz loeving waif From dha baelkowni 2 spaid Hoer tendar hoezband, woendring 3 moech Tu si hau hi did raid. " Stop, stop, Jon Gilpin ! — Hiar z dha haus " — Dhey 61 set woens did krai ; "Dha dinar weyts, and wi ar taiad " ; Sed Gilpin — " Sow aem ai ! " Boat yet hiz hos woz not a whit Inklaind tu taeri dhear ; For whai ? — hiz ownar haed a haus Ful ten mailz of, set Wear. Alternative forms : — l ce'ntil. 2 bselkani. 3 woendaring. 4 50 Biding Lesn'z — Powitri. Sow laik an aero' swift hi flu, Shot bai an achar strong ; Sow did hi flai — which bringz mi tu Dha midl' ov mai song. Awey went Gilpin aut ov breth, And soar agenst hiz wil, Til set hiz frendz dha kaelindaz Hiz hos aet last stud stil. Dha kaelindar, ameyzd tu si Hiz neybar in seech trim, Leyd daun hiz paip, flu tu dha geyt, And dhoes akostid him : 11 Whot nyuz ? whot nyuz ? yor taidingz tel Tel mi yu moest and shael — Sey, whai bear-hedid yu ar kcem, Or whai yu koem aet 61 ? " Nau Gilpin haed a plezn't wit, And loevd a taimH jowk ; And dhoes centu dha kaelindar In meri gaiz hi spowk : 1 ' Ai keym bikoz 1 ydr hos wud kcem ; And, if ai wel fobowd, 2 Mai haet and wig wil sun bi hiar, Dhey ar apon dha rowd." Dha kaelindar, rait glaed tu faind Hiz frend in meri pin, Eitoend him not a singgl' woed Beet tu dha haus went in ; Whens streyt hi keym, widh haet and wig, A wig dhat flowd bihaind ; A haet not moech dha woes for wear ; Ich kcemli in its kaind. A Iternative forms : — ' bikoz. 2 f abowd. Jon Gilpin. 51 Hi held dhem cep, and in hiz toen Dhces showd hiz redi wit : "Mai hed iz twais aez big aez yoz, Dhey dheafor nidz moest fit. Boet let mi skreyp dha doet awey, Dhat haengz apon yor feys ; And stop and it, for wel yu mey Bi in a hoenggri keys." Sed Jon, "It is mai weding-dey, And 61 dha woeld wud stear, If waif shud dain set Edmantan, And ai shud dain at Wear." Sow, toening tu hiz hos, hi sed, " Ai aem in heyst tu dain ; T woz for yor plezhar yu keym hiar, Yu shael gow bask f6r main." Aa loeklis spich, and butlis bowst ! For which hi peyd ful diar ; For, whail hi speyk, a breying as Did sing mowst laud and kliar : Wherae't hiz hos did snot, aez hi Haed hoed a laian roar, And gaelapt of widh 61 hiz mait, Mz hi haed doen bifo'ar. Awey went Gilpin, and awey Went Gilpinz haet and wig ; Hi lost dhem sunar dhaen set foest, For whai ? — dhey woer tu big. Nau Mistris Gilpin, when shi s6 Hoer hcezband powsting daun Intu dha koentri far awey, Shi puld aut haf-a-kraun. 52 Biding LesrCz — Powitri. And dhoes oentu dha yuth shi sed, Dhat drowv dhem tu dha Bel, 11 Dhis shsel bi yoz, when yu bring baek Mai hoezband seyf and wel." Dha yuth did raid, and sun did mit Jon koeming bsek ameyn ; Hum in a trais hi traid tu stop, Bai kaeching set hiz reyn ; Boet not poefoming 1 whot hi ment, And glasdli wud haev dcen, Dha fraitn'd stid hi fraitn'd moar, And meyd him fastar roen. Awey went Gilpin, and awey Went powst-boi set hiz hilz, Dha powst-boiz hos rait glsed tu mis Dha loembring 2 ov dha whilz. Siks jentl'man 3 upon dha rowd Dhoes siing Gilpin flai, Widh powst-boi sksempring 4 in dha riar, Dhey reyzd dha hyu and krai : — " Stop thif ! stop thif ! — A haiweyman ! " Not ween ov dhem woz myut ; And 61 and ich dhat past dhaet wey Did join in dha poesyu't. 5 And nau dha toenpaik geyts ageyn Flu owpn' in shot speys : Dha towl-man thinking, aez bifo'ar, Dhat Gilpin rowd a reys. And sow hi did, and ween it tu ! For hi got foest tu taun ; Alternative forms : — 1 pafoming. 2 loembaring. 3 jentl'men. 4 skaemparing. 5 pasyut. JSt Si. 53 Nor stopt, til whear hi hsed got oep Hi did ageyn get daun. Nau let 03s sing, Long liv dha king, And Gilpin, long liv hi ; And, when hi nekst doeth raid abrod, Mey ai bi dhear tu si ! Mt St. — W. Coivper. A wet shit and a flowing si, A waind dhat folo'z fast And filz dha whait and roeshing seyl And bendz dha gselant mast ; And bendz dha gselant mast, mi 1 boiz, Whail laik dhi igl' fri Awey dha gud ship flaiz, and livz Owld Inggland on dha li. Ow for a soft 2 and jentl' waind ! 3 Ai hoed a fear woen krai ; Boat giv tu mi dha snoring briz And whait weyvz hiving hai ; And whait weyvz hiving hai, mi laedz, Dha gud ship tait and fri : — Dha woeld ov wotaz iz auar howm, And meri men ar wi. Dhear z tempist in yon honid 4 mun, And laitning in yon klaud ; Beet hak dha myuzik, maerinaz ! Dha waind iz paiping laud ; Dha waind iz paiping laud, mi boiz, Dha laitning flseshiz fri — Whail dha holo' owk auar pselas iz, Auar heritij dha si. — A. Cunningham. Alternative forms : — 1 mai. 2 soft. 3 wind. 4 h6nd. 54 Riding Lesn'z — Powitri. Wilyam Tel. Kcem, list tu mi, and yu shsel hiar, A teyl ov whot bifel A feymas msen ov Switsaland, — Hiz neym woz Wilyam Tel. Niar Roisiz baengk, from dey tu dey, Hiz litl' flok hi led, Bai prudant thrift and hadi toil Kantent tu oen hiz bred. Nor woz dha hcentaz kraft oennown : _ In Uari noen woz sin Tu trsek dha rok-frikwenting hoed Widh ai sow tru and kin. A litl' seen woz in hiz howm, A lafing, fear-head boi ; Sow strong ov lim, sow blaidh ov hat, Hi meyd it ring widh joi. Hiz f adhaz ship woer 61 hiz frendz ; Dha laemz hi kold bai neym ; And when dhey frolikt in dha fildz, Dha chaild wud shear dha geym. Sow pisfuli dhear auaz woer spent Dhat laif haed skeas a soro' ; Dhey tuk dha gud ov evri dey, And howpt for moar ta-moro'. Boet 6ft 1 soem shaming Eypril mon Iz dakn'd in an auar ; And blaekist grifs oar 2 joias howmz, Alas ! osnsi'n mey lauar. A Iternative forms : — l oft. 2 owvar. Wilyam Tel. 55 Not yet on Switsaland haed dond Hoer dey ov libati ; Dha streynjaz yowk woz on hoer soenz, And prest rait hevili. Sow ween woz sent in lceklis auar, Tu rul in Ostryaz 2 neym ; A hoti masn ov saevij mtid, — In pomp and pauar hi keym, Ween dey, in wontannis ov pauar, Hi set hiz ksep on hai : — " Bau daun, yi sleyvz," dhi odar raen ; " Hti diso'beyz shasl dai ! " It chanst dhat Wilyam Tel, dhaet mon, Haed left hiz kotij howm, And, widh hiz litl' soen in haend, Tu iEltof taun hsed kcem. For 6ft dha boi haed aid dha spoil Hiz fadhar howmwad boar, And preyd tu join dha hcenting kru, When dhey shud rowm for moar. And ofn on soem meri nait, When wcendras fits woer towld, Hi longd hiz fadhaz bow tu teyk, And bi a hcentar bowld. Sow todz 2 dha shamwoz honts dhey went ; Ween sseng hiz chaildish songz, Dhi cedhar brudid monfuli Oar 3 U ariz grif s and rongz. Tel so dha kraud, dha liftid kaep, Dha tairants aenggri fraun, — Dha heraldz shautid in hiz iar, 4 11 Bau daun, yi sleyvz, bau daun ! " A Alternative for?ns ; — x Ostri'az, Ostri'az. 2 tuw6dz. 3 owvar. 4 yoer. 56 Biding Lesn'z — Poioitri. Stoen Gezlar makt dha pezants min, And wocht tu si him fol ; Boet nevar pam-tri streytar stud Dhaen Tel bifo'ar dhem 61. " Mai ni shael bend," hi kamli sed, " Tu God, and God alown ; Mai laif iz in dhi Ostryanz 1 haend, Mai konshans iz mai own." " Siz him, yi gadz," dha rular kraid, Whail paeshan chowkt hiz breth ; " Hi moks mai pauar, hi breyvz mai lod, Hi daiz dha treytaz deth ; — " Yet weyt. Dha Swis ar maksman tru, Sow 61 dha woeld dceth sey : Dhaet fear-head stripling hidhar bring ; Wi l 2 trai dhear skil ta-dey." Had bai a spreding laim tri stud, Tu dhis dha ytith woz baund ; Dhey pleyst an aepl' on hiz hed — Hi lukt in wcendar raund. " Dha folt iz main, if folt dhear bi," Kraid Tel in seksn'ts waild ; " On maenhud let yor venjans fol, Boet spear, ow spear mai chaild ! " 11 Ai wil not ham dha priti boi," Sed Gezlar tontingli ; " If bloed ov hiz shael steyn dha graund, Yoz wil dha moedar bi. 11 Dro tait yor bow, mai koening maen, Yor streytist aero' teyk ; For, now, yon aepl' iz yor m&k, Yor libati dha steyk." Alternative forms : — 1 Ostri'anz, Ostri'anz. 2 wil. Wilyam Tel. 57 A minggl'd noiz ov roth and grif Woz hoed amceng dha kraud ; Dha men dhey mootad koesiz dip, Dha wimin wept alaud. Ful fifti peysiz from hiz chaild, Hiz kros-bow in hiz haend, Widh lip kamprest, and flseshing ai, Tel foemli tuk his staend. Shuar, ful ancef : ov peyn and wow Dhis kraudid oeth haez bin ; Beet nevar, sins dha koes bigae'n, A saedar sait woz sin. Dhen speyk alaud dha gaelant boi, Impeyshant ov diley, — " Shut streyt and kwik, dhain eym iz shuar ; Dhau kaenst not mis ta-dey." " Hevn' bles dhi nau," dha perant sed, " Dhai kcerij sheymz mai fiar ; Msen traempl'z on hiz brcedhar maan, Boat God iz evar mar." Dha bow woz bent ; dhi aero' went, Mz bai an eynjl' gaidid ; In pisiz tu, binith dha tri, Dhi sepl' fel divaidid. " T 2 woz breyvli doen," dha rular sed, 11 Mai plaitid woed ai kip; T woz breyvli doen bai saiar and soen, — Gow howm, and fid yor ship." " Now thaengks ai giv dhi for dhai bun," Dha pezn't kowldli sed ; " Tu God alown mai preyz iz dyu, And dyuli shael bi peyd. A Uernative forms : — 1 ince' f . 2 it. 58 Biding Lesrtz — Powitri. " Yet now, praud msen, dhai feyt woz ntar, Haed ai boet mist mai eym ; Not oenavenjd mai chaild haed daid, — Dhai pating auar dha seym. " For si ! a sekand shaft woz hiar, If ham mai boi bifel ; Nau gow and bles dha hevn'li pauar, Mai foest haez sped sow wel." God helpt dha rait, God spead dha sin ; Hi bringz dha praud tu sheym ; Hi gadz dha wik agenst 1 dha strong, — Preyz tu Hiz howli Neym ! — Bev. J. H. Ghurney. MCENGKIZ M.2ENAZ. MffiNGKiz, when dhey sit set teybl', It aaz fast sez dhey ar eybl' — Gobi' for dhear veri laivz — Skup oep greyvi widh dhear naivz — Put dhear finggaz in dha dish If soem nais tit-bit dhey wish — Widh dhear naif, or fok, or spun, On dha teybP droem a tyun — Soemtaimz 2 from ich cedhaz pleyt— ow, Shoking ! — pilfar a pateyto', Or soem veri temting slais Which dhey thingk iz hiking nais. Biflekshan. Now yoeng ridaz, shuar, ov main Evar wud laik moengkiz dain ! — Tom Hood. Alternative forms : — x ageynst. 2 scemtaimz. Dha Domaus. 59 Dha Song ov dha Str{t Mcengki. Dhey thingk when ai m straiking dha shril gita'r Widh a slaitli kealis haend, Dhat ai hsev fagotn' 1 mai loavd wcenz, far Awey in a distant lsend. Dhear dwel Misiz Em and mai mcengkilings thri, And dhey wcendar whear ai gem, Mz dhey sit in dha top ov dha kowko'-ncet tri, And fist on dha lceshas yaem. Mai mcengkilingz dhey ar grown-oep bai dhis, And dhear teylz kwait long moest bi ; Dhear mcedhar 6ft 2 givz dhem, ai now, a kis, Bikoz 3 dhey ar sow laik mi. Long — long mey dhey baund mid 4 dha lofti 5 triz, In dha forist shaedo'z kill, Nor evar bi fetad widh klowdhz 6 laik dhiz, And dans on a thri-legd stul. Dha tip ov mai teyl iz dinyu'did ov skin, It pruvz hau moech ai fret : Boet bikoz ai indoe'lj in a pasing grin Dhey fsensi dhat ai faget. 7 — Tom Hood. Dha Domaus. Dha litl' domaus iz toni red, Hi meyks agenst wintar a nais snceg bed ; Hi meyks hiz bed in a mosi bsengk, Whear dha plants in dha soemar grow tol and raengk. Awey from dha deylait, far oendagraund, Hiz slip thru dha wintar iz kwaiat and saund ; And when 61 aboev him it friziz and snowz, Alternative forms : — x fog6tn'. 2 oft. 3 bik6'z. 4 amid. 5 lofti. 6 klowz. 7 fog^t. 60 Riding Lesn'z — Powitri. Whot iz it tu him ? for hi not ov it nowz. And til dha kowld taim ov dha wintar iz gon, 1 Dha litl' domaus kips sliping on. Boat aet last, in dha fresh brizi deyz ov dha spring, When dha grin livz boed, and dha meri boedz sing, And dha dred ov dha wintar iz owvar and past, Dhen dha litl' domaus pips aut aet last — Aut ov hiz snoeg kwaiat boero' hi wendz, And luks 61 abaut for hiz neybaz and frendz ; Dhen hi sez, aez hi sits aet dha fut ov a lach, " T 2 iz a byutifi" 3 dey for dha foest ov Mach, Dha vaialit iz bluming, dha blu skai iz kliar ; Dha lak iz cepspringing, hiz kaerl' ai hiar ; And in dha grin fildz ar dha laem and dha fowl ; Ai m 4 glaed ai m 4 not sliping, nor daun in mai howl." Dhen awey hi roenz, in hiz meri mud, Owvar dha fildz, and intu dha wud, Tu faind eni greyn dhear mey chans tu bi, Or eni smol beri dhat haengz on dha tri. Sow from oeli moning til leyt aet nait, Haez dha puar litl' krichar its own dilait ; Luking daun tu dhi oeth, and oep tu dha skai, Thingking, " Whot a haepi domaus aem ai ! " — Mary Hoivitt. Dha Ge&s-hopae and dha Keikit. Dha powitri ov oeth iz nevar ded : When 61 dha boedz ar feynt widh dha hot soen, And haid in killing triz, a vois wil roen From hej tu hej abaut dha nyti-mown mid ; Dhaet iz dha gras-hopar — hi teyks dha lid In soemar loekshari, — hi haez nevar doen Widh hiz dilaits, for when taiad aut widh foen, Alternative forms : — 1 g6n. 2 it. 3 bylitiful. 4 aem. Owd tu dha Kuku. 61 Hi rests aet iz bini'th soem plezn't wid. Dha powitri ov oeth iz sising nevar : On a lown wintar ivning, when dha frost Haez rot a sailans, from dha stowv dhear shrilz Dha krikits song, in womth inkri'sing evar, And simz tu woan, in drauzinis haf lost, Dha gras-hopar amoeng soem grasi hilz. — Keats. Owd tu dha Kuku. He yd, byutyas streynjar ov dha growv ! Dhau mesinjar ov Spring ! Nau hevn' ripe'az dhai ruaral sit, And wudz dhai welkam sing. Whot taim dha deyzi deks dha grin, Dhai soetin vois wi hiar ; Hsest dhau a star tu gaid dhai path, Or mak dha rowling yiar ? Dilaitful l vizitant ! widh dhi Ai heyl dha taim ov flauaz, And hiar dha saund ov myuzik swit From boedz amoeng dha bauaz. Dha skulboi, wondring 2 thru dha wud Tu pul dha primrowz gey, Stats, dha nyu vois ov Spring tu hiar, And imiteyts dhai ley. Whot taim dha pi puts on dha blum Dhau flaist dhai vowkal veyl An senyual gest in oedhar laendz Anoedhar Spring tu heyl. Alternative forms : — x dilaitfl'. 2 woendaring. 62 Biding Lesn'z — Powitri. Swit boed ! dhai bauar iz evar grin, Dhai skai iz evar kliar ; Dhau haest now soro' in dhai song, Now Wintar in dhai yiar ! Ow kud ai flai, ai d 1 flai widh dhi ! Wi d meyk, widh joiful 2 wing, Auar aenyual vizit oar 3 dha glowb, Kampaenyanz ov dha Spring. — John Logan. Dha Milab ov Di. Dh^ar dwelt a milar, heyl and bowld, Bisaid dha rivar Di ; Hi woekt and saeng from mon til nait, Now lak moar blaith dhaen hi ; And dhis dha boedn' ov hiz song For evar yust tu bi : "Ai envi nowbadi, now, not ai, And nowbadi en viz mi." t( Dhau at 4 rong, mai frend," sed gud King Hael — " Mz rong aez rong kaen bi — For kud mai hat bi lait aez dhain, Ai d 5 glaedli cheynj widh dhi ; And tel mi nau, whot meyks dhi sing Widh vois sow laud and fri, Whail ai aem saed, dhow ai m 6 dha king, Bisaid dha rivar Di?" Dha milar smaild and doft hiz kaep : " Ai oen mai bred," kwowth hi ; " Ai lcev mi 7 waif, ai loev mi frend, Ai lcev mi childran thri ; Alternative forms : — 1 wud. 2 joifl'. 3 owvar. 4 it. 6 wud. 6 sem, am. 7 mai. Woen bai Wcen. 63 Ai ow now peni ai kaenot pey ; Ai thaengk dha rivar Di, Dhat toenz dha mil dhat graindz dha kon Dhat fidz mai beybz and mi." ' Gud frend," sed Hael, and said dha whail, " Feawel and haepi bi ; Boat sey now moar, if dhau dst 1 bi tru, Dhat now wcen enviz dhi : Dhai mtli kaep iz woeth mai kraun, Dhai mil, mai kingdamz fi ; Soech men aez dhau ar Ingglandz bowst, Ow milar ov dha Di ! " WCEN BAI WffiN. Wcen bai woen dha saendz ar flowing, Wosn bai woen dha mowmants fol ; Soam ar koaming, soem ar gowing ; Du not straiv tu grasp dhem 61. Wcen bai wcen dhai dyutiz weyt dhi, Let dhai howl strength gow tu ich, Let now fydchar drimz ileyt dhi, Loen dhau foest whot dhiz kaen tich. Wcen bai woen (brait gifts from Hevn') Joiz ar sent dhi hiar bilow ; Teyk dhem redili when givn', Redi bi tu let dhem gow. Woen bai woen dhai grifs shael mit dhi, Du not fiar an amid 2 bsend ; Woen wil feyd aez oedhaz grit dhi, Shaedo'z pasing thru dha laend. Alternative forms : — l wudst. 2 amd. — Mackay. 64 Riding Lesn'z — Poioitri. Du not luk set laifs long soro' ; Si hau smol ich mowmants peyn ; God wil help dhi for ta-moro', Sow ich dey bigin ageyn. Evri auar dhat flits sow slowli, Haez its task tu du 6r bear ; Lyuminas dha kraun, and howli, When ich jem iz set widh kear. Du not linggar widh rigreting, Or for pasing auaz dispond ; Nor, dha deyli toil fogeting, 1 Luk tu igali biyond. Auaz ar gowldn' lingks, Godz towkn', Kiching Hevn' ; boat woen bai woen, Teyk dhem, lest dha cheyn bi browkn' fiar dha pilgrimij bi doen. — Adelaide Proctor. Lokinva'r. Leydi Heranz Song. Ow, yoeng Lokinva'r iz koem aut ov dha west, Thru 61 dha waid Bodar hiz stid woz dha best, And, seyv hiz gud brod-sod, hi wepanz haed noen ; Hi rowd 61 oena/md, and hi rowd 61 alown. Sow feythful in loev, and sow dontlis in wor, Dhear nevar woz nait laik dha yoeng Lokinva'r. Hi steyd not for breyk, and hi stopt not for stown, Hi swaem dhi Esk rivar whear fod dhear woz noen ; Boet, ear hi alaitid set Nedhabi geyt, Dha braid haed kansentid, dha gaelant keym leyt, For a laegad in loev, and a daestad in wor, Woz tu wed dha fear Elin ov breyv Lokinva'r. Alternative forms : — l fagoting. Lohinvd'r. 65 Sow bowldli hi entad dha Nedhabi hoi Amoeng braidzman and kinzman, and broedhaz and 61 : Dhen spowk dha braidz fadhar, hiz haend on hiz sod (For dha puar kreyvn' braidgrum sed never a woed), "Ow, kcem yi in pis hiar, or koem yi in wor, Or tu dans aet auar braidl', yceng Lod Lokinva/r? " " Ai long wud yor dotar, mai syut yu dinaid ; — Loav swelz laik dha Solwey, boat ebz laik its taid — And nau ai aem koem, widh dhis lost loav ov main, Tu lid boat ween mezhar, dringk woen koep ov wain. Dhear ar meydn'z in Skotland moar loevli bai far, Dhat wud glaedli bi braid tu dha yoeng Lokinva'r." Dha braid kist dha goblit ; dha nait tuk it cep, Hi kwaft of dha wain, and hi thru daun dha koep, Shi lukt daun tu bloesh, and shi lukt oep tu sai, Widh a smail on hoer lips and a tiar in hoer ai. Hi tuk hoer soft 1 haend, ear hoer moedhar kud bar, — " Now tred wi a mezhar ! " sed yoeng Lokinva'r. Sow steytli hiz fom, and sow loevli hoer feys, Dhat nevar a hoi soech a gaelyad did greys ; Whail hoer moedhar did fret, and hoer fadhar did fyum, And dha braidgrum stud daenggling hiz bonit and plum ; And dha braid-meydn'z whispad, " T woer betar bai far Tu haev maecht auar fear koezn' widh yoeng Lokinva'r." Woen toech tu hoer haend, and woen weed in hoer iar, 2 When dhey richt dha hol-doar, and dha chajar stud niar ; Sow lait tu dha kruwp dha fear leydi hi swoeng, Sow lait tu dha saedl' bifo'ar hoer hi sprceng ! " Shi iz woen ! wi ar gon, 3 owvar baengk, bush, and skoar ; Dhey l 4 haev flit stidz dhat folo' ; " kwowth yoeng Lokinva'r. Dhear woz maunting moeng 5 Grimz ov dha Nedhabi klaen ; Fostaz, Feniks and Moezgreyvz, dhey rowd and dhey raen : Alternative forms : — x soft. 2 yoer. 3 gon. 4 wil. 5 amceng. 66 Biding Lesn'z — Powitri. Dhear woz reysing, and cheysing on Kaeno'bi Li, Boet dha lost braid ov Nedhabi near 1 did dhey si. Sow dering in loev, and sow dontlis in wor, Heev yi ear 2 hoed ov gselant laik yoeng Lokinva/r ? —Scott. A Aftar Blenim. It waz 3 a soemar ivning ; Owld Kaespaz woek waz dcen, And hi bifo'ar hiz kotij doar Waz siting in dha seen ; And bai him spotid on dha grin Hiz litl' grsendchaild Wilami'n. Shi so hoer brcedhar Pitakin Rowl scemthing laj and raund, Which hi bisaid dha rivyulet In pleying dhear hsed faund ; Hi keym tu ask whot hi haed faund Dhat woz sew laj and smudh and raund. Owld Ksespar tuk it from dha boi, Hu stud ikspektant bai ; And dhen dhi owld maen shuk hiz hed, And widh a naechral 4 sai, " T iz sosm ptiar felo'z skcel," sed hi, " Hu fel in dha greyt viktari. 5 " Ai faind dhem in dha gadn', For dhear z meni hiar abaut ; And ofn when ai gow tu plau Dha plaushear toenz dhem aut. For meni thauzand men," sed hi, " Woer sleyn in dhaet greyt viktari." Alternative forms : — l nevar. 2 evar. 3 woz. 4 nsecharal. 5 viktri. Aftar Blenim. 67 " Nau tel oes whot t waz 61 abaut," Yoeng Pitakin hi kraiz ; And litl' Wilami'n luks oep Widh woendar-weyting aiz ; " Nau tel oes 61 abaut dha wor, And whot dhey fot ich oedhar for ? " " It waz dhi Ingglish," Ksespar kraid, " Hti put dha French 1 tu raut ; Boet whot dhey fot ich oedhar for Ai kud not wel meyk aut. Boet evribodi sed," kwowth hi, " Dhat t woz a feymas viktari. " Mai fadhar livd set Blenim dhen, Yon litl" strim had bai ; Dhey boent hiz dweling tu dha graund, And hi waz fost tu flai : Sow widh hiz waif and chaild hi fled, Nor heed hi whear tu rest hiz hed. " Widh faiar and sod dha koentri raund Waz weystid far and waid, And meni a chailding mcedhar dhen And nytibon beybi daid : Boet thingz laik dhaet, yu now, moest bi iEt evri feymas viktari. " Dhey sey it woz a shoking sait Aftar dha fild waz woen ; For meni thauzand bodiz hiar Ley roting in dha soen : Boet thingz laik dhaet, yu now, moest bi Aftar a feymas viktari. Alternative form : — 1 Frensh. 68 Biding Lesn'z — Powitri. " Greyt preyz dha Dyiik ov Molbra l woen And auar gud Prins Yuji'n ; " — " Whai t woz a veri wikid thing ! " Sed litl' Wilami'n ; " Ney . . . ney . . . mai litl' goel," kwowth hi, "It waz a feymas viktari." " And evribodi preyzd dha Dyiik Hu dhis greyt fait did win." — " Boet whot gud keym of it set last ? " Kwowth litl* Pitakin : — " Whai dhaet ai kaBnot tel," sed hi, " Boat t woz a feymas viktari." — B. Southey. SCEM MOEMAR. Scem moemar, when dhear skai iz kliar And howlh brait tu vyu, If woen smol spek ov dak apiar In dhear greyt hevn' ov blu. And soem widh thaengkful loev ar fild If boet ween strik ov lait, Woen rey ov Godz gud moesi gild Dha daknis ov dhear nait. In paelasiz ar hats dhat ask, In diskantent and praid, Whai laif iz seech a driari task, And 61 gud thingz dinaid. And hats in puarist hcets admaiar Hau Loev haez in dhear eyd (Loev dhat not evar simz tu taiar) Seech rich pro'vizhan meyd. — Archbishop Trench. Alternative form : — x Molbara. EXEECISES. ] Exercise I. Silent letters to be left out, and i to be written instead of y or ie at the end of words. Instead of : — well begged deck sense Jessie ill filled kick twelve Minnie doll robbed rock give pussy pull pulled flock solve Johnnie mess very head wren merrily miss silly bread wrist steadily dross folly deaf knit possibly puss fully breast knob impossibility We write : — wel begd dek sens Jesi il fild kik twelv Mini dol robd rok giv pusi pul puld flok solv Joni mes veri hed ren merili mis sili bred rist stedili dros foli def nit posibli pus fuli brest nob imposibiliti Write in the same manner : — Bell, egg, inn, stiff, odd, full, digged, lived, lead, dead, pity, merry, sorry, Willy, ready, sense, stick, block, horrid, plenty, plentifully. 1 See Introduction to Phonetics, § 157. (69) 70 Exercises Exercise II. On words from Beading Lesson I. atend paet pet pit pot put a haed wel it foks intu an set get hiz woz gud and kaenot plenti iz ov wud apon aez frend in lukt agen haev frendz eni nimbli if Learn to write se all in one stroke. Observe the different sound of ae in pat and a in attend, America, villa. 1. What symbols do we generally use in the above words for a, ae, e, i, o, u ? 2. Write phonetically, that is, according to sound : — John had a good dog. Florrie looked at it. A bag full of wool. A woolly lamb. His foot is wet. His hand is full. Sam left his booh. Jem took it. Willy is not steady. Give him ten minutes. EXEECISE III. On words from Beading Lesson I. t n Y z k ks lukt kaenot OV aez kaenot foks compare plenti hiz compare compare kukt eni iz kaep waeks dipt nimbli woz kot veks stopt intu frendz kuk miks 1. What symbols do you generally use in the above words for t, n, y, z, ks ? Write according to sound : — Ann is a good cook. Henry has a pretty box. Ten pens. Exercises. 71 Twenty pence. Fifty books. Sixty beds. Many cocks and hens. A box of bricks. Willy knocked. John helped Tom. Minnie has bread and eggs. Ned spells well. Kitty has many friends. Exercise IV. On words from Beading Lesson II. a H th dh zh ch dha longgar thingk dhi trezhar which dhat thingk woeth dha compare moech compare compare compare dhis plezhar compare a singar thin dhat trezhar dich an finggar thik compare vizhan fech and hoenggri thisl' dhen dilyuzhan chin dhset dongki pith widh rtizh chest Observe that the endings of longgar and trezhar sound the same as those of graemar, kolar, selar, dolar, though we are accustomed to write long-er, treas-ure, gramm-ar, coll-ar, cell-ar y doll-ar. Write phonetically: — The bell was ringing. Annie was thinking. The lamb is drinking. Measure this bit of wood. A mossy bank. A hotch- potch. Match that red wool. Put in a stitch. Drink the milk. Fanny is at leisure. Ned has a treasure. John is very angry. Tom is angling. Exercise V. On words from Beading Lessons III. and IV. ey 1 ow u 03 u wey mi show hu cep krukid dhey si sow du seem tu (to) streyt pipl' dhowz fud boat compare teyking prisept ownli owld juil woen tu (too) tu (two) 72 Exercises. Note that cb should be written without lifting the pen. 1. Write in ordinary spelling two fresh examples of each of the sounds cb, ey, i, ow, u. 2. Write phonetically : — Haste makes waste. No pains, no gains. Ill weeds grow apace. Extremes meet. Charity begins at home. Great is the truth, and -it shall prevail. None of these things moved him. The tongue is not steel, but it cuts. Treasures {ending -az) of ivickedness profit nothing. EXEBCISE VI. On words from Beading Lesson V. a oe 6 as woer toking far goelz wokt lafing ritoening. yor fadhar oenist nor compare compare compare ar hoer A or star soer for stav woed stom kat boen hos Remember to write final r though it is sometimes silent. We hear it in far off, father is at home. Write phonetically : — Alms are the salt of riches. Truth may be blamed but can't be shamed. He that sleepeth in harvest is a son that causeth shame. A soft answer turneth away wrath. All her paths are peace. Forewarned, forearmed, Exercises. Exercise VII. On words from Beading Lesson VI. 73 ai an 01 yu ai alauing distr6id nyu bai daun compare rifyu'z taim gaun point compare mai compare joint yft straiv nau boi regyular maind bau joi vselyu The symbol for ou in house, namely au, is the same that is used for this sound in German, so we spell the English words house, mouse, exactly like German Haus, Maus. Observe that — ai is like a + i oi is like 6 + i au „ a + u yu „ y + u Write phonetically : — A stitch in time saves nine. If thou do ill, the joy fades, not the pains ; if well, the pain doth fade, the joy remains. The pan says to the pot, " Keep off, or you'll smutch me." Murder will out. Who knows nothing, doubts nothing. One foe is too many, and a hundred friends too few. No cross, no crown. Exercise VIII On words from Beading Lesson VIII. ar a a klsemar cedhaz pitishand betar libati ko'mowshan odar venchad kandishan terar compare ameyzmant compare odaz poenishmant selar teraz distans kolar selaz sekand vila kolaz prezantli Bela vilaz 74 Exercises. Observe how, when z is added, r disappears. Show that a, e, o or ou may stand for the sound a in ordinary spelling. Write phonetically : — Out of debt, out of danger. A 'prophet has no honour in his own country. Physician heal thyself. The receiver's as bad as the thief. A rolling stone gathers no moss. Thou shalt sooner detect an ant moving in the dark night on the black earth, than all the motions of pride in thine heart. EXEECISE IX. On Words from Beading Lesson VIII. P m J n' o' 0' mosl compare kcezn' pro'kytiar compare poepl' bseptizm' scedn' compare soro' compare sizm' owpn' pro'tekt fob' litr ksezm' compare molest folo'z bsebl'd bcetn' bilo' folo'd boebl'z ridn' bilo'z folo'ing ritn' bilow folo'ar Write phonetically : — Man proposes, God disposes. Coals to Newcastle. Misfor- tunes never come single. Heaven and earth fight in vain against a dunce. The river past and God forgotten. When the tale of bricks is doubled, Moses comes. Is Saul also among the prophets ? Exercise X. On Words from Beading Lesson VIII. ea ia 6a ua dhear hiar doar ptiar whear fiar stoar compare Exercises. ea ia da ua fear {fare) fiad bifo'ar btiar kear compare compare dtiar keafuli apiar doz muar compare apiaz stoz mtiaz feaz apiad stod muad fead ashuar roar ashuar keaz ashuaz roz ashuaz kead ashuad rod ashuad 75 The following words give the key to these sounds : — bear bier boar boor. Observe how words ending in r lose the r when a consonant is added, and words ending in oar lose a also. 1. Show in ordinary spelling two or more ways of repre- senting each of the sounds ear, iar, oar, uar. 2. Write phonetically : — More haste, worse speed. A scalded dog fears cold water. Ill doers are ill deemers. There's many a slip 'tivixt the cup and the lip. The fear of man bring eth a snare. A poor man is better than a fool. Before honour is humility. Exeecise XI. On words from Beading Lessons VIII and IX. aia aua yua Doubled letters, haiar owvapauad indyu'ar deyntiist haiad compare pro'kyuar middey compare auar sikyuariti compare faiar sauar compare pritiist faiaz pauar pyuar kseriing faiad pauaz indyuaz hoeriing taiar flauar indyu'ad stcediing taiaz flauaz pro'kyuar heddres taiad flauad pro'kyuad bukkeys 76 Exercises. Observe that r forms triphthongs. Also that doubled letters must be used in those few cases where the sounds are doubled. Write phonetically : — The grapes are sour. Knowledge is power. A burnt child fears the fire. It is naught, it is naught, saith the buyer, but when he is gone his way, then he boasteth. They were marry- ing and giving in marriage. To the pure all things are pure. We count them blessed which endure. Exercise XII. e and 6 are not always turned into diphthongs by r follow- ing. Examples : — kear kering keaz bear bering beaz stoar storing stod roar roring rod Note that e occurs only before r and a vowel. But 6 occurs also when r disappears before a consonant. Examples of e : — eri feri veri Sera verid heri deri Meri perant veriing Notice the appearance of words with ai or oi followed by i. Examples : — traiing baling dikoiing distroiing Write phonetically : — A hoary old man. A daring robbery. The door was ajar. Wood is porous. Clara will not return. Mary is enjoying her ride. Mr. Jones is employing a gardener. Her motives are not apparent. Morocco wears well. Sarah is lying down. Louisa is untying a knot. They are restoring the church. Exercises. 77 EXEECISE XIII. On Accent. In English most words are accented on the first syllable. But words ending in shan, zhan, shal or iti are always ac- cented on the syllable preceding these terminations. And the vowels a and o' are never accented ; so if the vowel of the first syllable is a or o', and the word does not end in shan, zhan, shal or iti, we accent the second syllable. Examples : — -shan, -zhan extension civilization mathematician intrusion indecision -shal, -iti a- O'- sagacious protect away propose account oblige lament produce arrival domain judicial initial inability majority humanity Write out the following words phonetically, marking the accent, and arranging them in three classes — (1) those whose accent is determined by the ending, (2) those whose accent is determined by the vowel of the first syllable, and (3) those which are irregular, not coming under the above rules : — protect parental continue delusion advise obedient exhibit abominable condescend molest exhibition impossibility division observation prejudicial intimidate return determine intelligent dislike severity expansion insensibility conceal APPENDICES. I. SPECIMENS OE EEENCH. L AiVTBOPOFAIJ. Deu pti garsow d la vil, Eicha:r e Gusta:v, s egare:r euw jou:r dawz un epe:s fore, Awfew i trouve:r un petit oberj, 6 milyeu d la fore, e iz i awtre:r pour i pase la nwi. A minwi, iz awtawdi:r parle daw la chawb vwazin. Gusta:v, ki n dorme pa e ky ete tre kuryeu, r6veya sow fre:r. Iz ale:r se met pre d la port, prete:r 1 ore:y e a7Jta7^di:r 1 oberjist ki dize a sa fam : " Ma che:r, demew matew tu metra la grawd chodye:r su 1 feti, j ve twe no deu pti dro:l de la vil." A se mo, le povz awfawpawse:r mouri:r de freyeu:r. Eicha:r, ky 6te tre poltrow, di : " Nou som perdu ! St om la et euwn awtropofaij ! Iy a dez antropofa:j, j 1 e" lu daw mow Eobewsow." Le pti Gusta:v, ky ete pa tutafe osi peureu, di : "I fo nou sove par la fne:t'r. Vyew. I se lva tou dousmaw, ouvri la fne:tr e" sota aw ba; s 6te pa tre dawjreti, kar la chaw:br £tet 6 r^tchose : Eicha:r sota apre. Me la port de la kou:r ete ferme. Ne pouvaw pa sorti:r, i cherche:r partou euw rfu:j, awfew i trouveir un etab'l. Gusta:v ouvri la port ; deu. gro:s be:t nwa:r sorti:r aw gronaw, e s elawse:r daw la kou:r ; le deu pti garsow, trawblaw kom de feu:y, y awtre:r a leur plas e i pase:r le restaw d la nwi. Le matew, 1 oberjist sorti daw la kou:r, euw gra7£ kouto a la mew. II ala drwa a 1 etabl e ouvri la port aw dizaw : " Alow, me pti dro:l, sorte" : vot dernyer eu:r e vwu." (79) 80 Appendices. L6* deuz anfan pouse:r de kri lamantabl 6 1 pri&:r a jnou de n pa le tae\ L oberjist, tout etone, leur di : " Keske vou fet don isi ? keske vou m konte? Mwa, vou twe? £ske vou m pren6 pour eun ma?zjeu:r d om ? " 11 M& wi, msjeu," di Eicha:r, " vouz ave di a vot fam, set nni : 11 ' demen j ture le deu pti dro:l de la vil.' " L oberjist parti d eun grant ekla d ri:r 6 di : " Ch parle d me deu kochorz : j le*z apel me pti dro:l de la vil, paske j 16z e acute" a la vil. — Alow, vn6 vit dejeune e vou debarbouye : answit j vou mozztrere 1 chemen pour rantre ch6 vo paran. Un 6t fwa vou n 6koutre plu 6 port." IA De£t Palmye\ Eun jou:r euzz Kalif pase 1 Ion d un ko:t arid ki s apel Cholwan ; i s i trouva deu palmye, seulz orneman de s d£ze:r. II ave swaf, e ordona k 1 on koupa 1 eun de palmye^ do?z la se:v dvet et:r eun breuva:j delisyeu. Lorske 1 arbre fut abatu, 1 onn apersu 1 enskripsyon szdvan:t : " Swaye" beni, 6 vou le deu palmye d Cholnan, ki ave done vo frni e pre:t£ votr on:br 6 po:vre pasa?z fatige . . . e maleu:r a selzzi ki vouz ora separe" ! " Le kalif eyaw lu se mo s santi malad e n put ale plu lw£n. — Ensi peri 1 pnisan ki detrzzi tou pour satisfe:r un anvi. Jerair de Nerval (Gerard de Nerval). La Mezo.v ki Maech. Charnase^ av£t un tre lon:g avnu dvan sa mezon awn Anjou ; dan set avnu bel e parfet et& plants un mezon d peizan e son pti jarden ki s i ete trouve lorsk el fu bati. Jame Charnase ni son pe:r n ave pu redzd.-r se peizan a la leur vanrd'r, kelk avanta:j k il lzzi ann us ofe:r ; e s et un opinya:trete don kantite d proprietor se pik, pour fe:r anraje de jan a la konvnanrs & kelke fwa a la n^sesite dekel i son. Charnase, ne sachazz plu k i fe:r, ave le:se sla dpzd lontan, sanz an plu parle. Anfen, fatige t s&t chomye:r ki \ui bouche la vu e lni Appendices. 81 ote ton 1 agremaw t sown avnu, il imajina euw tou:r de pas pars. Le peiza?j ki i dmeurre, e a ki el apartene, ete tayeu:r de sow metye, kawt i trouve a 1 egzerse ; e il ete che lwi ton seul, saw fam ni a?zfa?z. Charnase 1 awvwa cherche, lwi di k il e dma7ide a la kou:r pour eu?zn awplwa d kowsekaw:s, k il e prese d s i raw:d'r, me k i fad fo un livre. I fo^ marche 6 kowtaw ; me Charnase stipul kin veu pwen s fye a se dele, e ke, mwayena?i kekchorz de plus, i n veu pwew k i sort de che lui k sa livre n swa f et ; e k il le kouchra, le nourira e 1 peyra avaw de 1 ra7^vwaye. Le tayeu:r s i akord e s me a travaye. Pawdaw k il et okupe, Charnase fe pra?z:d'r avek la der- nyerr egzaktitud le pla?i e la dimawsyo7£ t sa mezow e t sow jardew, de pyes de 1 ewteryeurr, jusk a la pozisyo?z dez usta?^sil e de pti meub'l, fe demow:te la mezow, e a7iporte tou s ki y ete, rmo7z:t la mezow tel k el ete, 6 just, dedaw e deho:r, a kat porte d mouske, a kote t so?zn avnu ; replas tou le meubl e usta?isil da?i la merm pozisyow da??, lakel ow lez ave trouve, e retabli 1 peti jardew d mean ; aw mem ta?z, fet aplani:r e netwaye 1 a?z-drwa d 1 avnu ou el ete, aw sort k i n i paru pa. Tou sla fut egzekute a7ikor plu to k la livre fet, e spa?zdaw 1 tayeurr dousmaw garde a vu, d peu:r de kelk e?idiskresyow. — Anien la bzoS achve d part e d 6:t'r, Charnase amu:z sown om jusk a la nwi byen nwarr, le pery e 1 rawvwa kowta?z. Le via ki awfil 1 avnu. Byento i la trouv lo?z-:g ; apre, i va 6z arbr enaw trouv plu ; i s aperswa k il a parse 1 bou, e rvjen a lewstaw cherche lez arb'r ; i le sui a 1 estirn, pzd krwa:z e n trouv pa sa mezow ; i n ko?ipraw pwew st avawtu:r. La nwi s pars da?z st egzersis ; le jourr ari:v, e dvyew byewto ase klerr pour avize sa mezon. I n vwa ijen', i s frot lez yeu; i cherch d 6:tz obje pour dekouvrirr si s e la fo:t de sa vu. Anien, i krwa ke 1 dya:ble s aw merl e k il a a?zporte sa mezow. A fors d ale, de vni:r, e d porte sa vu d tou kote, il aperswa, a un ase gra?i:d distaw:s de 1 avnu, un mezow ki rsa7i:bl a la 6 82 Appendices. syen kom deu gout do. In peu krwa:r ke sla swa ; me la kuryozite 1 fet ale ou el e, e ou i n a jame vu d mezow. Pluz il aproch, pluz i rkone k s 6 la syen. Pour s asurre myeu de s ki lui tourn la te:t, i prezawrt sa kle ; el ourv'r, il aw:tr, i rtrou:v tou s k il y ave le:se, e presizemaw daw la mem plas. II e pre a aw pa:me, e dmeu:r kowvewku k s et euw tou:r de sorsye. La journe n fu pa hyenn avawse, k la ri:ze du cha:to e du vila:j 1 ewstrwi:zi d la verite du sortile:j, e 1 mit an fu:ri. I veu plede, i veu dmaw:de justis a 1 ewtawdaw, e partou ow s aw mok. Le rwa 1 su, ki aw rit osi, e Charnase u sown avnu lib'r. Si i n ave jame fe pi, il ore kowserve sa reputasyow e sa liberte. — Sen Simon (Saint Simon). 1 1 Msieu d Charnase flit arete e" mi aw pri:zcm, aku:z£, di Sew Simon, de b6kou d mechant cho:z, surtou d fo:s mone. Appendices. 83 II. SPECIMENS OF GEEMAN. Dur9 di:ze ho:le Gase mus 'ar komen ; 'As fii:rt kain 'andrer Ve:9 1 nach Kiisnaxt — hi:r Fola/nd i9S — di: Gele:jenhait 2 'ist giinstig. Dort dar Holiindershtraux farbn^t 3 mi9 'i:m ; Fon dort harap kan 'i:n main Pfail 'arlangen ; Das Ve:jes 4 'Ange ve:ret dan Farfoljern. 5 Max daine Ea^nung mit dam Himel, Fo:xt ! 6 Fort must du:, — daine 'U:r 'ist 'apgelaufen. 'I9 le:pte shtil 'unt harmlo:s — das Geshos Va:r 'auf das Valdes Ti:re nu:r geri9tet, Maine Gedangken va:ren rain fon Mort — Du: hast 'aus mainem Fri:den mi9 haraus Geshrakt ; 'in ga:rent Draxengift hast du: Di: Mil9 dar fromen Dangk'a:rt mi:r farvandelt ; Tsum 'Ungehoiren hast du: mi9 gevo:nt — Ve:r zi9 das Kindes Haupt tsum Tsi:le zatste, De:r kan 'auch trafen 'in das Harts das Faints. Auf di:zer Bangk fon Shtain vil 'i§ mi9 zatsen, Dam Vanderer tsur kurtsen Ru: beraitet — Dan hi:r 'ist kaine Haima:t — je:der traipt ZiG 'an dam 'andern rash 'unt framt fo:rii':ber, 'Unt fra:^et 7 ni9t nax zainem Shmarts — hi:r ge:t Dar zorjenfole 8 Kaufman 'unt dar lai9t Geshiirtste Piljer 9 — dar 'anda^tje M6n9, Dar dii:stre Eoiber 'unt dar haitre Shpi:lman, Dar Zoimer, mit dam shve:r bela:dnen Eos, Allowable forms (stage pronunciation): — x Ve:k. 2 Gele:genhait. 3 farbirkt. 4 Ve:ges. 5 Farfolgern. 6 Fo:kt, 7 fra:get. 8 zorgenfole, 9 Pilger, 84 Appendices. De:r fame he:rkomt fon dar Manshen Landern — Dan je:de Shtra:se fiirrt 'ans Ant dar Valt — Zi: 'ale tsi:en 'i:res Ve:jes : fort, 'An 'ihr Geshaft — 'unt maines 'ist dar Mort ! —Schiller, " Wilhelm Tell ". 'As tso:#en 2 drai Burshe vo:l 'ii:ber den Eain, Bai 'ainer Frau Virtin da: ke:rten zi: 'ain : 11 Frau Virtin ! hat zi: gu:t Bi:r 'unt Vain ? Vo: hat zi: 'i:r sho:nes Tocterlain ? " " Main Bi:r 'unt Vain 'ist frish 'unt kla:r. Main Tocterlain li:ct 3 'auf der To:tenba:r." 'Unt 'als zi: tra:ten tsur Kamer hinain, Dah la:x 4 zi: 'in ainem shvartsen Shrain. Der 'e:rste, de:r shlu:x 5 den Shlaier tsu:ru'k, 'Unt shaute zi: 'an mit traurijem 6 Blik : " 'Ax, le:ptest du: nox, du: sho:ne Mait ! 'Ig viirde di9 li:ben fon di:zer Tsait." Der tsvaite dakte den Shlaier tsu:, 'Unt ke:rte zic 'ap, 'unt vainte da:tsu: : "Ax, das du: li:cst 7 'auf der To:tenba:r ! 'I9 ha:p di9 geli:bet zo: manges Ja:r." Der drite hu:p 'i:n vi:der zo:glaic, 'Unt kiiste zi: 'an den Munt zo: blaic : " Die li:pt 'ig 'imer, dig li:b ig nox hoit, 'Unt ve:rde dig li:ben 'in 'Ervigkait." Uhland. 'As 'ist dox gevis, das 'in der Valt den Manshen nicts no:tvandic maxt 'als di: Li:be. 'Ic fii:ls 'an Loten, das zi: mig 'ungarn varlo':re, 'unt di: Kinder ha:ben kaine 'andre Allowable forms : — 1 Ve:ges. 2 tso:gen. 3 li:kt. 4 la:k. 5 shlu:k, 6 traurigem. 7 li:kst, Appendices. 85 'I:de:, 'als das 'ig 'imer morjen 1 virderkomen viirde. Hoit va:r ig hinausgegangen Lotens Klavi:r tsu: shtimen ; 'ig konte a:ber nigt da: tsu: kornen, dan di: Klainen farfolgten 2 mig 'urn 'ain Ma:rgen, 'unt Lote zarxte 3 zalpst, 'ig zolte 'i:nen den Vilen tu:n. 'Ig shnit 'i:nen das 'A:bentbro:t, das zi: nu:n fast zo: game fon mi:r, als fon Loten 'anne:men, 'unt 'artsa':lte 'i:nen das Hauptshtukgen fon dar Printsa'sin, di: fon Handen bedi:nt virt. 'Ig larne fi:l da:bai, das farzigr ig dig, 'unt ig bin 'arshtaunt, vas as 'auf zi: fii:r 'Aindriike maxt. Vail 'ig mangma:l 'ainen 'Intsi:da'ntspungkt 'arfmden mus, de:n 'ig bairn tsvaiten Ma:le farga'se, za:^en 4 zi: glaig, das fo:rije 5 Ma:l va:rs 'anders geve:st, zo: das 'ig mig jatst 'u:be, zi: 'unfar'a'nderlig, 'in ainem zingenden Zilbenfal 'an 'ainem Shnii:rgen vag 6 tsu: re:tsi:ti:ren. 'Ig ha:be darraus gelarnt, vi: 'ain 'Autor durg aine tsvaite far'a'nderte 'Aufla:^e 7 zainer Geshigte, 'unt van zi: nox zo: po:e:tish baser gevorden va:re, no:tvandig zainem Bu:xe sharden mus. Der 'e:rste 'Aindruk findet 'uns vilig, 'unt der Mansh 'ist zo: gemaxt, das man 'i:m das 'A:bentoierligste 'u:berre:den kan ; das haftet 'a:ber 'aux glaig zo: fast, 'unt ve:e de:m, de:r as vi:der 'auskratsen 'unt 'austiljen 8 vil ! — Gothe, "Die Leiden des jungen Werthers ". Allowable forms : — 1 Morgen. 2 farfolkten. 3 za:kte. 4 za:gen. 5 fo:rige. 6 vak. 7 'Aufla:ge. 8 'austilgen. 86 Appendices. III. SPECIMEN OF ENGLISH. Showing Variable Words in my own Pronunciation. Dhi Aisboeg. At twelv aklok wi went bilow an ad joest got thru dina, wen dha kuk put iz hed daun dha skcetl', an towld as ta kcem on dek an si dha fainist salt dhat wi ad eva sin. " Wher awey, kuk ? " ast dha foest maen hu went oep. " On dha labad bau." An dhea ley, flowting in dhi owshn', sevral mailz of, an imens iregyula maes, its top and points koevad widh snow, and its sentar av a dip indigo' kcela. Dhis waz an aisboeg, woen av dha lajist saiz, az woen av aua men sed hu ad bin in dha nodhan owshan. Az far az ai kud rich, dha si in evri direkshn' waz av a dip blu koela, dha weyvz roening hai an fresh, an spakling in dha lait ; and in dha midst ley dhis imens mauntin ailand, its ksevitiz an vseliz thrown inta dip sheyd, and its points an pinakl'z glitring in dhi ea. 01 haendz wa sun on dek luking set it and admairing in veri'as weyz its byuti an graenja ; beet now diskripshn' kan giv eni aidi'a av dha streynjnis, splendar, and rial sablimiti av dha sait. Its greyt saiz, far it mcest av bin fram tu ta thri mailz in sakoemfarans an sevral hcendrad fit in hait ; its slow mowshn', aez its beys rowz an saengk in dha wotaz, and its hai points nodid agenst dha klaudz ; dha dasshing av dha weyvz apon it, wich, breyking hai widh fowm, koevad its beys widh a wait kreest ; dha thoendring saund av dha kraeking av dha maes, an dha breyking an tcembling daun av hyuj pisiz, tagedha widh its nianis and aprowch, wich aedid a slait elimant av fia — 61 kambaind ta giv it dha kseriktar av tru sablimiti. Dha meyn bodi av dha maes woz, az ai av sed, av an indigo' koela, its beys waz kreestid widh frowzn' fowm, and aez it gru Appendices. 87 THE SAME SPECIMEN OF ENGLISH. With a fixed spelling for Variable Words. Dhi Aisboeg. Mt twelv aklok wi went bilow, and haed joest got thru dinar, when dha kuk put hiz hed daun dha skcetl', and towld oes tu kcem on dek and si dha fainist sait dhat wi haed evar sin. " Whear awey, kuk?" ast dha foest maen hu went oep. " On dha labad bau." And dhear ley, flowting in dhi owshan, sevral mailz of, an imens iregyular m83S, its top and points koevad widh snow, and its sentar ov a dip indigo' kcelar. Dhis woz an aisboeg, ween ov dha lajist saiz, aez woen ov auar men sed hu haed bin in dha nodhan owshan. Mz far aez ai kud rich, dha si in evri direkshan woz ov a dip blu kcelar, dha weyvz rcening hai and fresh, and spak- ling in dha lait ; and in dha midst ley dhis im£ns mauntin ailand, its kaevitiz and vaeliz thrown intu dip sheyd, and its points and pinakl'z glitring in dhi ear. 6l haendz woer sun on dek luking aet it and admairing in veri'as weyz its byuti and graenjar ; beet now diskripshan kaen giv eni aidi'a ov dha streynjnis, splendar, and rial sablimiti ov dha sait. Its greyt saiz, for it mcest haev bin from tu tu thri mailz in sakcemfarans and sevral hcendrad fit in hait ; its slow mowshan, aez its beys rowz and saengk in dha wotaz, and its hai points nodid agenst dha klaudz ; dha daeshing ov dha weyvz apon it, which, breyking hai widh fowm, kcevad its beys widh a whaitkreest ; dha thcendaring saund ov dha kraeking ov dha maea, and dha breyking and toembling daun ov hyuj pisiz, tagedhar widh its nianis and aprowch, which aedid a slait elimant ov fiar — 61 kambaind tu giv it dha kaeriktar ov tru sablimiti. Dha meyn bodi ov dha maes woz, aez ai haev sed, ov an indigo' kcelar, its beys woz kroestid widh frowzn' fowm, and aez it grti 88 Appendices. thin an transpe'rant tawodz dhi ejiz an top, its koela sheydid of fram a dip blu ta dha waitnis av snow. It simd ta bi drifting slowli tawodz dha noth, sow dhat wi kept awey and avoidid it. It waz in sait 61 dhi aftanun, and aez wi got ta lyuwad av it, dha wind daid awey, sow dhat wi ley tu, kwait niar it, fa dha greyta pat av dha nait. GBnfo'chanitli dha waz now mun, bat it waz a klia nait, and wi kad pleynli mak dha long regyula hiving av dha styupendas maes aez its ejiz muvd slowli agenst dha staz. Sevral taimz in aua woch laud kraeks wa hoed, wich saundid az dhow dhey mast av roan thru dha howl length av dhi ais- boeg, an sevral pisiz fel daun widh a thcendaring kraesh, ploen- jing hevili inta dha si. Tuwo'dz moning a strong briz spraeng oep, sow wi fild awey, an left it astoen, an at deylait it waz aut av sait. Appendices. 89 thin and transpe'rant tuwo'dz dhi ejiz and top, its koelar sheydid of from a dip blu. tu dha whaitnis ov snow. It simd tu bi drifting slowli tuwo'dz dha noth, so dhat wl kept awey and avoidid it. It woz in sait 61 dhi aftanu'n, and sez wi got to lyuwad ov it, dha wind daid awey, sow dhat wi ley tu, kwait nlar it, for dha greytar pat ov dha nait. (Enfo'chanitli dhear woz now mun, boat it woz a kliar nait, and wi kud pleynli mak dha long regyular hiving ov dha styupendas mses sez its ejiz muvd slowli agenst dha staz. Sevral taimz in auar woch laud kraeks woer hoed, which saundid aez dhow dhey nicest hsev rcen thru dha howl length ov dhi aisboeg, and sevral pisiz fel daun widh a thcendaring kraesh, ploenjing hevili intu dha si. Tuwo'dz moning a strong briz spraang cep, sow wi fild awey, and left it astoen,|and aet deylait it woz aut ov sait. ABERDEEN UNIVERSITY PRESS. 6* SOME OPINIONS ON THE FIEST EDITION. EXTRACTS FROM SOME SELECTED SCIENTIFIC OPINIONS. " You know how from my earliest writings I Jiave been an advocate of the study of Phonetics, and I was therefore much pleased to see your booh, ivhich gives a very fair and clear idea of the whole subject. It would be a great saving of time if Phonetics were taught in all schools ; the difficulty, Jiowever, is to find competent teachers. I hope your book may be lielpful in that direction." — Prof. F. Max Muller, Prof, of Comp. Philology at Oxford. " The book is admirable in every respect, and will be extremely useful to students." — The Rev. Prof. A. H. Sayce, Deputy-Prof, of Comp. Philo- logy at Oxford. "I have much pleasure in saying that I believe your Introduction to Phonetics to be a useful and even necessary book. I know of no better book for introducing the study to such as have not hitlierto given much attention to it, and I wish you all success." — The Rev. W. W. Skeat, Prof, of Anglo-Saxon at Cambridge. " I have read your Introduction to Phonetics with great pleasure, and have learnt a good deal from it." — Professor Otto Jespersen of Copen- hagen. " It really gives a much more intelligible Introduction to Phonetics than Dr. Sweet's book. I congratulate you heartily on your successful under- taking." — Professor Storm of Christiania. EXTRACTS FROM SOME PRESS OPINIONS. " The words, a step in the right direction, might serve to announce Miss Soames 1 excellent book, if we could be content with so very short a judgment. Fortunately we have space for more than that, so that we shall be able to add a few words in justification of our praise." — Phonetic Journal. EXTRACTS FROM SOME OPINIONS OF THE PRESS— (continued). " This clever work brings before the teacher in a new light the scientific methods on which the teaching alike of 'pronunciation and spelling should be based. We should certainly advise all teachers to study it who desire to obtain an intelligent insight into the study of Phonetics." — Child Life. " Miss Soames has earned a further claim to the gratitude of every right-minded and conscientious teacher, for whom the manual will prove in many an instance a welcome and useful guide''' — Education. " There is so much excellent work in it that we can highly commend it to all teachers and students who wish to study Phonetics in an attractive and popular form. To tlte French and German teacher in particular it will be found a most useful companion." — Journal of Education. "A valuable treatise on a subject in which simple text-books such as this are needed. We commend the book to the attention of all who wish to begin the study of sound-lore, and more especially to such as have tried Mr. Sweets writings and found them too tough." — University Corre- spondent. " Lucidly and attractively written. May be cordially recommended." — - Academy. Date Due PEG B'36 FES— a^l .'27 /( i —9 '5*i ■ l/a&i - 3 '61 M - , OECH I 198? f) BOSTON COLLEGE 3 9031 01167275 5 Sb & Soames, Laura Author Introduction to the Title atuA.y ^ ■? LV>/% y\